QAD Enterprise Applications 2008/2009

Standard Edition

User Guide
Introduction

Introduction
Using the Windows User Interface
Using the Character User Interface
Menu and Program Name Listing
Glossary

78-0708B
QAD 2008/2009 Standard Edition
June 2010
This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright and other
intellectual property laws. No part of this document may be reproduced, translated, or modified
without the prior written consent of QAD Inc. The information contained in this document is
subject to change without notice.

QAD Inc. provides this material as is and makes no warranty of any kind, expressed or
implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose. QAD Inc. shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or
consequential damages (including lost profits) in connection with the furnishing, performance,
or use of this material whether based on warranty, contract, or other legal theory.

QAD and MFG/PRO are registered trademarks of QAD Inc. The QAD logo is a trademark of
QAD Inc.

Designations used by other companies to distinguish their products are often claimed as
trademarks. In this document, the product names appear in initial capital or all capital letters.
Contact the appropriate companies for more information regarding trademarks and
registration.

Copyright © 2010 by QAD Inc.

QAD Inc.
100 Innovation Place
Santa Barbara, California 93108
Phone (805) 684-6614
Fax (805) 684-1890
http://www.qad.com
 Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
How the Software Is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
About the Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Manufacturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Financials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Customer Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Master Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Supply Chain Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
PRO/PLUS Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Using the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Program Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Types of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Interface Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
User Interface Manager Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
QAD Web Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
User Guide Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Chapter 2 Using the Windows User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Starting the Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Program Interface Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
iv User Guide — Introduction

Selecting a Menu Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Screen Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Message Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Progress Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Browses and Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Look-Up Browses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Drill-Down Browses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Browse Graphing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Output Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Display Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Server Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Locally Controlled Windows Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Batch Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Windows Keyboard Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Chapter 3 Using the Character User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Windows Character Client Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Starting in Character Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Program Interface Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Menu System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Menu Substitutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Screen Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Output Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Character-Mode Keyboard Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Chapter 4 Menu and Program Name Listing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

1. Items/Sites Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
2. Addresses/Taxes Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3. Inventory Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5. Purchasing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
 Contents v

7. Sales Orders/Invoices Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

8. Configured Products Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
10. Project Realization Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
11. Service/Support Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
12. Distribution Plan Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
13. Product Structures Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
14. Routings/Work Centers Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
15. Formula/Process Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
16. Work Orders Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
17. Shop Floor Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
18. Repetitive Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
19. Quality Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
20. Product Line Plan Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
21. Resource Plan Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
22. Forecast/Master Plan Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
23. Material Requirements Plan Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
24. Capacity Requirements Plan Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
25. General Ledger Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
26. Multiple Currency Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
27. Accounts Receivable Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
28. Accounts Payable Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
30. Cost Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
31. Cash Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
32. Fixed Assets Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
33. Enterprise Operations Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
35. EDI ECommerce Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
36. Manager Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
vi User Guide — Introduction
 Chapter 1

Introduction
This book introduces QAD Enterprise Applications 2008 Standard
Edition (QAD 2008 - Standard) application. If you are new to the
product or the manufacturing environment, you should spend some time
reading this section.
How the Software Is Organized 2

About the Modules 2

Using the Software 25

Documentation 33
2 User Guide — Introduction

How the Software Is Organized

All QAD 2008 - Standard application users have one thing in common—
they manage and control inventory. Whatever the industry, manufacturing
process, or organizational structure, companies must track the products
they manufacture or distribute. Accordingly, the software is organized
around business activities related to inventory management.
The first menu is the main menu. In most user interfaces, it has seven
application-related sections—Distribution, Manufacturing, Financials,
Customer Services, Master Data, Custom, and Supply Chain.
In turn, each of these sections consists of groups of related business
activities called modules. In some cases, two related business activities
are combined in one module, such as Formula/Process.
¶ See Figure 1.8 on Additional navigation menu options apply only to the QAD NET. and
page 30 for QAD Desktop user interfaces. For example, they let you access custom
examples of main
menus. menus and personal bookmarks to Internet or intranet resources and view
and use custom work flows created with the Process Editor. You can read
more about them in the user guide for your interface.

About the Modules

Within each of the seven sections of the main menu are several top-level
menu items. Each of these menu items represents a module. Some
modules sold separately are listed as submenu entries, such as
Compliance (1.22) and Product Change Control (1.9). Contact your sales
representative for configuration and pricing information.

Distribution
Modules in the Distribution section
support two types of activity.
One kind of activity moves
materials into inventory from
external sources such as suppliers
or other company sites.
 Introduction 3

The other kind of activity moves materials out of inventory to satisfy

external demand such as customer sales orders and intersite transfers.
These modules are used by warehousing, distribution, and field customer
service operations. Purchasing is also used in manufacturing operations to
obtain raw materials, components, and receive services such as
subcontracting.
Fig. 1.1
Distribution
CONFIGURED SALES SALES
Relationships
CONFIGURED SALES SALES
PRODUCTS
PRODUCTS QUOTATIONS
QUOTATIONS ANALYSIS
ANALYSIS

SALES
SALES
RELEASE
RELEASE PURCHASE
PURCHASE
ORDERS/
ORDERS/ PURCHASING
PURCHASING
MANAGEMENT
MANAGEMENT REQUISITIONS
REQUISITIONS
INVOICES
INVOICES

Purchase Requisitions

The system provides two modules to manage purchase requisitions: the

standard Purchase Requisition module and the optional Global
Requisition module. Standard requisitions are created using functions in
the Purchase Requisition module. If you have purchased the optional
Global Requisition module, you can create purchase requisitions that
support multiple lines and a more complex approval cycle.
Purchase requisitions represent an authorization for a buyer to purchase a
specific item or product. A requisition can be entered manually or
generated by Material Requirements Planning (MRP) as a planned order.

Purchasing

Use Purchasing to add and maintain purchase orders. A purchase order is

the record of a supply of items or products to be delivered at a specific
time in a specific quantity. A purchase order can be entered directly or
entered by means of a purchase requisition.
4 User Guide — Introduction

Purchasing functions are tightly integrated with MRP to provide up-to-

date information needed to execute the materials plan. An important
function of Purchasing is to report purchase amount commitments by time
period. This reporting synchronizes purchases and payments to
correspond with cash receipts.

Sales Quotations

Use Sales Quotations to maintain information on sales quotations to

customers. Sales quotations can be released to Sales Orders/Invoices to
create sales orders.

Sales Orders/Invoices

Use Sales Orders/Invoices to input customer orders, release packing lists

to shipping, print invoices, and maintain sales history. This module
interfaces with Sales Analysis, Inventory Control, and Material
Requirements Planning to provide a constant stream of data to facilitate
accurate distribution, manufacturing, and sales management.
Posted invoices are automatically transferred to Accounts Receivable for
aging, payment maintenance, and integration with General Ledger.
Advanced features of Sales Orders/Invoices include support for
international shipping requirements and Enterprise Material Transfer
(EMT). EMT automatically translates sales orders (and material orders in
Customer Services modules) into purchase orders and transmits them to
the appropriate supplier in electronic data interchange (EDI) format using
EDI eCommerce. EMT also manages and coordinates changes so that
sales order and purchase order information is synchronized.

Release Management

Release Management includes Customer Schedules and Supplier

Schedules. Unlike discrete orders, scheduled orders are based on a set of
scheduled shipment dates and quantities, and are typically used for high-
volume or key component items.
 Introduction 5

Configured Products

Configured Products lets you build products as requested by customers.

Use this module to enter product configuration information, review
configured items on orders, and release sales orders to work orders.
You can also define configured product bills, used to define option
selections during order and sales quotation entry. Work orders can be
created directly from these sales orders with a work order bill for the
exact product configuration specified during order entry.

Sales Analysis

Use Sales Analysis to track salesperson quotas and generate sales reports.
Reports can be generated for year-to-date sales, margins, costs, and
quotas. You can integrate Sales Analysis with Sales Orders/Invoices.

Consigned Inventory

Two optional modules let you manage consigned inventory that you send
to your customers or that your suppliers send to you.
• The Customer Consignment Inventory module lets you plan, order,
ship, track, and report customer-consigned inventory using an
automated system that reconciles inventories between suppliers and
customers. Invoicing and AR transactions are deferred until the
inventory is used by the customer.
• The Supplier Consignment Inventory module lets you plan, order,
receive, stock, track, and report supplier-consigned inventory.
Accounts payable (AP) transactions are deferred until you use the
inventory.
6 User Guide — Introduction

Manufacturing
Manufacturing modules handle
internal supply and demand.
Material is moved out of inventory
into production, or finished goods
or components are moved from
production into inventory. These
modules are used for make-to-
stock, assemble-to-order, process,
job shop, flow, and repetitive
operations, and support such operations as:
• Recording static information on manufacturing processes and the
materials used to make products
• Determining requirements and availability for materials and resources
used in production
• Tracking items that are produced
• Assigning demand orders to flow production line schedules in a lean
manufacturing environment
• Tracking the movement of kanban-controlled items in and out of
production in a lean manufacturing environment
Fig. 1.2
Manufacturing
Relationships PRODUCT
PRODUCT
SHOP FLOOR
SHOP FLOOR
FORECAST/
FORECAST/
STRUCTURES CONTROL MASTER PLAN
STRUCTURES CONTROL MASTER PLAN

MATERIAL
ROUTINGS/ WORK QUALITY MATERIAL
ROUTINGS/ WORK QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
WORK CENTERS ORDERS MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS
WORK CENTERS ORDERS MANAGEMENT PLANNING
PLANNING

CAPACITY
FORMULA/ CAPACITY
FORMULA/ REPETITIVE REQUIREMENTS
PROCESS REPETITIVE REQUIREMENTS
PROCESS PLANNING
PLANNING
 Introduction 7

Product Structures

A product structure—also known as a bill of material—is a definition of

the relationship between parent and component items. Product structures
are modular. A parent can be composed of one or more components, and
each component in turn can be composed of other components.
Use Product Structures to add and maintain the list of components for
each product and subassembly. Once a product structure has been defined
for a product, it can be used to produce a higher-level product.

Routings/Work Centers

Use Routings/Work Centers to define the departments, work centers,

machines, standard operations, and routings involved in manufacturing a
product. Routings can be printed on work order picklists and must be
defined prior to using Shop Floor Control, Repetitive, or Advanced
Repetitive. Routings can also be entered as processes in Formula/Process.

Formula/Process

Use Formula/Process to add and maintain formulas and processes for

each product and component item. This module enables you to define a
process and link a batch formula or receipt with a percent of batch
quantity usage for components.

Work Orders

Use Work Orders to maintain work orders and print picklists and routings.
This includes planning work orders, recording picklist issues, completing
operations, and receiving the finished product into stock.
A work order includes a bill and a routing. A work order bill represents
demand for component items. A work order routing represents demand
for labor or machine capacity. Work orders can be entered directly, or
entered as planned orders from Material Requirements Planning (MRP).
8 User Guide — Introduction

Components on a work order bill and operations on a work order routing

can be changed once the work order is planned. This enables custom
products to be manufactured and tracked. The Work Orders module
provides a basis for shop floor control by scheduling operation start dates
and due dates.

Shop Floor Control

Use Shop Floor Control to record labor times and the status of operations.
This module uses routings from Work Orders to calculate standard-
versus-actual variances, as well as efficiency and utilization. Shop Floor
Control uses detailed routings from Work Orders to gather data on the
progress of work orders in the shop.

Flow Scheduling

Flow scheduling supports the principles of lean manufacturing by letting

you create time-phased, sequenced production line schedules that can be
linked with existing demand orders and work orders. Flow scheduling
tools let you analyze the effects of different production line scenarios on
flow rates, as well as measure how well actual production tracks the
scheduled production.

Kanban

Kanban production is common in some flow and repetitive manufacturing

environments. The Kanban module lets you identify items that are kanban
controlled, maintain kanban-related data for these items, automatically
calculate the number of kanban cards based on number of containers, and
use kanban transactions to track and manage the movement of kanban-
controlled items in and out of production. Kanban also prints kanban
cards on demand.

Repetitive

There are two versions of this module: Repetitive and Advanced

Repetitive. The Repetitive module works well when manufacturing lead
times are relatively short and work is complete by the end of each day.
The Advanced Repetitive module supports manufacturing environments
 Introduction 9

with long manufacturing lead times and continuous processing over

extended periods. In these environments, tracking WIP becomes more
important. Advanced Repetitive also supports subcontract operations.
Use repetitive functions to enter daily production schedules and report
actual production in repetitive manufacturing environments that do not
use work orders. Labor, scrap, and downtime are reported by item number
and operation only. As operations are reported, components are issued
automatically.
Use Advanced Repetitive to obtain the following additional features:
• Cumulative work order processing
• Scrap, reject, rework, adjustments reporting
• Subcontract and non-milestone processing
• More detailed control of scheduling

Quality Management

Use Quality Management to test incoming material, finished products,

and inventory, and to inspect first articles, processes, or items in process.
You can define specifications, as well as test procedures and inventory
sampling. This module supports destructive testing and contains
programs that record test results. For all but in-process inspection, you
manage quality with quality orders, which are documents that specify
what is tested, how, and when.

Forecasting/Master Schedule Planning

This module is split into two business activities: forecasting and master
scheduling.
Use forecasting functions to calculate and maintain individual item or
product group forecasts used by master scheduling and MRP.
Use master schedule planning functions to help you define master
production schedules for end items, critical subassemblies, and service
parts. This module uses inputs from forecasting, sales orders, work
orders, and purchasing to calculate gross requirements and available-to-
10 User Guide — Introduction

promise quantities. You can also enter seasonal build schedules from
seasonal forecasts and create multilevel master schedules for items whose
demand is dependent on demand for other items.

Material Requirements Planning (MRP)

MRP uses product structures, inventory, the master schedule, and

independent demand to summarize supply and demand from other
modules and create work orders and material plans.

Capacity Requirements Planning (CRP)

Use CRP to recalculate time-phased capacity plans and produce capacity

planning reports. CRP calculates load from planned and/or released work
orders, as well as exploded repetitive schedules. Work center/machine
requirements are expressed in hours and can be reported within user-
specified time periods based on days, weeks, or months.

Financials
These modules support financial
activities and system administration.
General Ledger, Accounts
Receivable, and Accounts Payable
track the financial effects of activities
in other modules. You can set up
multiple currencies and exchange
rates, develop simulated costs and
copy them to multiple cost sets, and track cash disbursements.
You can also use Financials to track your fixed assets from acquisition to
retirement.
 Introduction 11

Fig. 1.3
Financials
MULTIPLE
Relationships
MULTIPLE
CURRENCY
CURRENCY

FIXED
FIXED ACCOUNTS
ACCOUNTS CASH
CASH ACCOUNTS
ACCOUNTS
ASSETS
ASSETS RECEIVABLE
RECEIVABLE MANAGEMENT
MANAGEMENT PAYABLE
PAYABLE

COST
COST GENERAL
GENERAL
MANAGEMENT
MANAGEMENT LEDGER
LEDGER

General Ledger

Use General Ledger (GL) to set up a chart of accounts, enter budgets, and
manage GL journal transactions; to set up and review GL daybooks; to
review, modify, and post transaction entries from subsidiary ledgers such
as accounts payable; to set up intercompany accounts; and to produce
financial reports. GL transactions can be reported for any time period and
for any financial entity. GL reports can be produced at any level of detail
or consolidation.

Multiple Currency

The Multiple Currency module provides a full set of functions that

enables your system to support monetary amounts expressed in either the
domain base currency or in a non-base (foreign) currency. Foreign
currencies can be used with purchase orders, sales quotations, sales
orders, price lists, accounts receivable, accounts payable, and customer
services. In General Ledger, foreign currencies can be used when entering
transactions or setting up balance sheet accounts for assets and liabilities.
Use Multiple Currency to define currencies, maintain exchange rates, and
set up bank codes. You must define one base currency for each domain
and specify it in Domain/Account Control (36.1). You can define as many
other currency codes as your company uses.
12 User Guide — Introduction

Accounts Receivable

Use Accounts Receivable to enter debit and credit memos, apply

payments, and track balances owed by customers. Balances can be
entered directly as memos or transferred from Sales Orders/Invoices.
Accounts Receivable can be used alone or in combination with other
modules.
Before using Accounts Receivable, set up default information for
customers such as credit terms, tax rates, ship-to addresses, and
salespersons. Also define detail information for items such as product
lines, GL accounts, cost centers, and prices in the appropriate modules. In
Sales Orders/Invoices, Accounts Receivable is integrated in Sales Order
Control (7.1.24).

Accounts Payable

Use Accounts Payable to record amounts owed to vendors and to process

and print payments for those amounts. Accounts Payable can be used
alone or in combination with other modules, including Purchasing. Before
using Accounts Payable, set up GL accounts, vendors, credit terms, and
bank accounts in the appropriate modules.

Cost Management

Use Cost Management to create and maintain an unlimited number of cost

sets. You can:
• Create and maintain different GL and current cost sets for each site
and use different costing methods.
• Establish cost planning sets to be automatically activated at specified
dates to recognize expected material or other cost changes.
• Retain inactive cost sets to generate historical comparisons.
• Specify default source cost sites for items held at multiple sites in one
domain. You can assign costs for items to specified sites regardless of
where the items are produced or stored.
 Introduction 13

Cash Management

Use Cash Management to review and control your cash position. You can
maintain bank statements in the online Cash Book. When the bank sends
a statement, payments and other amounts are recorded in the Cash Book.
The information on the statement then updates system records in the same
way as other payments.

Fixed Assets

Use Fixed Assets to set up, maintain, transfer, and retire your company’s
fixed assets. The fixed-asset depreciation system is integrated with the
General Ledger module. Often, depreciation is calculated one way for
internal reporting and another way for tax purposes. Using Fixed Assets,
you can set up asset records specifying how depreciation will be
calculated for each kind of reporting.
Depreciation is calculated using either equations or tables. Conventions
can be used in conjunction with equations for depreciation calculations in
the first, last, and disposal years of an asset’s life.

Customer Services
Customer Services currently consists
of two modules:
• Project Realization Management
(PRM)
• Service/Support Management
(SSM)
Both modules support activity that occurs after a product is sold. SSM
supports traditional service activities such as warranties, contracts,
returns, and call tracking. PRM provides tools for managing long-term
installation activities at a customer site that combine both items and
services.
14 User Guide — Introduction

Fig. 1.4
Customer Services SSM PRM
Relationships
RETURNS SERVICE PROJECT
RETURNS SERVICE PROJECT INVOICING
AND REPAIRS CONTRACTS DEFINITION INVOICING
AND REPAIRS CONTRACTS DEFINITION

INSTALLED CALL TRACKING AND

INSTALLED CALL ENGINEERS TRACKING AND
BASE MANAGEMENT ENGINEERS REPORTING
BASE MANAGEMENT REPORTING

SERVICE MATERIAL PROJECT

SERVICE MATERIAL PROJECT
INVENTORY ORDERS INVENTORY
INVENTORY ORDERS INVENTORY

Project Realization Management (PRM)

PRM provides a set of tools that enable you to define, track, and invoice
projects that are delivered to or implemented at customer sites.

Project Definition

Use PRM features to set up projects with item, labor, and expense
components and tailor them to specific customer, engineering, and billing
requirements. Then, translate the project design into sets of related
activities and reference these on project activity orders (PAOs) that define
how the project is executed.

Project Inventory

¶ For more on Use material orders (MOs) and project purchase orders to obtain required
MOs, see items from internal and external suppliers and ship them to designated
“Service
Inventory” on project locations. These locations let you track and reserve project items
page 16. separately from other items in the system.

Invoicing

Flexible invoicing features let you invoice projects after they are
complete or over time in a series of predefined increments. You can also
request and process prepayments from project customers as needed.
 Introduction 15

Tracking and Reporting

PRM lets you track projects in multiple ways throughout their life cycle.
As project activity is completed, record the actual quantities and costs of
the item, labor, and expense components consumed and update Work in
Process (WIP) with the issue costs. Detailed inquiries and reports let you
plan and evaluate project activity throughout the project life cycle.
You can generate budgets for tracking actual project costs and comparing
them to planned costs. In addition, automatically generated general ledger
(GL) project codes let you trace project activity in the GL.

Service/Support Management (SSM)

SSM enables you to manage interactions related to the support,

maintenance, and repair of items covered by warranty or service contract.
Features of SSM are grouped in several functional areas, which can be
used interchangeably to build an effective service solution.

Installed Base

SSM enables service organizations to maintain information about the

products they sell or service and the individuals who own them. This
information is collectively referred to as the installed base (ISB).
Comprehensive installed base information is a foundation for effective
customer service. The installed base can be updated directly from sales
shipments and other service activities, as well as manually.

Service Contracts

Service contracts define a relationship with the service customer and

multiple end users and items, specifying the cost, terms, and conditions
for such things as telephone support, field repairs, and maintenance.
Before a contractual agreement is signed, service quotes can be generated,
and later released to contracts.
16 User Guide — Introduction

Call Management

SSM handles incoming calls and entitlement recognition. To ensure that

calls are responded to in a timely manner, each service organization can
set up escalation rules. Calls can be moved from one queue to another
with increasing priority until a response is made. Call defaults streamline
call creation for calls that follow predefined patterns.
When engineers complete a service activity, they can easily record
activity details in the system. If established repair sequences are used,
item and labor usage is automatically loaded. As activity is recorded, the
system uses coverage levels and limits of any applicable contract or
warranty to determine who is responsible for payment.

Service Engineers

User-defined rules can also be created for managing assignment of

service personnel. Engineers are ranked for selection based on a weighted
point system. When a new call is assigned, an automatic paging system
can be used to notify the engineer.

Service Inventory

Inventory required for service activity is managed using material orders

(MOs). MOs are similar to sales orders, without invoicing information.
MOs can be created, confirmed, allocated, and shipped like sales orders.
However, MO shipment is actually an inventory transfer, moving items
from stocking locations in preparation for use in service activity.

Returns and Repairs

Return Material Authorizations (RMAs) are used to manage simple

returns. A replacement item can be sent, either before or after the returned
item is received. Returned items can be sent back to the original supplier
or repaired and returned to stock.
RMA processing is fully integrated with the installed base and coverage
recognition. Invoices or credits are generated and tracked in the Sales
Orders/Invoices module.
 Introduction 17

Master Data
Use the modules in Master Data to
set up basic business information—
item codes, address codes, site
codes, and inventory control
information. Also use Master Data to
perform administrative functions
pertaining to users, security, printers, and other administrative functions
that apply throughout the QAD 2008 - Standard application.
Master Data also includes some special optional modules that affect base
data, such as Product Change Control, Compliance, Intrastat, and
Logistics Accounting.
Fig. 1.5
Master Data
ITEMS/
PRODUCT
PRODUCT Relationships
COMPLIANCE ITEMS/ CHANGE
COMPLIANCE SITES CHANGE
SITES CONTROL
CONTROL

ADDRESSES/ INVENTORY PHYSICAL

ADDRESSES/ INVENTORY PHYSICAL
TAXES CONTROL INVENTORY
TAXES CONTROL INVENTORY

MANAGER
MANAGER
FUNCTIONS
FUNCTIONS

Items/Sites

Use Items/Sites to add and maintain product lines, items, sites, units of
measure, and price lists. Other modules in the Items/Sites menu include
Product Change Control (PCC) and Compliance. The Compliance and
PCC modules are available separately.
Every item must be associated with a product line, which is used to:
• Group items or products on reports.
• Associate GL accounts with items or products.
• Plan production, shipments, orders, inventory, and backlog levels.
18 User Guide — Introduction

Items and products must be entered in this module before they can be
used in other system modules. Supplier and customer item numbers can
be entered as well. There is no practical limit to the number of items or
products that can be maintained.

Product Change Control

Use Product Change Control (PCC) to control and monitor product

changes from inception through implementation. With PCC, you can
modify item engineering data, product structures, routings, formulas,
processes, and item specifications without affecting the records that
control activity in your database. You can define an approval cycle for
product changes. After approval, changes can be incorporated into the
database tables that manage product definition.

Compliance

Use Compliance to ensure manufacturing practices comply with

government regulations such as the Food and Drug Administration (FDA)
Current Good Manufacturing Practices, and with international agreements
such as the North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA) and General
Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT).

Addresses/Taxes

This module contains two business activities: Addresses and Taxes. Other
modules in the Addresses/Taxes menu include Intrastat and Logistics
Accounting. These modules are available separately.
Use Addresses to add and maintain customer, employee, salesperson,
supplier, carrier, and company information, including addresses, ship-to
and remit-to codes, and master comments. Also define address-related
data such as country codes, shipping groups, banks, freight charges, credit
terms, and trailer codes.
Use Taxes to set up and maintain the Global Tax Management (GTM)
system. GTM provides support for many different kinds of regional tax
systems. It features precise tax calculations, complex tax environments,
taxes for multiple countries in the same database, as well as other features
important to international companies.
 Introduction 19

Intrastat

Use the Intrastat module if you do business with European Union member
countries and need written documentation of inventory movements to
meet legislative requirements.

Logistics Accounting

For some companies, a significant proportion of purchases are imports.

For others, the shipment of goods by a third-party carrier is a frequently
occurring expense. In these cases, transportation costs can have a large
financial impact since they can represent a high percentage of the total
delivered cost.
Use Logistics Accounting to define and track the individual costs
associated with the transportation of goods into and out of company
locations. You can build these costs into the standard cost for items or
track them as an expense in the general ledger.

Inventory Control

Proper procedures in the physical control of inventory are necessary for

accurate materials planning. If the balances on hand are not correct, items
may be ordered before needed, or not ordered in time. Use Inventory
Control to create inventory receipts, issues, transfers, and cycle count
adjustments. You can generate reports based on inventory transaction
history, and trace lot/serial numbers as they are used in the system.

Physical Inventory

Physical Inventory is a submodule of Inventory Control. Use its functions

to count items and products on hand. Counts are manually recorded with
inventory tags, then tag counts are entered to update live inventory
balances.

Manager Functions

Use Manager Functions to define a broad range of system data and

perform other specialized, administrative tasks. You can define domain
constants such as codes, calendars, time zones, and number ranges. You
20 User Guide — Introduction

can also execute operating system commands, set up printers, maintain

system security, register applications, modify the user interface, and set
up application servers.
Features in Manager Functions report master comments, report unposted
GL transactions, manage batch run requests, access CIM interface
functions, dump/load data files, load archive files, and report control
settings.

External Interfaces

Manager Functions includes programs for accessing external programs

through interfaces and application programming interfaces (APIs), as well
as for developing your own interfaces (Q/LinQ). You can access
programs designed to interface with warehousing systems, planning
systems, and sales and use tax systems. You can also use a Logistics API
built with Q/LinQ to interface with extended supply chain systems.
Q/LinQ provides a set of interface development tools that includes APIs
and related common functions. It facilitates the creation of interfaces to
other applications such as logistics and distribution systems, factory
automation systems, scheduling systems, and sales order entry
applications.

Security and Enhanced Controls

Security features provide numerous robust, configurable security options

to system administrators—particularly when they are tasked with meeting
the security requirements of external regulatory agencies such as the U.S.
Food and Drug Administration (FDA).
Features include control over system access at several points, including
log-in, domain change, the menu system, and such elements as sites and
GL accounts. Tools are available for assigning and controlling user
passwords, as well as tracking and monitoring user access.
When used with available operating system and Progress tools, the
system provides a comprehensive approach to security in a regulated
environment.
 Introduction 21

An additional level of accountability control is provided by the optional,

separately installed Enhanced Controls module. It allows companies to
track in detail who made changes to enterprise-critical data, what changes
were made, and when.
• Use audit trail functions to maintain multiple separate audit databases
containing a history of changes made to records associated with the
database tables you choose.
• Use electronic signature functions to apply electronic signature
requirements to a subset of menu programs and database tables you
choose from QAD-provided default setup data.

Supply Chain Management

Supply chain management is the
movement of goods and information
from suppliers and multiple company
sites through the manufacturing
process.
Modules in this section support supply
chain planning practices—distribution, product line, resource, and
operations—as well as electronic data interchange (EDI) transactions
using EDI eCommerce.
Fig. 1.6
Supply Chain
DISTRIBUTION
PRODUCT
PRODUCT
Modules
DISTRIBUTION LINE
PLAN LINE
PLAN PLAN
PLAN

ENTERPRISE
ENTERPRISE
RESOURCE
RESOURCE OPERATIONS
OPERATIONS EDI
EDIECOMMERCE
ECOMMERCE
PLAN
PLAN PLANNING
PLANNING

Distribution Plan

Use Distribution Plan to create a distribution requirements plan (DRP)

and manage its results. Distribution Plan balances supply and demand
between sites by calculating item requirements, creating planned orders,
and managing shipment schedules and transportation.
22 User Guide — Introduction

Product Line Plan

Use Product Line Plan to plan shipments, production, inventory, backlog,

and gross margin by product line. The product line production forecast
can then be used to project resource requirements.

Resource Plan

Use Resource Plan to plan the main resources of a manufacturing plant.

Resources can be associated with any item or product line. This module
uses either the production plan or master schedule to produce resource
requirements reports and inquiries.

Enterprise Operations Planning

Enterprise Operations Planning transforms sales forecasts from

Forecasting/Master Schedule Planning into production and purchasing
requirements that can be used by MRP, DRP, Purchasing, Repetitive, and
Work Orders. Enterprise Operations Planning takes into account quantity-
on-hand inventory from Inventory Control and supports planning at
multiple levels, including product family and end item.

EDI eCommerce

Electronic data interchange (EDI) is an international protocol that defines

means and methods for electronic transmission of documents. It is
commonly used with distribution functions such as release management
to facilitate electronic transfer of standard business transaction
documents.
EDI can be used to transmit a variety of documents, but most common are
purchase orders and supplier schedules, sales orders and customer
schedules, invoices, and advance ship notices (ASNs).
EDI eCommerce is a globally deployable EDI solution that features
reduced installation and support requirements. EDI eCommerce processes
international EDI document standards with most major third-party EDI
communications or translation software—referred to collectively as EC
subsystems—currently on the market.
 Introduction 23

PRO/PLUS Modules
An additional set of modules is available as a separate package called
PRO/PLUS.

WIP Lot Trace

The WIP Lot Trace (WLT) module can be used with manufacturing
environments supported by the Repetitive, Advanced Repetitive, or Work
Orders modules. It adds WIP lot and serial tracing and reporting
functions. Tracing records are created at the operation level whenever
registered resources are consumed or produced.

Container and Line Charges

The Container and Line Charges (CLC) module provides suppliers a way
to track and invoice customers for:
• Shipping containers, such as pallets, crates, or bins
• Extra line charges, such as shipping, painting, and detailing

Self-Billing

The Self-Billing module lets you process customer-initiated payments by

applying payment to invoices based on line-item shipper details.

Supplier Performance

The Supplier Performance module enables manufacturers to monitor the

performance of their internal and external suppliers. Depending on your
manufacturing environment, you can customize the way your system
collects performance data as well as how you report performance metrics.
You can create your own data collection points or use the ones predefined
in the system.
24 User Guide — Introduction

Shipment Performance

The Shipment Performance module lets you monitor shipping

effectiveness by measuring how a shipping department meets customer-
requested ship dates and quantities. You can choose which date to use for
measuring performance based on your business practices: the line-item
performance date, due date, or required date.
You can collect shipment performance data for a wide variety of shipment
types including discrete and scheduled sales orders, return material
authorizations (RMA), distribution orders, and material orders.

Supplier Shipping Schedules

Standard Release Management supports one type of supplier schedule

that combines short-term and long-term requirements. The PRO/PLUS
Supplier Shipping Schedules module lets you generate separate supplier
planning and shipping schedules.

Customer Sequence Schedules

Standard Release Management supports customer shipping and planning

schedules, which convey short-term and long-term customer
requirements. The PRO/PLUS Customer Sequence Schedules (CSS)
module lets you receive and process shorter term, more detailed customer
sequence schedules—EDI document type 866.
A customer sequence schedule provides a detailed, short-term view of a
customer’s planned requirements. These requirements typically span no
longer than a week, and are sent to you, the supplier, in the order that your
customer’s manufacturing environment plans to consume them.
 Introduction 25

Using the Software

The software features four user interfaces (UIs):
• QAD Enterprise Applications for Windows. This graphical user ¶ See page 37.
interface is designed to run on Windows clients in both UNIX and
Windows client/server environments.
• Character mode. This is the original user interface. It is primarily ¶ See page 77.
intended for UNIX-based environments with character clients.
• QAD .NET UI. This is a common UI framework for multiple QAD
applications. Because the UI is based on Microsoft .NET technology,
it incorporates familiar UI metaphors, reducing the need for users to
learn how to navigate QAD applications.
• QAD Desktop. This browser-based UI is designed for use over a
company intranet or wide-area network. It features screens that
display as HTML pages, full text search, multiple detached windows,
and a Process Editor for creating work flows with active Uniform
Resource Locator (URL) links.
Important This guide is limited to information on the Windows and
character UIs. Setup and use of the QAD .NET and QAD Desktop user
interfaces are covered in separate user guides.
Figure 1.7 shows how a standard report—Invoice History Report—
displays in the different interfaces.
26 User Guide — Introduction

Fig. 1.7
Contrast Between
User Interfaces

QAD .NET Interface QAD Desktop Interface

Character Interface Windows Interface

Program Types
While each interface has unique display characteristics, they all support
the following types of programs:
• Maintenance programs
• Inquiry and report programs
• Browse programs
• Transaction programs
• Utility programs

This section summarizes the characteristics and functions of each type of

program.

Maintenance Programs

Maintenance programs are used to create basic codes such as customers,

inventory items, GL accounts, currencies, and other data. They are also
used to record transactions that initialize business activity in a module.
When you enter data in a maintenance program, an entry (called a record)
is made in one or more tables controlled by the maintenance program. For
example, customer records are stored in the customer master table
controlled by Customer Maintenance (2.1.1).
 Introduction 27

Inquiry and Report Programs

Inquiries and reports retrieve and display database records. Inquiries are
primarily used to answer specific questions. Reports usually provide more
detail and are printed for a range of data records. You select data by
entering a specific range of criteria, such as item number or date.
Typically, inquiries are viewed online and reports are sent to a printer or
file. However, you can also print inquiries and view reports. In addition,
other output options, such as e-mail, are available.

Browse Programs

Browses are inquiry programs with advanced features such as filtering, ¶ See User Guide:
sorting, and printing information. They can be used as drill-down browses Manager
Functions for
within programs. Based on whether you choose to display substitute information on
programs on the menus, browses can also replace many of the simple how a system
administrator can
inquiries throughout the menus. How you access them depends on your design custom
user interface. browses and
attach browses to
fields.
Look-up browses are one form of online help. When attached to
individual fields, these simplified browses display the records in the
associated master tables. You can then select a value and have the system
insert it into the field.
Most interfaces provide tools that let you display browse data in graphical Tip
form such as pie charts and bar charts. Browse graphing is
not available in the
character interface.
Transaction Programs

Transactions express the core business activities of a company. They

control and record activities related to business documents such as sales
orders and invoices. An example of a transaction is receipt of a shipment
for a purchase order using Purchase Order Receipts (5.13.1).
28 User Guide — Introduction

Utility Programs

Utility programs enable you to manage and perform calculations in

internal databases. In Purchasing, Closed PO Delete/Archive (5.23) is a
database management utility, and in MRP, Net Change Materials Plan
(23.1) causes the system to run net change MRP calculations. Both are
utilities.
Often utilities are designed to be used only once. For example, many
utilities perform one-time data conversions following system upgrades.

Types of Data
An application database contains three types of data:
• Control data
• Transaction data
• Static data

Control Data

When you implement a module, you enter data that the system uses later
to control how the system interacts with users and with the database. This
data is stored in control tables.
Control tables enable you to adapt the QAD 2008 - Standard application
to your environment. The data and settings in these tables determine how
certain programs are displayed, the numbers assigned to transactions, the
GL accounts for particular transactions, and so on. When you can manage
a typical manufacturing function in more than one way, control settings
enables you to establish a preference.

Transaction Data

Most data in the database is transaction data. Every day, sales orders come
in, purchase orders go out, and work orders make demands on and create
material for inventory. These events result in transactions, which are
stored in transaction tables. In contrast to control programs, transaction
tables are constantly updated by users of the system.
 Introduction 29

Static Data

Static data contains information about the basic building blocks and
relationships of a company—the ways it does business, and the entities it
does business with. Static data is used to create transaction records.
However, static data is changed infrequently. Examples of static data are
records for customer, supplier, and employee addresses, items, inventory
sites and locations, and GL accounts.

Interface Elements
While the three user interface modes vary in appearance and navigation
techniques, they all have some elements in common. The primary
interface displays in the form of a hierarchical menu. You then select a
menu item, which displays a set of fields, grouped in frames.

Menus

Regardless of the type of interface your system uses, access to application

features is controlled by a hierarchical menu system. Selecting a menu
item either launches an application or drills down to a lower-level
submenu.
Note The QAD .NET and Desktop interfaces support additional ways to ¶ Seethe associated
access programs, such as through search, process diagrams, and custom user guide for
your UI.
hypertext links. However, even with those UIs, the traditional menu
system is available.
The interfaces provide multiple access points to application programs.
For example, you can launch a program by entering its Progress name or
menu number on a command line in any interface. All but the character
UI offer point-and-click program launch as well as other interface-
dependent methods of executing applications.
In the Windows UI, individual users can select from three menu styles: ¶ See “Selecting a
Menu Style” on
• Icon-style hierarchical menus page 39.
• Tear-off menus and submenus
• Character-style menu

Figure 1.8 contrasts the appearance of the Main Menu in the different
interfaces.
30 User Guide — Introduction

Fig. 1.8
UI-Specific QAD .NET User Interface QAD Desktop Interface
Main Menus

Windows User Interface (Three User-Selectable Menu Options)

Tear-Off Style

Icon Style

Character Style

Character User Interface

 Introduction 31

Fields

A field is a piece of data that is stored as an individual unit in the

database. The system expects you to enter a certain kind of data in the
field. For example, a field labeled Customer would store only codes for
customer address records.
Usually, you can enter or change data in a field, but sometimes the field ¶ See User Guide:
displays system-generated data. If the system administrator has secured a Manager
Functions for
field—that is, restricted user access—and you do not have access, you can details on
see the field value but cannot update it. security.

The system uses different types of fields:

• A logical field requires a simple Yes or No response. In some
interfaces, these display as check boxes. Logical fields are like
switches—you can turn them either on or off.
• Character fields accept alphanumeric data.
• Date fields accept valid dates only.
• Integer and decimal fields require numeric input.

Codes

Data entry in individual programs is simplified by codes. Each code

usually represents a record with several pieces of data. For example, a
customer address code is set up with the customer’s name, address, phone
numbers, and so on. Once the code is set up, you enter the code and the
system automatically retrieves all the information in the data record
during processing.
In daily processing, codes are entered on transactions to simplify data
entry and on inquiries and reports to access data records. During
implementation, codes are entered in control programs as default values
for transactions. Codes can also be associated with other codes when
setting up static data such as addresses.
32 User Guide — Introduction

Frames

When you look at a program screen, you see a group of fields. Fields are
highlighted in color (lighter or darker), in reverse video, or underlined,
depending on the kind of interface you are using. This group of related
fields is called a frame.
When a program requires more than one frame, you must complete the
first frame to get to the second, and so on.
Most maintenance programs in Desktop display as HTML pages using the
same sequence of frames that display in character and Windows. A few
maintenance programs display the traditional character interface in a
terminal-emulation window.
Figure 1.9 shows an example of Customer Maintenance (2.1.1) as it
appears in the Windows interface.
Fig. 1.9
Sample Windows Fields display in seven sequential frames.
Maintenance
Program
 Introduction 33

User Interface Manager Functions

Several user interface management programs are intended primarily to let ¶ See User Guide:
system administrators modify various aspects of the user interface. Some Manager
Functions for
of these programs are provided on the System Interface menu (36.4). details.
Others are provided on the UI: Manager Functions menu (36.20).
Several additional interface management programs are designed ¶ See User Guide:
specifically for the Desktop. They are included on the Desktop Menu QAD Desktop for
details.
(36.20.10).

QAD Web Site

QAD’s Web site provides a wide variety of information about the
company and its products. You can access the Web site at:
http://www.qad.com
For users with a QAD Web account, product documentation is available
for viewing or downloading from the QAD Online Support Center at:
http://support.qad.com/
You can register for a QAD Web account at the QAD Online Support
Center. Your customer ID number is required. Access to certain areas is
dependent on the type of agreement you have with QAD.

Documentation
The latest version of the documentation is available on the QAD Online
Support Center at http://support.qad.com/.
Most user documentation is available in two formats:
• Portable document format (PDF). PDF files can be downloaded from
the QAD Web site to your computer. You can view them with the free
Adobe Acrobat Reader.
• HTML. You can view user documentation through your Web browser.
The documents include search tools for easily locating topics of
interest.
34 User Guide — Introduction

User Guide Set

The user guide set provides a conceptual framework for how the system
works, as well as practical implementation and usage information. For
detailed information on fields and procedures for most modules, refer to
the online help.
User Guide: Introduction. This guide includes summary information
about the system and a guide to the character and Windows user
interfaces, as well as a menu listing and a comprehensive glossary.
User Guide: Distribution A. This guide covers Purchasing, Global
Requisitions, Sales Quotations, Sales Orders/Invoices, Available to
Promise, Consolidated Order Processing, Shipping, Enterprise
Material Transfer, Configured Products, and Sales Analysis.
User Guide: Distribution B. This guide covers Customer and Supplier
Consignment Inventory.
User Guide: Manufacturing. This guide covers Product Structures,
Routings/Work Centers, Formula/Process, Co-products/ By-products,
Work Orders, Shop Floor Control, Flow Scheduling, Advanced
Repetitive, Repetitive, Quality Management, Forecasting/Master
Schedule Planning, MRP, and CRP.
User Guide: Kanban. This supplemental guide includes complete
information on setting up and using the Kanban module.
User Guide: Financials A. This guide covers Domain/Account
Control, General Ledger and Daybooks, General Ledger Report
Writer, Multiple Currency, Accounts Receivable, Accounts Payable,
Evaluated Receipts Settlement, Cash Management, and Costing.
User Guide: Financials B. This guide covers the Fixed Assets
module.
User Guide: Supply Chain. This guide covers Enterprise Operations
Planning, Distribution Requirements Planning, Product Line
Planning, and Resource Planning.
User Guide: Master Data. This guide covers Items/Sites, Pricing,
Product Change Control, Compliance, Addresses, Logistics
Accounting, Intrastat, Inventory Control, Physical Inventory, and
Global Tax Management.
 Introduction 35

User Guide: Release Management. This guide covers Customer

Schedules, Supplier Schedules, and EDI ECommerce.
User Guide: Service/Support Management A and B. These guides
cover features of Service/Support Management including the
Installed Base, Service Setup, Contract and Warranty Types,
Automatic Pricing, Service Contracts, Multiple Time Zones, Call
Management, Call Quotes, Call Activity Recording, Call Invoice
Recording, Call Escalations, Material Orders, Engineers and
Scheduling, Service Structures and Routings, Return Material
Authorizations, and Returns to Suppliers.
User Guide: Manager Functions. This guide covers the administrative
functions on the Manager Functions (36) menu, including Domain
Setup, Domain Constants, Users and Security, System Interface,
Printers and Batch, CIM Interface, Database Management, Reporting,
Application Servers, and User Interface Management.
User Guide: Project Realization Management. This guide covers the
features of the Project Realization Management module.
User Guide: PRO/PLUS. This guide covers optional modules
available with the PRO/PLUS package, including Work In Process
(WIP) Lot Trace, Self-Billing, Supplier Performance, Container and
Line Charges, Shipment Performance Reporting, Supplier Shipping
Schedules, and Customer Sequence Schedules.

Related Documentation
User Guide: QAD .NET User Interface. This guide describes how to
access programs with the latest Microsoft .NET-based user interface.
It discusses using QAD .NET UI features such as browses and
menus; using application functions in the QAD .NET UI; using
administrative tools to simplify screens; and configuring optional
settings. It also describes the Process Editor and how to create
clickable work-flow maps.
User Guide: QAD Desktop. This guide describes how to access
programs over a company intranet or wide-area network using a Web
browser. It includes details on using the QAD Desktop interface,
36 User Guide — Introduction

creating URL links, and using browses and reports. It also describes
the Process Editor and how to create clickable work-flow maps, and
customize the interface.
External Interface Guides. These guides describe the interfaces
between the QAD 2008 - Standard application and external
applications. For example, they cover the application program
interface (API) between the QAD 2008 - Standard application and the
Sales and Use Tax Interface (SUTI). Another guide describes Q/
LinQ, which is a set of tools and supporting functions for complex
data exchange between the QAD 2008 - Standard application and
external systems.
Database Definitions. This book is intended for system administrators
and programmers doing software conversions and custom
programming. Cross-references for identifying new, changed, and
deleted tables, fields, and indexes are included after the main section.
Database tables are listed alphabetically.
Entity Diagrams. This guide details the major relationships between
tables in the QAD 2008 - Standard application database. Diagrams
are included that may be helpful to:
• Programmers interested in custom development. Diagrams show
relationships that must be preserved in any customization or
modification.
• Programmers writing queries or custom reports. Diagrams show
which tables can be joined and the field specifications required to
join them. All possible table relationships are not shown.
• Administrators interested in the availability of custom reports.
Diagrams show which reports you can prepare.
• Users of Progress Results who want to determine the
relationships available for reporting.
Installation Guides. These guides provide detailed instructions for
installing the QAD 2008 - Standard application on your client and
server systems. Individual guides are available for Progress and
Oracle databases.
Conversion Guide. This guide provides detailed instructions for
upgrading earlier application versions. It covers both Progress and
Oracle databases.
 Chapter 2

Using the Windows

User Interface
This chapter covers screens, menus, and navigation in the Windows
graphical user interface (GUI) environment.
Introduction 38

Starting the Software 38

Program Interface Elements 39

Browses and Graphs 63

Output Devices 71

Windows Keyboard Commands 74

38 User Guide — Introduction

Introduction
The Windows user interface is a graphical user interface (GUI) system
that offers user-selectable menu styles. Programs include various tool
icons and pull-down menus that can be used with a mouse to execute most
user commands or options. Keyboard accelerator commands are also
available for all functions.

Starting the Software

Start the QAD Enterprise Application by choosing it from the Windows
Start menu or by double-clicking on its icon on the desktop or in a
program group.
The sign-on screen is the first screen you see. From it, you can:
• Enter your user ID.
• Enter your password.
• Get help about signing on.
• Sign on to the system.
• Exit from the system.

Note You must be a valid user defined in User Maintnance to log in.
Your password can be blank only if the password in your user record is
blank.
Fig. 2.1
Sign-On Screen
 Using the Windows User Interface 39

Program Interface Elements

Selecting a Menu Style

The Windows user interface offers three menu styles:
• The icon menu style has large buttons that lead you into the different
parts of the system and show you a hierarchy of your location in a
submenu.
• The tear-off menu style lets you select the menus you use most often
and keep them visible.
• The character-based menu style emulates the look of the traditional
character menu.
The system administrator can specify a different menu style for each user
in User Maintenance (36.3.18).
Note Menu style changes do not display until the next time you log in.

Fig. 2.2
User Maintenance
(36.3.18)

Select the style

of menu to be
associated with
your user ID.
40 User Guide — Introduction

Icon Menu Style

Tip This is the default style. The Main Menu, as illustrated in Figure 2.3, has
The Custom button seven large buttons, each with a graphic image of the functional area it
has no programs; it
is for programs you represents:
write.
• Distribution • Master Data
• Manufacturing • Custom
• Financials • Supply Chain
• Customer Services

Click a button to display its associated menu items. As you select menus
from this screen and options from those menus, the left side of the menu
screen displays the hierarchical path to your current location. To select a
menu option from the right side, either click on the item or enter its
program name or number in the Menu Selection field.
• To run a program from the submenu currently displaying, enter just
its number on that menu; for example, if the Item Data Menu (1.4) is
displaying, enter 1 to run Item Master Maintenance (1.4.1).
• If the program you want to run is on a different submenu, enter its full
menu number preceded by a period; for example, if the Purchasing
Menu (5) is displaying, enter .1.4.1 to run Item Master Maintenance.
To move up to a higher level of the path, click on its associated hierarchy
button.
Fig. 2.3
Icon Style Clicking the Master Data button displays these options.
Main Menu

Double-click an option to
run the program or display
the submenu, or type the
option number here and
press Enter.
 Using the Windows User Interface 41

Fig. 2.4
Keep selecting submenus to reach the program you want. Icon Style
Submenu

To go back to a higher-
level submenu or the
Main Menu, click one
of these buttons.

Type a Progress program name or menu number to run

any menu-level program.

Tear-Off Menu Style

The tear-off Main Menu displays buttons for each functional area.
Click an option to display its associated menus. Once in a submenu, you
can also type the option number in the menu selection box and press
Enter.
Each tear-off menu remains on the screen as you select submenus. This
means that you can choose any option from any menu on the screen.
Use the mouse to drag menus anywhere within the window. Choose Save ¶ See page 53.
Settings on Exit from the Options menu to keep the same tear-off
selections and positioning next time you sign on. This gives you
immediate access to the programs you use most often.
42 User Guide — Introduction

Fig. 2.5
Tear-Off Menu

Menu Selection Box The symbol means that

the option has a submenu.

Click here to or Press Esc to return to

close the menu. the sign-on screen.

Character-Based Menu Style

¶ See “Menu The Windows user interface retains a version of the traditional character-
System” on based menu system.
page 79.
Note Although the menu system simulates character mode, the program
screens are not character based.
 Using the Windows User Interface 43

To select an option, double-click it or enter the option number in the menu

selection box and press Enter. To run a program from the same submenu
as the current program, enter just its number on that menu; for example, 1.
If it is on a different submenu, you must enter its full menu number
preceded by a period; for example, enter .1.4.1 to run Item Master
Maintenance.
You can also use the arrow keys to move through the menus and press
Enter to select a program.
Fig. 2.6
Character-Based
Main Menu

Enter a menu number or program name.

From the character-based main menu, press Exit to return to the sign-on
screen.
44 User Guide — Introduction

Screen Elements
The Windows user interface screen is divided into discrete sections, as
illustrated in Figure 2.7.
Fig. 2.7
Windows Screen Title bar
Menu bar
Toolbar

Data frame

Program
Window

Message bar
Progress
status bar

The following pages explain each screen element of the interface for
Windows programs:
• Title Bar
• Menu Bar
• Toolbar
• Browses and Graphs
• Message Bar
• Progress Status Bar
 Using the Windows User Interface 45

Title Bar

The title bar describes the program you are running. You can also exit the
program and minimize or maximize the screen from the title bar.
Fig. 2.8
Windows Title Bar

Program Title Standard Windows Minimize,

Maximize, and Close buttons

Menu Bar

You can perform various tasks by clicking the items on the menu bar. The
drop-down menus associated with each one are described in detail in this
section. Click on the drop-down menu, and choose an option by clicking
it or pressing the underlined letter. Many selections have accelerator keys
assigned; for example, you can press F1 to display field help instead of
using the drop-down menu. These are shown on the menu.
Fig. 2.9
Menu Bar
in Windows

User Menu

The User Menu can provide access to:

• User menu items
• User toolbar items
• Run Program command
• Print functions
• Exit command
• Progress Editor (from menus only)

User Menu Items

User Menu items are assigned in User Function Maintenance (36.4.11) to

individual users or groups of users. They display in the top section of the
User Menu pull-down. You can use them to run specific programs without
drilling down through multiple layers of menus or having to remember
the menu number or Progress name of the program.
46 User Guide — Introduction

The exact items that display depend on whether you have user-specific
items defined in User Function Maintenance.
• If you have user-specific items defined, they display on the menu.
• If no items are associated with your user ID, the menu includes only
items assigned to a blank user ID; these items apply to all users.

User Toolbar Items

¶ See User Guide: These items are defined in User Tool Maintenance (36.20.4). You can use
Manager them to jump to other programs without first exiting the current program
Functions for
more to access a menu. Programs assigned in User Tool Maintenance display
information. below User Menu items—if any are set up—on the User Menu pull-
down. They also display as buttons on the toolbar of programs with which
they are associated.
Unlike user menu items, you can associate user toolbar items with
specific programs or groups of programs—so you can vary them based on
which program you are using.
Note User toolbar items do not apply to browses. The buttons do not
display in browses and the menu section of the User Menu is blank.
Fig. 2.10
Sample User Menu
Layouts
Defined in
User Function
Maintenance

Defined in
User Tool
Maintenance Used only for
reports
Available only
Available on all
from menus
User Menus
 Using the Windows User Interface 47

Running a Program from the User Menu

Run Progress programs with this option. You can run any menu-level
program without having to exit the current program.
1 Select the drop-down User Menu, and choose Run Program.
2 In the pop-up window, enter one of the following:
• The Progress program name, such as ppptmt. You do not have to
enter the file extension of .p.
• A menu number. To run a program from the same submenu as the
current program, enter just its number on that menu; for
example, 1. If it is on a different submenu, you must enter its full
menu number preceded by a period; for example, enter .1.4.1 to
run Item Master Maintenance.
Fig. 2.11
Running a
Program from
the User Menu

3 Optionally specify whether the system should run a substitute ¶ See “Menu
program. Click on Use Menu Substitution to toggle the selection box. Substitutions” on
page 51.
If no substitute program has been set up for the specified program in
Menu Substitution Maintenance, the system disregards this field. If a
substitute program is found, its name displays next to the Substitute
Program label.
4 Choose OK, or press Enter.
When you exit the second program, the system returns you to the program
that was running when you accessed the User Menu.
48 User Guide — Introduction

Exit

You can exit the current program from the User Menu. From a menu
screen, this option exits the QAD 2008 - Standard application. You can
also exit a program by either of the following methods:
• Press Alt+X.
• Click on the close button, which is in the upper right corner of every
program window.

Progress Editor

You can access the Progress editor from the User Menu while on menu
screens by choosing Progress Editor.

Printing from the User Menu

The User Menu includes a Print command for most reports and browses.
Processing and output vary based on the type of program.
• In a browse, the system displays the Printer Options dialog box. After
you select an output device, the Browse Print Configuration window
lets you specify the fields to output. When you select fields, the
system displays the number of characters in each line of the output.
Fig. 2.12
Browse Print
Configuration
Window

¶ See User Guide: • In a report, the system immediately sends the program output to the
Manager default output device for the program, if one is defined in Printer
Functions for
information on Default Maintenance (36.13.4). Otherwise, the output device defaults
setting output to Printer. The content is based on the report selection criteria
defaults.
specified when you select Print.
 Using the Windows User Interface 49

Edit Menu

This drop-down menu offers standard Windows editing tasks: cut, copy,
and paste text. You can also use the Edit Image command to launch a
graphic editing program to view or modify image files.
Fig. 2.13
Edit Drop-Down
Menu

Cutting, Copying, and Pasting with the Edit Menu

Cutting text deletes it from its current location and copies it to the Tip
Windows clipboard. Copying is similar, but it leaves the original text in Menu items are
context sensitive.
place. In both cases, you can paste the text to another location, such as a For example, the
field. Use the following procedure: Paste command is
disabled when the
clipboard is empty.
1 Select the text to cut or copy.
2 Pull down the Edit Menu and choose Cut or Copy.
3 Position the cursor in the new location.
4 Pull down the Edit Menu, and choose Paste.
Important You cannot use the Cut, Copy, or Paste menu commands to
paste text into Master Comment Maintenance (1.12) or any of the
transaction comment screens. Instead, use the Cut (Ctrl+X), Copy
(Ctrl+C), and Paste (Ctrl+V) keyboard shortcuts for data up to 76
characters in length. You can also use the Copy and Paste icons in the
toolbar.

Viewing and Editing Images with the Edit Menu

With the Edit Image option on the Edit menu, you can view or edit images Tip
that have been associated with information in your database. For example, The image files
must be in .bmp
if you have an item number 1000, you can associate a picture of the item format. This
with the item number by naming the image file 1000.bmp. Then, with the function cannot
find other image
formats.
50 User Guide — Introduction

cursor in the Item Number field and 1000 appearing in the field, click on
Edit Image to launch Microsoft Paint (or some other imaging
application). Use this program to view or edit the image.
Note You cannot use this function to do the actual association. Instead,
you must first create the images, name them appropriately, and store them
in the working directory.
This feature requires each code associated with an image file to meet the
DOS naming conventions. DOS allows a maximum of eight characters
preceding a period and a maximum of three characters after.
• The characters before the period are referred to as the file name in the
DOS environment.
• The period is the divider.
• The characters after the period are the extension.

Example auto1000.bmp and 1000.bmp are legal DOS names.

¶ See the To use an imaging application other than Microsoft Paint, specify it in
installation guide. your Progress initialization file.
Fig. 2.14
Editing Images
Item Number: 1000
Enter the item to be viewed.

Pull down the Edit menu

and choose Edit Image.

The system launches an

imaging application and
opens the picture.

1000.bmp
 Using the Windows User Interface 51

Options Menu

The content of the Options menu varies based on whether you access it
from a menu, a program, or a browse. To turn an option on or off, pull
down the menu and choose the option (or type its first letter). A check
mark next to an option shows that it is on. If an option is grayed out, it is
unavailable.
Fig. 2.15
Program Menu Options Menus

Browse

Menu Substitutions

Use this option to toggle between displaying browses and inquiries on the ¶ See User Guide:
menu. You can also use it to switch between customized and non- Manager
Functions for
customized versions of a program. The system administrator can use information on
Menu Substitution Maintenance (36.20.6) to specify which programs are Menu
Substitution
substituted for others when you select this option. Maintenance.
52 User Guide — Introduction

Tool Bar

¶ See “Toolbar” on This option turns the toolbar display on or off. The toolbar appears below
page 56. the menu bar and contains buttons to run programs.

Show Drop Downs

Show Drop Downs refers to icons for look-up browses, calculators, and
calendars, which appear next to fields.
• Look-up browses are attached to specified data fields.
• Calculators are attached to numeric fields.
• Calendars are attached to date fields.

For example, if a calendar drop down is attached to a field, a small icon

displays next to the field. Click on the icon to make the calendar display.
Then click on the selected date to enter it in the field.
If Show Drop Downs is off, the drop-down icons do not display.
Fig. 2.16
Calendar Drop
Down

Click drop-down
icon to display
calendar.

Hide Menu Items (Menus Only)

When menu security has been set, use the Hide Menu Items option to
prevent menu items you cannot execute from displaying.
 Using the Windows User Interface 53

Save Settings on Exit (Menus Only)

This option stores your final menu location when you exit the current
session. Next time you sign on, you return to that menu, skipping the
Main menu and all intermediate menus (unless you change your menu
style).
This option also stores your settings for the following:
• Menu Substitution
• Tool Bar
• Show Drop Downs
• Hide Menu Items

Browse Options (Browses Only)

Use this option to set up filter criteria for browses. ¶ See “Filtering
and Sorting
Browses” on
Toggle Filter (Browses Only) page 66.

Use the toggle filter setting to turn on and off the filter criteria set up in
the browse filter options. The filter can also be turned on and off by
selecting the Filter On/Off button in the toolbar.

Browse Graphing (Browses Only)

Choose Browse Graphing to graph the contents of a browse. This option ¶ See “Browse
is also available by clicking the Graph button on the toolbar in the browse Graphing” on
page 67.
window.

Help Menu

This menu lets you access help on the user interface, fields, and programs.
It also lets you view browses on selected fields.
54 User Guide — Introduction

Fig. 2.17
Help Menu

Contents

Select this option to display the contents of the Windows help files
containing help records for all procedures and fields. The Contents screen
lets you display an index and access search tools.
• When you click the Index button, the system displays an alphabetical
listing of program labels, program names, field labels, and field
names.You can enter a value to move to a specific point on the list.
Double-click a list item to display the associated help record.
• From the index, click on the Find tab to search the Windows help files
for specific words or combinations of words. Select Options to set up
search parameters.
Note If nothing displays, review the values associated with your logon
ID in User Maintenance (36.3.18). Be sure that WinHelp is enabled.
Otherwise, you cannot use Windows help or its table of contents.

Interface Help

This help file provides information on the Windows user interface.

Field Help

Tip The fastest way to get help for the current field is to press F1, but you can
You can also access also use the Help menu. With the cursor in the field, drop down the Help
field and procedure
help from the menu and choose Field Help.
toolbar. See
page 56.
 Using the Windows User Interface 55

Procedure Help

The fastest way to get help for the current procedure is to press Shift+F1,
but you can also use the Help menu. With the cursor in any field, drop
down the Help menu and choose Procedure Help.

Drill Down

Drill downs are browses accessed by clicking the drill-down button or by

pressing Alt+F1. Use drill downs to view records available to specified
fields; then select a record to enter into the field.
With the cursor in the field, drop down the Help menu and choose ¶ For more
Drill Down. You can select and double-click on a record in the drill-down information, refer
to “Browses and
browse to include it in the current field. Graphs” on
page 63.
Look-Up Browse

Use look-up browses to view records available to specified fields; then

select a record to enter into the field. They are similar to other browses,
but contain less detail and do not include filtering and graphing tools.
With the cursor in the field, drop down the Help menu and choose Look-
Up Browse.
Fig. 2.18
Click this arrow
Look-Up Browse
to display other
fields that can be
sorted on.

Some browses let you sort the data by more than one field. Choices
display in a drop-down box. Choose one, and the system re-sorts the
display. Select and double-click on a record to enter it in the current field.
56 User Guide — Introduction

About...

This option gives you technical information about the system. You can
display the same information by pressing Ctrl+F1.
Fig. 2.19
Help About...
Screen

Version
Version of
Menu Program Progress

Name of program
Program
currently executing
Stack

Program Stack

Use the program stack arrows to display the names of the programs used
to call the current program. Click on the right arrow to move up the stack,
or toward the main menu. The left arrow moves down the stack. When
you reach either the top or the bottom of the stack, the appropriate arrow
is disabled.

Toolbar
The toolbar contains buttons to launch programs and tools. If you do not
see the toolbar on your screen, choose Tool Bar from the Options drop-
down menu.
Table 2.1
Toolbars in Description Programs Browse
Windows User
Interface Copy Same

Paste Same
 Using the Windows User Interface 57

Description Programs Browse

Field Help Same

Procedure Help Same

Drill-Down Same

Return to Menu N/A

Calculator N/A

Calendar N/A

Print N/A

Browse Options N/A

(Filter)

On/Off N/A

Graph N/A

First N/A

Previous N/A

Next N/A

Last N/A

Clear N/A

Update N/A

Cancel N/A
58 User Guide — Introduction

Not all buttons appear on all screens. Each program controls which ones
to display. For example, the print icon is not relevant to some programs
and does not appear in them.

Customizable Buttons

¶ User Tool There can be up to four custom buttons on the left side of the toolbar in
Maintenance is programs other than browses. Set up these buttons with User Tool
described in User
Guide: Manager Maintenance (36.20.4).
Functions.
Note Toolbar buttons do not apply to browses.

For example, the toolbar in Figure 2.20 includes two buttons:

• Item Master Browse
• Address Master Browse

Launch a program by clicking its button. When you exit the program, the
system displays the program you were in when you clicked the button.

Copy/Paste

Use these buttons to copy data between fields, in the same program or
different programs.
Important All transaction comment screens, including Master Comment
Maintenance (1.12), accept a maximum of 76 characters per line. If you
try to paste more than this, your comment will display only the first 76
characters.
Fig. 2.20
Copying Between
Fields

Copy Paste

1 Click Copy.
2 Click the field to copy.
3 Click Paste.
4 Click the destination field.
 Using the Windows User Interface 59

5 The data is copied.

You also can copy from and to multiple fields in one operation:
1 Click Copy.
2 Click and drag around the fields to copy.
3 Click Paste.
4 Click and drag around the destination fields.
5 The data is copied.

Field Help

Field help describes a specific field and how it is used in the program.
Most updateable fields have field help. Display-only fields do not.
You can display help for any field on the screen by pressing F1 or by
clicking on the Field Help button.
1 Click Field Help on the toolbar.
2 The cursor changes to an arrow.
3 Click on a field.
4 The field help screen displays.
60 User Guide — Introduction

Fig. 2.21
Displaying
Field Help

Procedure Help

Procedure help describes the program and how it is used in the module.
Procedure help is not generally provided for reports, inquiries, browses,
or control programs.
You can display procedure help from anywhere within the program using
the keyboard or the toolbar.
1 Press Shift+F1 or click Procedure Help on the toolbar.
2 The procedure help screen displays.
 Using the Windows User Interface 61

Fig. 2.22
Displaying
Procedure Help

Drill Down

You use drill downs to view records available to specified fields, then ¶ See “Drill-Down
select a record to enter into the field. Browses” on
page 65.
1 Click the Drill-Down button on the toolbar.
2 The cursor changes to a magnifying glass.
3 Click on a field.
4 The drill down displays.
62 User Guide — Introduction

Fig. 2.23
Drill Downs

Double-click
to bring the
record into
the field.

Return

Click the Return button to end the program and go back to the menu.
Fig. 2.24
Return Button Return Button

Message Bar
The message bar contains messages issued by a Progress program.
Figure 2.25 shows some sample messages.
Fig. 2.25
Message Bar

Progress Status Bar

The status bar displays accelerator keys available from the current
program. Because different programs use different keys, the display
changes based on the program you are executing.
 Using the Windows User Interface 63

Fig. 2.26
Progress Status Bar

Browses and Graphs

Note You must have the Query version of Progress to access browses.

Browses display selected data in the form of a table. Two types of

browses are available:
• Look-up browses return the value you select to the active field in the
calling program.
• Drill-down browses display, filter, graph, or print data.
The field values in the browse can come from a table or a view. A view is ¶ See User Guide:
a table that has selected values from one table or several joined tables. Manager
Functions for
information on
Browses display several records at a time. To scroll through the records, designing views
click the down arrow of the scroll bar. A message occasionally displays, and browses.
telling you that the browse is getting the next group of records.
Figure 2.27 shows the item master drill-down browse—accessible either
from the menu or as a drill-down from within many programs—and the
look-up browse that is attached to the Item Number field.
Fig. 2.27
Item Drill-Down
Browse and Look-
Up Browse
64 User Guide — Introduction

Look-Up Browses
A look-up browse displays values for existing records for the field the
browse is attached to, as well as values of other fields in those records.
Depending on how the browse is defined, it can display and sort up to
seven columns of fields. A look-up browse cannot filter, graph, or print
data.
¶ See User Guide: Access a look-up browse from the Help menu, click on its icon next to the
Manager related field, or press Alt+F2. Attach a look-up browse to a field with
Functions.
Drill Down/Lookup Maintenance (36.20.1).
To enter the cell contents of the browse in the active field of the calling
program:
• Triple-click on a browse cell—one click to select the cell, two clicks
to enter the cell data in the field.
• Select a cell and press Enter or click OK.

You can determine the starting record in the browse in several ways:
• If you type one or more characters in the field of the calling program
and access the look-up browse, its display begins at the record
starting with those characters.
• When the browse is the active window, you can type one or more
characters in its entry field, press Enter, and the browse display
begins at the record starting with those characters.
• When the browse is the active window, you can click on any column
heading that is in the sort-columns selection list and then type one or
more characters. When you pause in your typing, the browse begins
the search. It re-sorts based on the current column heading and
redisplays records, beginning with the record that matches your
criterion.
You can enter a wildcard (*) as a search criterion. For example, if you
enter AD* in the field of the calling program or in the browse, it displays
only values beginning with AD.
Important You may incur a serious performance loss when you use
wildcards to search for non-indexed fields. The browse searches the entire
database; while it is searching, your session is unavailable for other
processing.
 Using the Windows User Interface 65

Drill-Down Browses
Use one of these methods to access a drill-down browse: ¶ See Figure 2.28.
• From a menu screen:
• Click on the menu item.
• Enter its program name or number in the Menu Selection box.
• From within a calling program:
• Choose Drill-Down from the Help menu or press Alt+F1.
• If the browse has been added to the toolbar, click its button.

Drill-down browses display up to 20 columns of fields (a maximum of

330 characters). The first 10 columns can be filtered; you can sort by any
column in descending or ascending order. Column headings in a browse
are the field labels; rows are field values.
Print a browse by choosing the Print button on the toolbar. A dialog box
displays where you set your output device such as a printer or your
monitor screen. As with other programs, printing cannot be canceled from
the QAD 2008 - Standard application, but does appear in the Windows
Print Manager, where the initiator of the print job can cancel it.
Fig. 2.28
Drill-Down Browse
for Item Master

You can put a drill-down browse on the toolbar as a button, assign it a

menu number to replace an existing menu item or add a new menu item,
or attach it to a field as a drill down.
66 User Guide — Introduction

Filtering and Sorting Browses

Drill-down browses have a Browse Options button on the toolbar for

accessing filter and sort options.
Filters limit the viewable records according to your specifications. For
example, you can filter out product numbers or statuses that you do not
want to view. In your selection criteria, you can filter for a range of
values.
You can alphabetically or numerically sort the fields in the first column of
a browse. Select the field you want to be the first column in the Sort By
field.
1 Choose Browse Options from the Options menu or the toolbar.
The system displays the Browse Options window.
Fig. 2.29
Browse Options
Window

Tip 2 Enter criteria in any of the fields. You can enter exact criteria on both
You cannot use the right and left sides, or you can use wildcards (*) in the left column
wildcards for
numeric or date for character fields. When you use a wildcard in a field in the left
fields. column, the corresponding To field is disabled. The To fields do not
accept wildcards.
 Using the Windows User Interface 67

Important You could incur a serious loss of performance when you use
wildcards to search for non-indexed fields. The browse searches the entire
database; while it is searching, your session is unavailable for other
processing.
3 In the fields on the left side of the Browse Options window, the
default is the lowest number or first alphabetical selection. In the
fields on the right side of the Browse Options window, the default is
the highest number or last alphabetical selection.
4 In the Sort By field, choose a field (column) for sorting the records.
5 In the Sort Order field, choose Ascending or Descending.
6 Click the Update icon to create the filtered browse.
The filtered browse becomes active in the browse window.
7 You can toggle between the filtered and unfiltered browse by clicking
the Filter On/Off button. Changing the sort affects filtered and
unfiltered browses.
The status of your filter selection is displayed in the Message Bar.

Browse Graphing
In the Windows user interface, you can make graphs of browse data on Tip
the screen and print them. To generate a graph of a browse, select the Graphing is not
available in the
Graph icon on the toolbar. character interface.

Fig. 2.30
Graph Selection
Criteria
68 User Guide — Introduction

X-Axis Data

Tip In X-Axis Data, select a browse field to use as the x-axis of the graph.
Different fields Click on the down arrow to view a list of available fields.
display in the
selection lists
depending on the
browse being Y1-Axis Data
graphed.
In Y1-Axis Data, specify a browse field to use as the y-axis of the graph.
Click on the down arrow to view a list of available fields. Only non-
numeric data can be used with the Count option.
Example Specifying Region in X-Axis Data and Customer (Count) in
Y1-Axis Data displays a graph of the total count of all customers per
region.

Y2-Axis Data

To display two sets of data on the y-axis of a graph, specify a browse field
in Y2-Axis Data.
Note Pie charts can be displayed with only one set of data. Therefore, if
Pie Chart is selected in Type of Graph, this field is disabled.
The field options available for the Y-2 Axis Data value are identical to
those for Y-1 Axis Data except that Y-2 Axis Data includes an entry for
None.
Example Selecting Customer in X-Axis Data, Balance in Y1-Axis Data,
and Credit Limit in Y2-Axis Data produces a graph showing customers as
the x-axis with a graph of their balance versus their credit limit. However,
if Y2-Axis Data has a value of None, only one set of data appears on the
y-axis.

Total, Count, Average, Minimum, and Maximum

Under Y1-Axis Data and Y2-Axis Data are radio sets listing the following
options: Total, Count, Average, Minimum, and Maximum. You can select
one option for each axis.
Note If a non-numeric field is specified in Y1-Axis Data or Y2-Axis
Data, the associated radio set for that data box is disabled.
 Using the Windows User Interface 69

Table 2.2
Option Effect Example Graphing Options
Total Adds up all of the values for the If X-Axis Data is Region and Y1-Axis
selected y-axis data field in the Data is Balance, the data represents the
browse for each x-axis field. total balance of all customers in that
region. If X-Axis Data is Customer and
Y1-Axis Data is Balance, the data
represents each individual customer’s
balance.
Count Counts the number of If X-Axis Data is Region and Y1-Axis
occurrences of y-axis data for Data is Customer (Count), the data
each x-axis field. This is used represents the total number of
primarily for non-numeric fields. customers in each region.
Average Adds up all of the values for the If X-Axis Data is Region and Y1-Axis
y-axis field in the browse for Data is Balance, the data represents the
each x-axis field and divides by average balance of all customers in that
the total number of occurrences region.
of the y-axis data.
Minimum Reads through all of the values If X-Axis Data is Region and Y1-Axis
for the y-axis field in the browse Data is Balance, the data represents the
and, for each x-axis value, lowest customer balance in the region.
selects the lowest value.
Maximum Reads through all of the values If X-Axis Data is Region and Y1-Axis
for the y-axis field in the browse Data is Balance, the data represents the
and, for each x-axis value, highest customer balance in the region.
selects the highest value.

Graph Type

Use this radio set to select the type of graph format you want displayed.
The choices are Bar Chart, Pie Chart, Line Graph, and Area Graph.

3-D, 2-D

Use this radio set to select either a three-dimensional or two-dimensional

display.
70 User Guide — Introduction

Filtered Data/Unfiltered Data

¶ See “Filtering If filtering is enabled for the browse, this radio set lets you choose to
and Sorting graph just the data that was previously filtered in the browse or all of the
Browses” on
page 66. records. If you want to change the filter criteria, you first must cancel this
dialog box and make the changes.
The radio set is unavailable if the browse has not been filtered.

Generating a Graph

After entering the required input data, click Update on the toolbar to
display the graph.
Note If there are too many data points to graph, the labels do not appear
across the x-axis.
After running a graph the first time, you can change the graph type, y-axis
options, or 3-D, 2-D setting. Click the Draw icon to display the changes.
Click the Printer icon to generate a printed copy of the graph.
Fig. 2.31
Graph Window
 Using the Windows User Interface 71

Output Devices
When you run a report, browse, or inquiry, you have several options for ¶ See User Guide:
displaying the output. A lookup attached to the Output field lists the Manager
Functions for
options available on your system. For devices to be available, they must information on
first be defined in Printer Setup Maintenance (36.13.2)—even if they are setting up printers
and other output
not actually printers. Output devices include the following. devices.
• Display devices
• Server printers
• Locally controlled Windows printers
• E-mail

You can also send the output to a file or specify a batch ID to run the
process later.
Fig. 2.32
Printer Options
A lookup displays available Field
output options.

In programs where this box

does not display, type a file
name in the Output field.

Display Devices
In the character interface, select Terminal to view the report output on the
screen. In the graphical user interface (GUI), you can select either
Terminal or Window.
By default, browses initially display on the screen in both character and
GUI environments. Select Print from the User Menu to display the Output
field. This lets you choose another option.

Server Printers
From both character and GUI environments, you can send output to a ¶ See User Guide:
printer set up in Printer Setup Maintenance (36.13.2) with Destination Manager
Functions for
Type set to Default. The record for this type of printer has device path and information on
printer control information. setting up
printers.
72 User Guide — Introduction

Locally Controlled Windows Printers

From a GUI client computer, you can direct output to a printer that is
either:
• Directly attached to the client computer
• Available on the client’s Windows network

Select Winprint to use one of these printers. You then control printing
with a standard Windows print dialog box, which lets you select a printer
and change printing options—for example, change the default portrait
page orientation to landscape—as required. This is especially useful if
you print in a double-byte language such as Chinese.
Define fonts for 80-column and 132-column report formats in the
Progress initialization file on the client computer. For more information
on initialization file settings, see the installation guide for your system.
Important Be sure that your client computer has a default printer set up
in Windows before you send output to Winprint. If you set up a new
default printer while the system is running, exit your session and start it
again to assure that the function works properly.

E-mail
From the GUI or character user interface, you can transmit the report
output in an e-mail message by selecting Email as the output device.
When you run the report, a dialog box displays in which you enter the
recipient’s e-mail address and the subject of the message.
The system uses your e-mail system to create a message with the report
output as the body. You can specify more than one recipient by separating
the addresses with commas. If the recipient is a user of your QAD 2008 -
Standard application, you can enter just a logon ID.
¶ See User Guide: Although the e-mail option always displays as an output device, the
Manager function works only under these circumstances:
Functions for
information on • You have an e-mail transmission program that accepts input from a
setting up your
system to use command-line interface. Several available shareware or freeware
e-mail. programs meet this requirement.
 Using the Windows User Interface 73

• Your system has been configured in E-mail Definition Maintenance

(36.4.20) to let this e-mail program accept input from the QAD 2008 -
Standard application.
• Your record in User Maintenance (36.3.18) references the e-mail
definition required to send e-mail from your computer and includes
your full e-mail address.
Fig. 2.33
E-mail Dialog Box

This example shows

multiple e-mail
addresses, including
a user name and a full
internet address.

Files
In some cases, it is useful to send report output to a file. You can review
output sent to a file with another software package, such as a word
processor or spreadsheet, or you can print it later. Output to file is also
useful if your printer is temporarily unavailable.
Most GUI reports display the Printer Output dialog box, which includes a
check box for outputting to a file. When you select this option, the system
prompts you for a file name.
In programs where the Printer Output dialog box does not display, type
the name of a file—up to eight characters—in the Output field. The
system displays a warning that this is not a defined printing device. Press
Spacebar to have the system write the output to a file called
filename.prn. To cancel, press End.
74 User Guide — Introduction

Batch Processing
¶ See User Guide: To run a report or process later, specify a batch number in the Batch ID
Manager field. A batch is a predefined group of processes that you can run through
Functions for
information on a single user interface—Batch Request Processor (36.14.13).
setting up and
processing When you enter a batch number, restrictions apply to some of the devices
batches.
available in Output.
• You cannot select Terminal or Window as the output device.
• If you select Email, the recipient and subject prompt does not display.
Instead, the system automatically sends the output to your e-mail
address when the batch process is run. You can then forward it as
required.
Note When you select e-mail output in batch mode, the subject line
displays the menu option and title.
¶ See the • If you select Winprint, the system sends the output to the default
installation guide printer selected on your Windows client computer at the time the
for information
on the Progress batch process is run. It uses the 80-column or 132-column font
initialization file. specified in the Progress initialization file. Because you do not have
the option of changing page orientation during batch processing, be
sure that the font is narrow enough to allow reports to fit on a portrait
page.
Important You must run Batch Request Processor (36.14.13) from a
Windows client computer to send output to a Winprint printer. If you set
up the batch on a Windows client but then run Batch Request Processor
from a character workstation, the report does not print.

Windows Keyboard Commands

¶ See page 90 for Tables 2.3 through 2.5 list the navigation, help, and edit keyboard
character commands used throughout the Windows interface. When you are using a
keyboard
commands. program, the Progress status bar at the bottom of the screen summarizes
the specific keys used in that program.
Table 2.3
Windows Navigation Keyboard
Navigation Commands Entry Description
Commands
Go F2 Moves to next frame.
End Esc Exits a frame, program, or menu.
 Using the Windows User Interface 75

Navigation Keyboard
Commands Entry Description
Previous F9 or up arrow Retrieves previous record in a key data
field.
Next F10 or down Retrieves next record in a key data field.
arrow
Enter Enter Moves to next field within a frame.
Tab Tab Moves to next field within a frame.
Back Tab Shift+Tab Moves back one field within a frame.
Exit Alt+X Closes a program.
Run Ctrl+R Starts a program by name.
Print Ctrl+P Prints browse, inquiry, or report
information.

Table 2.4
Help Keyboard Windows Help
Commands Entry Description Commands
Field Help F1 Opens help on current field.
Procedure Help Shift+F1 Opens help on current program.
Drill-Down Browse Alt+F1 Displays choice of records.
Look-Up Browse Alt+F2 Displays choice of records.
About Ctrl+F1 Displays the program name.
Browse Options F7 Opens the browse options window.
Browse Options Toggle Alt+F Turns the browse options on and off.
Browse Graph Shift+F11 Opens the browse graphing window.
Field Name Ctrl+F Displays information about the current
session, program, and field.

Table 2.5
Edit Keyboard Windows Edit
Commands Entry Description Commands
Delete Record F5 Deletes an open record.
Cut Ctrl+X Cuts a field or selection to clipboard.
Copy Ctrl+C Copies a field or selection to clipboard.
Paste Ctrl+V Pastes data from the clipboard.
76 User Guide — Introduction
 Chapter 3

Using the Character

User Interface
This chapter describes the appearance and use of programs from the
character user interface.
Introduction 78

Starting in Character Mode 79

Program Interface Elements 79

Output Devices 90

Character-Mode Keyboard Commands 90

78 User Guide — Introduction

Introduction
Unlike other QAD user interfaces, the character-based interface depends
completely on input from the keyboard. Because it is not a graphical user
interface, all navigation is based on:
• A command-prompt interface to execute programs
• Combinations of keystrokes to issue commands within programs

Important You cannot use the mouse to navigate through the UNIX
character interface.
¶ See page 25. This chapter is limited to information on menus, screens, and navigation
in the character user interface. General characteristics of user interfaces
and programs are described elsewhere in this guide.

Windows Character Client Interface

Because of performance issues, you should not run such resource-
intensive processes as Material Requirements Planning (MRP) from
Windows client computers. In an environment that does not include
UNIX character clients, you can run these processes through the
Windows character client interface.
Navigation in this interface is almost identical to what is described in this
chapter, with some exceptions:
• Optionally, you can use the mouse to access fields directly instead of
pressing Tab to move from field to field.
¶ See “Menu Bar • In browses, you cannot use the Esc key normally required for some
(Browses Only)” keyboard shortcuts.
on page 83.
• Use the mouse to access the menu bar instead of pressing Esc-M.
• Pull down the Options menu to access Browse Filter, rather than
pressing Esc-F.
• Pull down the User Menu to access Exit, rather than pressing
Esc-X.
 Using the Character User Interface 79

Starting in Character Mode

To start a character session, follow the procedures provided by your
system administrator.
The first screen you see after launching the system lets you log in to the
system. Enter the log-in ID assigned by your system administrator and
your password.
Note You must be a valid user defined to log in. Your password can be
blank only if the password in your user record is blank.
Fig. 3.1
Character Logon
Screen

Program Interface Elements

Menu System
The menu system is comprised of 36 modules on the character-based
Main Menu, divided into three categories: Distribution, Manufacturing,
and Financial. In turn, each module has one or more menus attached to it.
Menus are lists of programs you use to look up or input data.
80 User Guide — Introduction

Fig. 3.2
Main Menu in
Character Mode

Enter a menu number or Progress program name and press Enter.

When you enter a menu number on the command line, the system either
executes a program or displays a lower-level menu. You can keep drilling
down through the menus until you reach the appropriate level.
Alternatively, you can access a program directly by entering its Progress
name—such as ppptmt.p for Item Master Maintenance—or number at
the command prompt.
To run a program from the current submenu, enter just its number on that
menu; for example, 1. If it is on a different submenu, you must enter its
full menu number preceded by a period.
Example If the current menu displayed is Manager Functions (36), you
can enter 1 to access Domain/Account Control (36.1). However, you must
enter .1.4.1 to run Item Master Maintenance (1.1.4) because it is on a
different submenu.
You can also use the arrow keys to move around the menu, then press
Enter to execute the highlighted selection.

Menu Substitutions
¶ See User Guide: Menu substitution lets you toggle between displaying browses and
Manager inquiries on the menu. You can also use it to switch between customized
Functions for
information on and noncustomized versions of a program. The system administrator can
Menu use Menu Substitution Maintenance (36.20.6) to specify which programs
Substitution
Maintenance. are substituted for others when you select this option.
 Using the Character User Interface 81

By default menu substitution is disabled. It can be enabled for individual

users in User Maintenance (36.3.18). In the character interface, this is the
only place it can be changed. In Windows, Menu Substitution is one of
the options on the Option menu.

Screen Elements
Figure 3.3 is an example of a program in character mode.
Fig. 3.3
Title bar Character Mode

Program window

Data frame

Progress
status bar

Elements of the character user interface are explained in the following

sections:
• Title Bar
• Program Window
• Progress Status Bar
• User Menu
• Menu Bar (Browses Only)

Title Bar

The title bar identifies the program currently running. For programs in the
character interface, the system displays three elements in the title bar:
• The Progress program name, such as ppptmt.p
• The complete menu number, such as 1.4.1
• The program menu label, such as Item Master Maintenance
82 User Guide — Introduction

Program Window

The program window displays the frames and fields of the current
program.

Getting Help

Two help tools are accessible from any program window:

• Look-up browses
• Online help

In the character user interface, access help by pressing F2 successively.

Up to three help windows display:
¶ For information • The first time you press F2, a look-up browse displays if one is
on creating and attached. If not, field help displays first.
attaching
browses, see User Use look-up browses to view records available to specified fields.
Guide: Manager
Functions. You then choose a record to enter in the field.
If you enter a value and press Enter, the list in the bottom of the
browse frame scrolls to the first record that matches that value. Use
the arrow keys to scroll through the list, then select the record by
pressing Enter.
• Press F2 again to display field help. It describes a specific field and
how it is used in the program. Most updateable fields have field help.
Display-only fields do not.
• Press F2 again to display procedure help. It describes the program and
how it is used in the module. Procedure help is not generally provided
for reports, inquiries, browses, or control programs.
Press F4 successively to exit all levels of help and return to the program
window.

Progress Status Bar

¶ See “Character- The status bar shows the basic commands needed to navigate through the
Mode Keyboard specific program currently displayed in the program window.
Commands” on
page 90 for a
complete list.
 Using the Character User Interface 83

User Menu

The User Menu saves time by letting you access a set of predefined
programs directly, without entering menu numbers or program names at
the command prompt. This way, you can execute a program without
having to remember its menu number or Progress name.
Although the menu bar is available only with browses, you can access a
User Menu from any program or menu by pressing F6. This listing
includes programs specified in User Function Maintenance (36.4.11).
User Function Maintenance lets you assign programs to individual users
or to all users. Use the following steps to navigate through the User
Menu:
• Press F6 to open a pop-up window listing the programs assigned
specifically to your user ID. If no programs are assigned, the list
includes programs assigned to the blank user ID (all users).
• Press F4. If you have both user-specific and blank-ID programs
assigned, the list updates to display programs assigned to all users.
Otherwise, the pop-up window closes.
• Press Tab to move the cursor between the menu number and the
program label. The system sorts lexically; for example, 28.13 is listed
before 3.18. When you move the cursor to the program label column,
the system re-sorts the list alphabetically.
• To run a program from the user menu, use the up and down arrows to
select the program. Then press Enter.

Menu Bar (Browses Only)

In character mode, browses have a menu bar that you can use to perform
various tasks.
Fig. 3.4
Browse Menu Bar

To access the menu bar, press Esc-M while a browse is running. You can Tip
then select a menu item with one of the following methods: Use the mouse from
Windows character
• Use the left and right arrows to move across to the menu you want. clients.
Then use the up and down arrows to highlight an item on the menu.
Press Enter to select the item.
84 User Guide — Introduction

• Press the underlined letter for the menu you want to select. The cursor
moves to that menu and displays the menu items. Use one of these
methods to select an item:
• Use the up and down arrows to highlight the item you want and
press Enter.
• Press the underlined letter for the item you want.

The following sections describe the items available on each menu in

browses.

User Menu

Tip The User Menu provides access to:

This is not the
menu accessed by • User Menu Items
pressing F6. See
page 83. • Print Options
• Run Program
• Exit
¶ See page 86. Note You cannot access the Progress Editor from the menus in the
character interface.

User Menu Items

User Menu items are user defined; you can use them to jump to other
programs. When you exit the second program, the system returns you to
the program that was running when you accessed the User Menu.
¶ See User Guide: Programs displayed on the User Menu are defined in User Function
Manager Maintenance (36.4.11). This list is always the same, regardless of which
Functions.
program you are running.
 Using the Character User Interface 85

Fig. 3.5
User Menu in
Character Mode
Defined in
User Function
Maintenance

Standard
menu options

Print

Use this command to display the Printer Options dialog box. You can use Tip
this dialog to specify the print destination; for example, a server printer or Not all output
options listed are
your terminal. You can also indicate that the output should be placed in a available from the
file. character interface.
See page 90.
After you select an output device, the Browse Print Configuration
window lets you specify the fields to be output. When you select fields,
the system displays the number of characters in each line of the output.

Run Program

Run Progress programs with this option. You can run any menu-level
program without having to exit the current program.
Fig. 3.6
Run Program
Dialog Box

1 Press Esc-M to access the drop-down User Menu and select Run Tip
Program. The accelerator key
is Ctrl+R.
2 In the pop-up window, enter one of the following:
• The Progress program name, such as ppptmt. You do not have to
enter the file extension of .p.
86 User Guide — Introduction

• A menu number. To run a program from the same submenu as the

current program, enter just its number on that menu; for example,
enter 1. If it is on a different submenu, you must enter its full
menu number preceded by a period; for example, enter .1.4.1 to
run Item Master Maintenance.
¶ See “Menu 3 Optionally specify whether the system should run a substitute
Substitutions” on program. Press Tab to cycle through the fields on the dialog box.
page 80.
Press Enter or Space to toggle the Use Menu Substitution field. If you
select Use Menu Substitution and the system finds a substitute
program, it displays the program name.
Note If no substitute program has been set up for the specified
program in Menu Substitution Maintenance (36.20.6), the system
disregards this field.
4 Press Go.
When you exit the second program, the system returns to the program that
was running when you accessed the User Menu.

Exit

You can exit the current program through the User Menu. You can also
exit programs by either of the following methods.
• Press F4.
• Press Ctrl+E.

Progress Editor

Unlike the Windows interface, the character user interface does not allow
you to access the Progress Editor from the User Menu. Instead, use the
following procedure.
1 Press F4 until the following prompt displays:
Please confirm exit

2 Instead of entering Y to confirm or N to cancel, enter P.

This launches the Progress Editor. The status bar displays navigation
commands.
 Using the Character User Interface 87

Edit Menu

Use this drop-down menu to cut, copy, and paste text.

Fig. 3.7
Edit Drop-Down
Menu

Cutting text deletes it from its current location and copies it to the
clipboard. Copying is similar, but it leaves the original text in place. In
both cases, you can paste the text to another location, such as a field.
1 Choose the text to cut or copy.
2 Display the Edit menu. This menu choice is available only when text
is selected.
3 Choose Cut or Copy.
4 Position the cursor in the new location.
5 Display the Edit menu and choose Paste.

Options Menu

To turn an option on or off, access the menu, scroll to the option, and
press Enter, or type the underlined letter. A > character next to an option
shows that it is on.
Fig. 3.8
Browse Options Menu in
Character Mode
88 User Guide — Introduction

Browse Options

¶ See “Filtering Use this option to set up filter criteria for browses. This is similar to the
and Sorting filter function in the Windows interface. Remember to substitute the
Browses” on
page 66. character mode function keys for the Windows buttons.

Toggle Filter

Use the toggle filter setting to turn on and off the filter criteria set up in
the browse filter options.

Help Menu

Use this menu to access help on fields, as well as display drill downs and
look-up browses on selected fields.
Fig. 3.9
Help Menu

Note Although Contents and Interface Help appear on the Help menu,
they are not available in the character user interface. This is also true of
several keyboard accelerator keys listed.

Field Help

The fastest way to get help for the current field is by pressing F2 twice
(press F2 once and, if available, a look-up browse displays), but you can
also bring it up with the Help menu. With the cursor in the field, drop
down the Help menu and choose Field Help.

Procedure Help

Procedure help is not included for browses. Choosing this option displays
an error message.
 Using the Character User Interface 89

Drill-Down

Drill-downs are browses accessed by choosing Drill-Down on the menu.

You use drill downs to view records associated with specified fields and
programs.
With the cursor in the field, drop down the Help menu and choose ¶ For more
Drill-Down. information, see
“Drill-Down
Browses” on
Note Browse graphing is not available in the character interface. page 65.

Look-Up Browse

This is the same browse that displays the first time you press F2, if it is ¶ See “Getting
attached to the field. Help” on
page 82.

About...

This option gives you technical information about the system.

You can use the Program Stack field to display the names of the programs
used to call the current program.
Press Tab to move between the command buttons, then press Enter to
move up or down the program stack.
• Select Up Stack to move toward the main menu.
• Select Down Stack to move toward the current program.

When you reach either the top or the bottom of the stack, the appropriate
command button is disabled.
Fig. 3.10
About... Screen
90 User Guide — Introduction

Output Devices
¶ See “Output Just as in the Windows interface, you can send the output from reports,
Devices” on inquiries, and browses to a number of devices, including the following:
page 71.
• Your terminal
• A server printer
• An e-mail message

However, the character user interface does not offer as many options as
the GUI interface.
• You can send output to Terminal, but not to Window. If you select
Window, the system displays an error message.
• The Winprint option is designed only for Windows clients. If you
select this option, the system displays an error message.
¶ See User Guide: Otherwise, the output options are the same in both interfaces. If you select
Manager a printer as the output device, be sure to use one that has been defined
Functions for
information on with a Destination Type of Default in Printer Setup Maintenance
setting up printers (36.13.2).
and using e-mail.
Just as in the Windows interface, you cannot use e-mail unless it has been
set up properly.

Character-Mode Keyboard Commands

¶ See page 74 for Tables 3.1 through 3.3 list the navigation, help, and edit keyboard
Windows commands used throughout the character user interface. When you are
keyboard
commands. using a program, the Progress status bar at the bottom of the screen
summarizes the specific keys used in that program.
Note Some commands require two keys to be pressed at the same time;
other key strokes are sequential. This table uses a plus sign (+) to indicate
keys pressed at the same time and a hyphen (-) to show keys pressed in
sequence.
Table 3.1
Character Navigation Keyboard Control Key
Navigation Commands Entry Entry Description
Commands
Go F1 Ctrl+X Moves to next frame.
End F4 Ctrl+E Exits a frame, program, or menu.
 Using the Character User Interface 91

Navigation Keyboard Control Key

Commands Entry Entry Description
User Menu F6 Ctrl+P Displays list of user-selected
programs.
Previous F9 or up arrow Ctrl+K Retrieves previous record in a key
data field and scrolls up in look-up
browses.
Next F10 or down Ctrl+J Retrieves next record in a key data
arrow field and scrolls down in look-up
browses.
Enter Enter Moves to next field within a frame.
Tab Tab Moves to next field within a frame.
Back Tab Ctrl+U Moves back one field within a frame.
Menu Bar Esc-M Accesses the menu bar. This is not
(Browse) available from Windows character
clients. Use the mouse instead.

Table 3.2
Help Keyboard Control Key Character Help
Commands Entry Entry Description Commands
Field Help F2 Opens help on current field.
Procedure Help F2 Opens help on current program.
Look-Up F2 Displays choice of records.
Browse
Browse F7 Opens the browse options window.
Options
Browse Esc-F Turns the browse options on and off.
Options Toggle This is not available from Windows
character clients. Use the mouse
instead.
Field Name Ctrl+F Ctrl+F Displays information about the current
session, program, and field.

Table 3.3
Edit Keyboard Control Key Character Edit
Commands Entry Entry Description Commands
Insert F3 Ctrl+T Enables text insertion.
Delete Record F5 Ctrl+D Deletes an open record.
Recall F7 Ctrl+R Recalls last saved value in a field.
Cut F8 Clears a field.
92 User Guide — Introduction

Edit Keyboard Control Key

Commands Entry Entry Description
Copy F11 Ctrl+B Copies a field.
Paste F11 Ctrl+B Inserts value that you copied.
Multiple Copy F12 Ctrl+A Copies values from one or more fields
and pastes them into the same fields of
another record.
Clear Date Shift+? Clears the value in date fields.

Stored Values for Fields

F12 or Ctrl+A stores values for any number of fields. Values are pasted
back when you press F12 or Ctrl+A again. The field values are stored
separately for each field and for each user, and the values are saved
between logon sessions.
Example Using Sales Order Maintenance, enter a value in Channel and
press F12 while the cursor is still in the field to store the value. Then enter
a value in Credit Terms and press F12 to store that entry. Finish entering
the sales order. The next time you enter a sales order, press F12 in the
empty Channel field and the stored value is entered. Press F12 on the
Credit Terms to input the stored credit terms.
To store field values in a maintenance program, you must select Go or
Enter through the frame containing the field values you stored. If you exit
the frame using End, the field values you stored are not saved. This is
only true in maintenance and other update programs. Values stored using
F12 in reports and inquiries are saved even if you do not select Go or
Enter to complete the frame.
 Chapter 4

Menu and Program

Name Listing
This chapter contains a listing of all menu items, by menu number,
menu label, and program name.
94 User Guide — Introduction

1. Items/Sites Menu
Menu Menu Label Program Name
1.1 Site/Location/Status Menu ...
1.1.1 Inventory Status Code Maintenance icstmt.p
1.1.2 Inventory Status Code Browse gpbr349.p
1.1.3 Inventory Status Code Report icstrp.p
1.1.5 Item Status Code Maintenance ppstmt.p
1.1.6 Item Status Code Browse gpbr198.p
1.1.7 Item Status Code Report ppstrp.p
1.1.9 Inventory Movement Code Maintenance soimmt.p
1.1.10 Inventory Movement Code Browse gpbr501.p
1.1.13 Site Maintenance icsimt.p
1.1.14 Site Browse gpbr348.p
1.1.15 Site Report icsirp.p
1.1.18 Location Maintenance iclomt.p
1.1.19 Location Browse gpbr336.p
1.1.20 Location Report iclorp01.p
1.2 Product Line/Account Menu ...
1.2.1 Product Line Maintenance ppplmt.p
1.2.2 Product Line Inquiry pppliq.p
1.2.3 Product Line Report ppplrp.p
1.2.5 Purchasing Account Maintenance ppplpmt.p
1.2.6 Purchasing Account Inquiry ppplpiq.p
1.2.7 Purchasing Account Report ppplprp.p
1.2.9 Work Order Account Maintenance ppplwmt.p
1.2.10 Work Order Account Inquiry ppplwiq.p
1.2.11 Work Order Account Report ppplwrp.p
1.2.13 Inventory Account Maintenance pppldmt.p
1.2.14 Inventory Account Browse ppbr011.p
1.2.17 Sales Account Maintenance ppplsmt.p
1.2.18 Sales Account Browse ppbr012.p
1.2.19 Sales Account Report ppplsrp.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 95

Menu Menu Label Program Name

1.2.21 Logistics Charge Account Menu...
1.2.21.1 Inbound Account Maintenance laiacmt.p
1.2.21.2 Inbound Account Inquiry laiaciq.p
1.2.21.13 Outbound Accrual Account Maint laoacrmt.p
1.2.21.16 Outbound Expense Account Maint laoexpmt.p
1.2.21.17 Outbound Expense Account Inquiry laoexpiq.p
1.4 Item Data Menu ...
1.4.1 Item Master Maintenance ppptmt.p
1.4.2 Item Master Inquiry ppptiq05.p
1.4.3 Item Data Maintenance ppptmt04.p
1.4.4 Item Data Inquiry ppptiq04.p
1.4.5 Item Inventory Data Maintenance ppptmt01.p
1.4.6 Item-Site Inventory Data Inquiry ppptiq01.p
1.4.7 Item Planning Maintenance ppptmt02.p
1.4.8 Item-Site Planning Inquiry ppptiq02.p
1.4.9 Item Cost Maintenance ppptmt03.p
1.4.10 Item-Site Cost Inquiry ppptiq03.p
1.4.11 Item-Site Master Inquiry ppptiq00.p
1.4.12 Item Master Copy ppptcp.p
1.4.13 Item Number Change ppptcg.p
1.4.14 Item Cost Set Name Change ppcscg.p
1.4.15 Item-Element Cost Batch Load ppcsbtld.p
1.4.16 Item-Site Inventory Data Maintenance pppsmt01.p
1.4.17 Item-Site Planning Maintenance pppsmt02.p
1.4.18 Item-Site Cost Maintenance pppsmt03.p
1.4.19 Commodity Code Maintenance ppcommt.p
1.4.20 Item Burden Cost Update ppbdov01.p
1.4.21 Item Overhead Cost Update ppbdov02.p
1.4.22 Current Cost Set Move to GL Set ppcscp01.p
1.4.23 GL Cost Set Move to Current Set ppcscp02.p
1.5 Item Reports Menu ...
1.5.1 Item Master Report ppptrp.p
1.5.2 Item Data Report ppptrp11.p
96 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

1.5.3 Item Inventory Data Report ppptrp20.p
1.5.4 Item Planning Report ppptrp12.p
1.5.5 Item Lead Time Report ppptrp14.p
1.5.6 Item Cost Report ppptrp13.p
1.5.8 Stock Status Report ppptrp01.p
1.5.9 Item ABC Status Report/Update ppptrp04.p
1.5.10 Reorder Report ppptrp02.p
1.5.12 Item Master Comments Report ppcmrp.p
1.5.13 Item Labels Print ppptrp09.p
1.5.15 Item-Site Inventory Data Report pppsrp20.p
1.5.16 Item-Site Planning Report pppsrp12.p
1.5.17 Item-Site Lead Time Report pppsrp14.p
1.5.21 Inventory Valuation Report ppptrp03.p
1.5.22 Inventory Valuation by Location ppptrp05.p
1.5.23 Inventory Valuation as of Date ppptrp06.p
1.5.24 Inventory Valuation as of by Location ppptrp07.p
1.6 Item Browse ppbr013.p
1.8 Analysis Code Menu ...
1.8.1 Analysis Code Maintenance ppacmt.p
1.8.2 Analysis Code Inquiry ppaciq01.p
1.8.4 Analysis Code Selection Maintenance ppacrl.p
1.8.5 Analysis Code Selection Inquiry ppaciq03.p
1.8.7 Analysis Code Link Maintenance ppacln.p
1.8.8 Analysis Code Link Inquiry ppaciq02.p
1.8.9 Analysis Code Where-Linked Inquiry ppaciq07.p
1.8.13 Analysis Code Detail Maintenance ppacdt.p
1.8.14 Analysis Code Detail Inquiry ppaciq04.p
1.8.15 Analysis Code Where-Used Inquiry ppaciq05.p
1.8.17 Analysis Code Report ppacrp01.p
1.8.19 Analysis Code Detail Build ppacut01.p
1.8.20 Analysis Code Copy ppaccp.p
1.9 Product Change Control Menu ...
1.9.1 PCC Setup Menu ...
 Menu and Program Name Listing 97

Menu Menu Label Program Name

1.9.1.1 Group Maintenance pcgrmt.p
1.9.1.2 Group Browse pcbr004.p
1.9.1.3 Maintain Users in Groups pcurgrmt.p
1.9.1.4 Groups by User Browse pcbr002.p
1.9.1.5 Routing Slip Maintenance pcrsmt.p
1.9.1.6 Routing Slip Browse pcbr006.p
1.9.1.7 Routing Slip Copy pcrscp.p
1.9.1.9 PCR/PCO Type Maintenance pctypemt.p
1.9.1.10 PCR/PCO Type Browse pcbr026.p
1.9.2 PCR/PCO Maintenance Menu ...
1.9.2.1 PCR Maintenance ecpcrmt.p
1.9.2.2 PCR Browse pcbr024.p
1.9.2.4 Route PCR for Approval ecrsbmt.p
1.9.2.8 PCR/PCO Detail Inquiry ececiq.p
1.9.2.13 PCO Maintenance ecpcomt.p
1.9.2.14 PCO Browse pcbr025.p
1.9.2.16 Route PCO for Approval ecosbmt.p
1.9.6 Approvals Menu ...
1.9.6.1 PCR/PCO Approval pcapqu.p
1.9.6.2 Approval Browse pcbr029.p
1.9.6.13 Detail Approval Maintenance pcapdtmt.p
1.9.7 PCO Implementation Menu ...
1.9.7.1 Release and Distribution ecrels.p
1.9.7.3 Incorporation Planning Report ecinplan.p
1.9.7.4 Incorporation Selection ecincsel.p
1.9.7.5 Incorporation ecincpro.p
1.9.7.13 Implementation ecimppro.p
1.9.9 PCC Reports and Inquiries Menu ...
1.9.9.1 Print PCR/PCO ececrp.p
1.9.9.3 Affected Structures/Formulas Inquiry ecbmpsiq.p
1.9.9.4 Structure/Formula Impact Report ecpsfmrp.p
1.9.9.6 Item Revision History Browse ecbr007.p
1.9.11 PCR/PCO Status Browse pcbr003.p
98 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

1.9.13 PCR/PCO Import/Export ecdmpld.p
1.9.14 PCR/PCO Close ecclose.p
1.9.15 PCR/PCO Delete/Archive ecarcdel.p
1.9.24 PCC Control pcpcpm.p
1.10 Price List and Discount Menu ...
1.10.1 SO/SQ/RMA Issues Pricing Menu ...
1.10.1.1 Price List Maintenance pppimt.p
1.10.1.2 Price List Inquiry pppiiq01.p
1.10.1.3 Price List Report pppirp01.p
1.10.1.5 Price Lists by Customer Inquiry pppiiq02.p
1.10.1.6 Price Lists by Item Inquiry pppiiq03.p
1.10.1.8 Price List Copy pppicp.p
1.10.1.13 Pricing What-If Inquiry (S/O) sopiwiiq.p
1.10.1.15 Customer Orders by Price List Inquiry pppiiq04.p
1.10.1.17 Sales Order Price Inquiry soppiq.p
1.10.1.18 Sales Quote Price Inquiry sqppiq.p
1.10.1.24 Pricing Control pppipm.p
1.10.2 PO/Sched/RMA Receipt Pricing Menu ...
1.10.2.1 Price List Maintenance pppcmt.p
1.10.2.2 Price List Browse ppbr003.p
1.10.2.3 Price List Report pppcrp.p
1.10.2.4 Price List By Item Report pppcrp01.p
1.10.2.5 Price List Copy pppccp.p
1.10.2.6 Price List Generation By Item pppcptup.p
1.10.13 Volume Discount Maintenance sosdmt.p
1.10.14 Volume Discount Browse sobr008.p
1.12 Master Comment Maintenance gpcmmt.p
1.13 Unit of Measure Maintenance ppummt.p
1.14 Unit of Measure Browse ppbr021.p
1.16 Customer Item Maintenance ppcpmt.p
1.17 Customer Item Browse ppbr001.p
1.18 Customer Item Report ppcprp.p
1.19 Supplier Item Maintenance ppvpmt.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 99

Menu Menu Label Program Name

1.20 Supplier Item Browse ppbr022.p
1.21 Supplier Item Report ppvprp.p
1.22 Compliance Menu ...
1.22.1 Lot Master Maintenance clltmt.p
1.22.2 Lot Master Inquiry icltmiq.p
1.22.4 Work Order Attribute Maintenance clatmt.p
1.22.5 Work Order Attribute Browse clbr001.p
1.22.9 Work Order Batch Browse clbr002.p
1.22.13 Lot Group Maintenance cllgmt.p
1.22.14 Lot Group Inquiry cllgiq.p
1.22.16 Controlled Substances Menu ...
1.22.16.1 Controlled Authority Maintenance clctamt.p
1.22.16.2 Controlled Authority Inquiry clctaiq.p
1.22.16.4 Controlled Customer Maintenance clctcmt.p
1.22.16.5 Controlled Customer Browse clbr003.p
1.22.16.7 Controlled Site Maintenance clctsmt.p
1.22.16.8 Controlled Site Browse clbr004.p
1.22.16.10 Controlled Item Maintenance clctpmt.p
1.22.16.11 Controlled Item Report clctprp.p
1.22.16.13 General License Maintenance clglimt.p
1.22.16.14 General License Report clglirp.p
1.22.16.16 Individual License Maintenance clilimt.p
1.22.16.17 Individual License Master Report clilirp.p
1.22.19 Multi-Lot Inventory Detail Update clltamt.p
1.22.22 Lot Master Build clltbd.p
1.22.23 Lot Master Delete/Archive clltup.p
1.22.24 Compliance Control clclpm.p
100 User Guide — Introduction

2. Addresses/Taxes Menu
Menu Menu Label Program Name
2.1 Customers Menu ...
2.1.1 Customer Maintenance adcsmt.p
2.1.2 Customer Browse adbr001.p
2.1.3 Customer Address Report adcsrp.p
2.1.4 Customer Master Report adcsrp01.p
2.1.5 Customer Labels Print adcsrp02.p
2.1.7 Customer Credit Limit Adjustment adcscr.p
2.1.9 Reserved Location Menu...
2.1.9.1 Reserved Location Maintenance adrlmt.p
2.1.9.2 Reserved Location Browse icbr013.p
2.1.9.3 Reserved Location Report adrlrp.p
2.1.9.5 Detail Allocations Inventory Inquiry icrliq.p
2.1.9.6 Detail Allocations Inventory Report icrlrp.p
2.1.12 Master Comment Maintenance gpcmmt.p
2.1.13 Customer Ship-to Maintenance adstmt.p
2.1.14 Customer Ship-to Inquiry adstiq.p
2.1.15 Customer Ship-to Address Report adstrp.p
2.1.16 Temporary Ship-to Delete adstdl.p
2.1.18 Salesperson Assignment Report adcsrp03.p
2.1.24 Customer Control adcspm.p
2.3 Suppliers Menu ...
2.3.1 Supplier Maintenance advnmt.p
2.3.2 Supplier Browse adbr014.p
2.3.3 Supplier Address Report advnrp.p
2.3.4 Supplier Master Report advnrp01.p
2.3.5 Supplier Labels Print advnrp02.p
2.3.12 Master Comment Maintenance gpcmmt.p
2.3.13 Supplier Remit-to Maintenance adrtmt.p
2.3.14 Supplier Remit-to Browse adbr009.p
2.3.15 Supplier Remit-to Report adrtrp.p
2.3.24 Supplier Control advdpm.p
2.5 Salespersons Menu ...
 Menu and Program Name Listing 101

Menu Menu Label Program Name

2.5.1 Salesperson Maintenance adspmt.p
2.5.2 Salesperson Browse adbr010.p
2.5.4 Salesperson Master Report adsprp.p
2.5.6 Salesperson Commission Detail adspmt01.p
2.5.7 Commission Detail Browse adbr011.p
2.5.8 Commission Detail Report adsprp04.p
2.5.12 Master Comment Maintenance gpcmmt.p
2.5.13 Salesperson Commission Report adsprp01.p
2.5.14 Salesperson Bookings Report adsprp02.p
2.5.15 Salesperson Shipments Report adsprp09.p
2.5.16 Salesperson Payments Report adsprp03.p
2.5.24 Salesperson Control adsppm.p
2.7 Employees Menu ...
2.7.1 Employee Maintenance ademmt.p
2.7.2 Employee Browse adbr006.p
2.7.4 Employee Master Report ademrp.p
2.7.12 Master Comment Maintenance gpcmmt.p
2.7.24 Employee Control adempm.p
2.9 Address List Type Maintenance adlsmt.p
2.10 Address List Type Browse adbr008.p
2.11 Address Code Change adadcg.p
2.12 Company Address Maintenance admgmt06.p
2.13 Global Tax Management Menu ...
2.13.1 Tax Parameters Menu ...
2.13.1.1 Tax Type Maintenance txtxtmt.p
2.13.1.2 Tax Type Browse txbr010.p
2.13.1.3 Tax Type Report txtxtrp.p
2.13.1.5 Tax Class Maintenance txtaxcmt.p
2.13.1.6 Tax Class Browse txbr008.p
2.13.1.7 Tax Class Report txtaxcrp.p
2.13.1.9 Tax Usage Maintenance txtxumt.p
2.13.1.10 Tax Usage Browse txbr011.p
2.13.1.11 Tax Usage Report txtxurp.p
102 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

2.13.1.13 Tax Base Maintenance txtxbmt.p
2.13.1.14 Tax Base Inquiry txtxbiq.p
2.13.1.15 Tax Base Report txtxbrp.p
2.13.1.17 Rounding Method Maintenance mgrndmt.p
2.13.1.18 Rounding Method Browse adbr016.p
2.13.1.19 Rounding Method Report mgrndrp.p
2.13.1.21 Trailer Tax Detail Maintenance txtrldmt.p
2.13.1.22 Trailer Tax Detail Inquiry txtrldiq.p
2.13.1.23 Trailer Tax Detail Report txtrldrp.p
2.13.3 Tax Jurisdictions Menu ...
2.13.3.13 Tax Zone Maintenance txtxzmt.p
2.13.3.14 Tax Zone Browse txbr012.p
2.13.3.15 Tax Zone Report txtxzrp.p
2.13.3.17 Tax Hierarchy Inquiry txtxziq1.p
2.13.3.18 Tax Hierarchy Report txtxzrp1.p
2.13.3.20 VAT Registration Format Maintenance gpvtrgmt.p
2.13.3.21 VAT Registration Format Inquiry gpvtrgiq.p
2.13.5 Tax Environment Menu ...
2.13.5.1 Tax Environment Maintenance txtxemt.p
2.13.5.2 Tax Environment Browse txbr009.p
2.13.5.3 Tax Environment Report txtxerp.p
2.13.13 Tax Rate Menu ...
2.13.13.1 Tax Rate Maintenance txtx2mt.p
2.13.13.2 Tax Rate Inquiry txtx2iq.p
2.13.13.3 Tax Rate Report txtx2rp.p
2.13.13.5 Tax Rate Copy/Update txtx2upd.p
2.13.15 Tax History Menu ...
2.13.15.2 Tax Detail by Transaction Inquiry txtx2diq.p
2.13.15.3 Tax Detail by Transaction Report txtx2drp.p
2.13.15.8 EC Sales Listing vtvterp.p
2.13.15.9 VAT Registration Number Report advterp.p
2.13.15.13 AR Tax by Transaction Report txarrp.p
2.13.15.14 AR Tax by Tax Rate Report txarrp01.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 103

Menu Menu Label Program Name

2.13.15.16 AP Tax by Transaction Report txaprp.p
2.13.15.17 AP Tax by Tax Rate Report txaprp01.p
2.13.22 Conversion Menu ...
2.13.22.1 VAT to GTM—Setup txvatcnv.p
2.13.22.2 VAT to GTM—Masters txvatmst.p
2.13.22.3 VAT to GTM—Transactions txvattrn.p
2.13.22.5 USA to GTM—Setup txusacnv.p
2.13.22.6 USA to GTM—Masters txusamst.p
2.13.22.7 USA to GTM—Transactions txusatrn.p
2.13.22.9 CAN to GTM—Setup txcancnv.p
2.13.22.10 CAN to GTM—Masters txcanmst.p
2.13.22.11 CAN to GTM—Transactions txcantrn.p
2.13.24 Global Tax Management Control txtxcmt.p
2.14 Country Code Menu...
2.14.1 Country Code Maintenance adctrymt.p
2.14.2 Country Code Browse adbr015.p
2.14.3 Country Code Report adctryrp.p
2.15 Logistics Accounting Menu ...
2.15.1 Logistics Charge Code Maint lalcmt.p
2.15.2 Logistics Charge Code Inquiry lalciq.p
2.15.4 Terms of Trade Maintenance latotmt.p
2.15.5 Terms of Trade Inquiry latotiq.p
2.15.7 Log Charge Pending Voucher Maint lapvomt.p
2.15.13 Inbound Account Maintenance laiacmt.p
2.15.14 Inbound Account Inquiry laiaciq.p
2.15.16 Outbound Accrual Account Maint laoacrmt.p
2.15.17 Outbound Accrual Account Inquiry laoacriq.p
2.15.19 Outbound Expense Account Maint laoexpmt.p
2.15.20 Outbound Expense Account Inquiry laoexpiq.p
2.15.24 Logistics Accounting Control lacpm.p
2.16 Delivery Transit Time Menu...
2.16.1 Delivery Transit Time Maintenance sodtmt.p
2.16.2 Delivery Transit Time Browse sobr020.p
104 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

2.16.3 Delivery Transit Time Report sodtrp.p
2.17 Carriers Menu ...
2.17.1 Carrier Maintenance adcamt.p
2.17.2 Carrier Browse adbr022.p
2.17.24 Carrier Control adcapm.p
2.18 Shipping Group/Document Menu ...
2.18.1 Shipping Group Maintenance sosgmt.p
2.18.2 Shipping Group Browse gpbr505.p
2.18.3 Shipping Group Address Browse gpbr503.p
2.18.4 Shipping Group Inventory Movement Browse gpbr504.p
2.18.5 Shipping Group Report sosgrp.p
2.18.13 Document Format Maintenance sodfmt.p
2.18.14 Document Format Browse gpbr500.p
2.19 Credit Terms/Trailer Codes Menu ...
2.19.1 Credit Terms Maintenance adcrtmt.p
2.19.2 Credit Terms Browse gpbr353.p
2.19.3 Credit Terms Report adcrtrp.p
2.19.13 Trailer Code Maintenance sotrlmt.p
2.19.14 Trailer Code Browse sobr010.p
2.19.23 Default Trailer Disc at Payment uttrlcd.p
2.20 Freight Charges Menu ...
2.20.1 Freight List Maintenance sofrlmt.p
2.20.2 Freight List Browse sobr002.p
2.20.4 Freight Zone Maintenance sofrzmt.p
2.20.5 Freight Zone Browse sobr006.p
2.20.7 Freight Class Maintenance sofrclmt.p
2.20.8 Freight Class Browse sobr001.p
2.20.10 Freight Charges Maintenance sofrcmt.p
2.20.11 Freight Charges Browse sobr005.p
2.20.12 Freight Charges Report sofrcrp.p
2.20.13 Freight Terms Maintenance sofrtmt.p
2.20.14 Freight Terms Browse sobr003.p
2.20.24 Freight Control sofrctmt.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 105

Menu Menu Label Program Name

2.21 Customer/Supplier Banks Menu ...
2.21.1 Customer/Supplier Bank Maintenance adcsbkmt.p
2.21.2 Customer/Supplier Bank Browse adbr002.p
2.21.3 Customer/Supplier Bank Report adcsbkrp.p
2.22 Intrastat Menu ...
2.22.1 Intrastat Setup Menu ...
2.22.1.1 Flow Indicator Maintenance ieflowmt.p
2.22.1.2 Flow Indicator Browse gpbr329.p
2.22.1.4 Terms of Delivery Maintenance ietodmt.p
2.22.1.5 Terms of Delivery Browse gpbr320.p
2.22.1.7 Nature of Transaction Maintenance ienotmt.p
2.22.1.8 Nature of Transaction Browse gpbr331.p
2.22.1.13 Mode of Transport Maintenance iemotmt.p
2.22.1.14 Mode of Transport Browse gpbr337.p
2.22.1.16 Port Maintenance ieportmt.p
2.22.1.17 Port Browse gpbr319.p
2.22.1.19 Statistical Procedure Maintenance iespmt.p
2.22.1.20 Statistical Procedure Browse gpbr334.p
2.22.1.22 Region Maintenance ieregmt.p
2.22.1.23 Region Browse gpbr333.p
2.22.3 Commodity Code Maintenance iecommt.p
2.22.4 Commodity Code Browse iebr001.p
2.22.6 Item Intrastat Data Maintenance ieptmt.p
2.22.7 Item Intrastat Data Inquiry ieptiq.p
2.22.11 Order Intrastat Data Maintenance iedmt.p
2.22.12 Order Intrastat Data Report ieordrp.p
2.22.13 Intrastat Maintenance iehmt.p
2.22.14 Intrastat Inquiry iehiq.p
2.22.15 Intrastat Inquiry by Invoice iehinviq.p
2.22.16 Intrastat Inquiry by Voucher iehvouiq.p
2.22.17 Intrastat Inquiry by Order iehordiq.p
2.22.19 Intrastat Declaration Print iehprt.p
2.22.20 Intrastat Declaration Reprint iehrprt.p
106 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

2.22.23 Intrastat Delete/Archive iehup.p
2.22.24 Intrastat Control iepm.p
2.24 Addresses/Taxes Control adpm.p

3. Inventory Control Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
3.1 Inventory Detail Menu ...
3.1.1 Inventory Detail Maintenance icldmt.p
3.1.2 Detail Maintenance by Item/Lot icitlmt.p
3.1.4 Detail Alloc Inventory Inquiry icrliq.p
3.1.5 Detail Alloc Inventory Report icrlrp.p
3.1.13 Inventory Detail by Lot Inquiry icloiq03.p
3.2 Inventory Detail by Item Browse icbr002.p
3.3 Inventory Detail by Site Browse icbr004.p
3.4 Inventory Transfer Menu ...
3.4.1 Transfer—Single Item iclotr02.p
3.4.2 Transfer—Multi Item iclotr01.p
3.4.3 Transfer With Lot/Serial Change iclotr03.p
3.4.4 Batchload Transfer with Lot/Serial Change iclotr04.p
3.6 Inventory Reports Menu ...
3.6.1 Stock Status Report ppptrp01.p
3.6.2 Reorder Report ppptrp02.p
3.6.3 Item ABC Status Report/Update ppptrp04.p
3.6.5 Inventory Detail Report ppptrp08.p
3.6.6 Inventory Detail by Location iclorp.p
3.6.8 Current Surplus Inventory Report ppptrp21.p
3.6.9 Projected Surplus Inventory ppptrp22.p
3.6.13 Inventory Valuation Report ppptrp03.p
3.6.14 Inventory Valuation by Location ppptrp05.p
3.6.15 Inventory Valuation as of Date ppptrp06.p
3.6.16 Inventory Valuation as of by Location ppptrp07.p
3.6.18 Stock Journal icstjrrp.p
3.6.20 Device History Record Report ppptdhrp.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 107

Menu Menu Label Program Name

3.7 Issues—Unplanned icunis.p
3.8 Issues—Return to Supplier icrvis.p
3.9 Receipts—Unplanned icunrc.p
3.10 Receipts—Sales Order Return icsorc.p
3.11 Receipts—Return to Stock icrsrc.p
3.12 Receipts—Backward Exploded icunrc01.p
3.13 Cycle Count Worksheet Print icccrp.p
3.14 Cycle Count Results Entry icccaj.p
3.15 Cycle Count Results Report icccrp01.p
3.16 Physical Inventory Menu ...
3.16.1 Item Tag Create piptcr.p
3.16.2 Bulk Tag Create pibtcr.p
3.16.4 Inventory Balance Freeze piibfrz.p
3.16.6 Tag Print pirp01.p
3.16.7 Tag Void Status Update pivtup.p
3.16.8 Tag Inquiry piiq.p
3.16.11 Tag Count Entry pitcmt1.p
3.16.12 Tag Recount Entry pitcmt2.p
3.16.13 Tag Report pirp03.p
3.16.14 Counted Tag Report pirp02.p
3.16.15 Uncounted Tag Report/Update pirp06.p
3.16.16 Frozen Inventory Valuation Report pirp05.p
3.16.17 Tag Inventory Valuation Report pirp07.p
3.16.18 Inventory Variance Report pirp04.p
3.16.21 Inventory Balance Update piibup.p
3.16.23 Tag Delete/Archive pitdup.p
3.17 Stock Availability Browse icbr007.p
3.18 Allocated Inventory Inquiry icptiq02.p
3.19 Unallocated Inventory Inquiry icptiq03.p
3.20 Mirror Accounting Menu ...
3.20.1 Mirror Table Maintenance icmamt.p
3.20.2 Mirror Table Browse icbr006.p
3.20.3 Mirror Table Report icmarp.p
108 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

3.20.5 Mirror Account Posting Register icmapsrp.p
3.21 Transaction History Menu ...
3.21.1 Transactions Detail Inquiry ictriq.p
3.21.2 Transactions by Item Browse icbr011.p
3.21.12 Daybook Transaction Accounting Report icdyacrp.p
3.21.13 Transactions by Order Report ictrrp02.p
3.21.14 Transactions by Item Report ictrrp01.p
3.21.16 Transactions Accounting Report ictrrp03.p
3.21.17 Average Cost Accounting Report ictrrp04.p
3.21.19 Transaction Numbering Report ictrnrp.p
3.21.23 Transactions Delete/Archive ictrup.p
3.22 Lot/Serial Number Menu ...
3.22.1 Lot Transactions by Date Browse icbr005.p
3.22.2 Lot Transactions by Transaction Browse icbr012.p
3.22.3 Lot Actual Bill Inquiry icltiq02.p
3.22.4 Lot Where-Used Inquiry icltiq01.p
3.22.13 PRO\PLUS WIP Lot Trace Menu ...
3.22.13.1 Routing Registration Maintenance wlrmmt.p
3.22.13.2 Routing Registration Inquiry wlrmiq.p
3.22.13.4 BOM Registration Maintenance wlbmmt.p
3.22.13.5 BOM Registration Inquiry wlbmiq.p
3.22.13.13 WIP Lot Inventory Status Report wlrp01.p
3.22.13.14 Item Lot Ship Transaction Report wlrp04.p
3.22.13.15 WIP Lot Convert Transaction Report wlrp06.p
3.22.13.16 WIP Lot Non-Convert Transaction Report wlrp07.p
3.22.13.17 WIP Lot Inquiry wliq01.p
3.22.13.18 Supplier Lot Transaction Report wlrp08.p
3.22.13.19 WIP Lot Where-Used Report wlrp02.p
3.22.13.20 WIP Lot Actual Bill Report wlrp03.p
3.22.13.23 WIP Lot Delete/Archive wldel.p
3.22.13.24 WIP Lot Trace Control wlpm.p
3.23 Zero Balance Delete/Archive icldup.p
3.24 Inventory Control icicpm.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 109

5. Purchasing Menu
Menu Menu Label Program Name
5.1 Purchase Requisition Menu ...
5.1.1 Purchase Approvals Maintenance poacmt.p
5.1.2 Purchase Approvals Browse pobr001.p
5.1.4 Purchase Requisition Maintenance poprmt.p
5.1.5 Purchase Requisition Browse pobr007.p
5.1.6 Purchase Requisition Report poprrp.p
5.1.8 Requisition Approval Document Print poprrp02.p
5.1.16 Requisition Approval Maintenance poprap.p
5.1.17 Approved Requisition Print poprrp01.p
5.2 Global Requisition Menu ...
5.2.1 Setup Menu ...
5.2.1.1 Approval Level Maintenance rqlmt.p
5.2.1.2 Approval Level Browse rqliq.p
5.2.1.4 Category Maintenance rqcmt.p
5.2.1.5 Category Report rqcrp.p
5.2.1.7 Job Maintenance rqjmt.p
5.2.1.8 Job Browse rqjiq.p
5.2.1.13 Horizontal Approver Maintenance rqahmt.p
5.2.1.14 Vertical Approver Maintenance rqavmt.p
5.2.1.15 Job Approver Maintenance rqajmt.p
5.2.1.16 Product Line Approver Maintenance rqaplmt.p
5.2.1.17 Approver Report rqarp.p
5.2.1.20 Buyer Maintenance rqbmt.p
5.2.1.24 Requisition Control rqpm.p
5.2.3 Requisition Maintenance rqrqmt.p
5.2.4 Requisition Inquiry rqrqiq1.p
5.2.5 Requisition Browse rqrqiq5.p
5.2.6 Requisition Report rqrqrp5.p
5.2.8 Requisition History Log rqrqrp4.p
5.2.13 Requisition Approval Maintenance rqapmt.p
5.2.14 Requisition Routing Maintenance rqrtmt.p
110 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

5.2.15 Approval Status Inquiry rqrqiq2.p
5.2.16 Approver’s Open Req. Inquiry rqrqiq3.p
5.2.17 PO and Req. Cross Reference rqpoiq.p
5.2.18 Build PO from Requisitions rqpobld.p
5.2.21 Out of Tolerance Inquiry rqrqiq4.p
5.2.23 Requisition Delete/Archive rqrqup.p
5.3 Blanket Purchase Orders Menu ...
5.3.1 Blanket Order Maintenance poblmt.p
5.3.2 Blanket Order Browse pobr003.p
5.3.3 Blanket Order by Order Report poblrp.p
5.3.5 Blanket Order Print poblrp03.p
5.3.6 Blanket Order Release to PO poblrel.p
5.5 Supplier Schedules Menu ...
5.5.1 Supplier Schedules Setup Menu ...
5.5.1.1 Supplier Calendar Maintenance rsscmt.p
5.5.1.2 Supplier Calendar Browse rsbr005.p
5.5.1.13 Scheduled Order Maintenance rspomt.p
5.5.1.14 Scheduled Order Inquiry rspoiq.p
5.5.1.15 Scheduled Order Report rsporp.p
5.5.1.17 Scheduled Order MRP % Maintenance rspoamt.p
5.5.1.18 Scheduled Order MRP % Browse rsbr004.p
5.5.3 Schedule Processing Menu ...
5.5.3.1 Schedule Update from MRP rssup.p
5.5.3.2 Export MRP Demand rswoex.p
5.5.3.3 Schedule Maintenance rssmt.p
5.5.3.4 Schedule Inquiry rsiq01.p
5.5.3.5 Schedule History Inquiry rsiq02.p
5.5.3.8 Schedule Print rsrp05.p
5.5.3.9 Schedule Print in Fax Format rsrp09.p
5.5.3.13 Schedule Report rsrp01.p
5.5.3.15 Schedule Comparative rsrp02.p
5.5.3.17 Schedule Authorization Report rsrp03.p
5.5.3.23 Schedule Delete/Archive rsdel.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 111

Menu Menu Label Program Name

5.5.5 Receipts Processing Menu ...
5.5.5.1 Schedule Summary Report rsrp07.p
5.5.5.4 PO Container Maintenance rsctmt.p
5.5.5.5 PO Shipper Maintenance rsshmt.p
5.5.5.6 PO Shipper/Container Inquiry rsiq03.p
5.5.5.8 PO Shipper Unconfirmed Report rsrp12.p
5.5.5.11 PO Shipper Receipt rsporc.p
5.5.5.13 Cumulative Received Maintenance rscadj.p
5.5.5.14 Cum Received Reset to Zero rscup.p
5.5.5.15 Receipt History Report rsrp08.p
5.5.5.23 PO Shipper Delete/Archive rsscdel.p
5.5.7 PRO/PLUS Supplier Schedules ...
5.5.7.1 Ship Delivery Time Maintenance rssdtmt.p
5.5.7.2 Ship Delivery Time Inquiry rssdtiq.p
5.5.7.4 Supplier Controls Maintenance adssmt.p
5.5.7.6 Supplier Planning Schedule Maintenance rspsmt.p
5.5.7.7 Supplier Shipping Schedule Maintenance rsssmt.p
5.5.7.13 Ship Schedule Variance Compare rsrp10.p
5.5.7.14 Ship to Plan Schedule Compare rsrp11.p
5.5.7.24 Supplier Schedule Control rspm.p
5.7 Purchase Order Maintenance popomt.p
5.8 Purchase Order Browse pobr006.p
5.9 Purchase Order Reports Menu ...
5.9.1 Purchase Orders by Order Report poporp.p
5.9.2 Purchase Orders by Supplier Report poporp01.p
5.9.3 Purchase Orders by Item Report poporp02.p
5.9.4 Purchase Order Commitment Report poporp05.p
5.9.6 Purchase Order Supply Schedule poporp08.p
5.9.13 Receipt Transactions Browse pobr004.p
5.9.14 Receipt Transactions Report poporp04.p
5.9.18 Supplier Performance Report poporp07.p
5.9.20 PO Change History Browse pobr008.p
5.9.21 PO Change History Report poporp09.p
112 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

5.9.22 PO Change History by Item poporp10.p
5.10 Purchase Order Print poporp03.p
5.13 Purchasing Receipts/Returns Menu ...
5.13.1 Purchase Order Receipts poporc.p
5.13.2 Purchase Receipt Document Print porcrp.p
5.13.3 PO Receipt Cost Browse pobr005.p
5.13.4 PO Receipt Packing Slip Inquiry popoiq03.p
5.13.5 Purchase Receipt Report poporp06.p
5.13.7 Purchase Order Returns porvis.p
5.13.8 Purchase Return Document Print porvrp.p
5.13.10 Unvouchered Receipts as of Date poporp11.p
5.13.13 PO Container Maintenance rsctmt.p
5.13.14 PO Shipper Maintenance rsshmt.p
5.13.15 PO Shipper/Container Inquiry rsiq03.p
5.13.16 PO Fiscal Receiving posmrc.p
5.13.17 PO Fiscal Receipt Inquiry posmrciq.p
5.13.20 PO Shipper Receipt rsporc.p
5.13.23 PO Shipper Delete/Archive rsscdel.p
5.15 PRO/PLUS Supplier Performance ...
5.15.1 Performance Category Maintenance povecmt.p
5.15.2 Performance Category Inquiry poveciq.p
5.15.3 Supplier/Category Maintenance povescmt.p
5.15.4 Supplier/Category Inquiry povesciq.p
5.15.5 Performance Event Maintenance poveemt.p
5.15.6 Performance Event Inquiry poveeiq.p
5.15.7 Performance Weight Factor Maintenance povewmt.p
5.15.8 Performance Weight Factor Inquiry povewiq.p
5.15.10 Registration Maintenance povesimt.p
5.15.11 Registration Report povesirp.p
5.15.13 Performance Data Maintenance povepmt.p
5.15.14 Performance Data Report povedrp.p
5.15.15 Performance Report Card povedrp2.p
5.15.17 Missed Shipment Event Generator povemsrq.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 113

Menu Menu Label Program Name

5.15.19 Summary Data Extract povesmex.p
5.15.20 Summary Data Report povesmrp.p
5.15.22 System Category/Event Maintenance poveecmt.p
5.15.23 Delete/Archive Menu ...
5.15.23.1 Performance Data Delete/Archive poveup.p
5.15.23.2 Summary Data Delete/Archive povesup.p
5.15.23.3 Supplier Cross-Reference Maintenance povexmt.p
5.15.23.4 Supplier Cross-Reference Report povexrp.p
5.15.24 Supplier Performance Control povepm.p
5.18 Supplier Consignment Inventory...
5.18.1 Supplier/Item Controls Maintenance pocnvdmt.p
5.18.2 Supplier/Item Controls Browse pobr014.p
5.18.6 Consignment Inventory Report ppptrp10.p
5.18.7 Consignment Inventory By Order pocnrp01.p
5.18.8 Consignment Usage Report pocnrp02.p
5.18.9 Consignment Usage Summary Report pocnrp03.p
5.18.10 Consignment Usage Export Report pocnrp04.p
5.18.13 Aging Inventory Update pocnaimt.p
5.18.14 Aging Inventory Batch Update pocnaiup.p
5.18.15 Aging Inventory Report by Order pocnairp.p
5.18.16 Aging Inventory Report by Part pocnair1.p
5.18.24 Supplier Consignment Control pocnspm.p
5.19 Purchase Order Cost Update poprup.p
5.22 Closed PO Receipt Delete/Archive porcup.p
5.23 Closed PO Delete/Archive popoup.p
5.24 Purchasing Control popopm.p

7. Sales Orders/Invoices Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
7 Sales Orders/Invoices ...
7.1 Sales Order Menu ...
7.1.1 Sales Order Maintenance sosomt.p
114 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

7.1.2 Sales Order Browse sobr009.p
7.1.3 Sales Order Print sosorp05.p
7.1.5 Sales Order Confirmation sosoco.p
7.1.6 Sales Order Manual Allocations sosoal.p
7.1.7 Sales Order Auto Allocations sosoal01.p
7.1.8 Available Kit Quantity to Ship sosoktrp.p
7.1.11 Sales Order Repricing sorepr.p
7.1.12 Sales Order Cost Revaluation sosorv.p
7.1.13 Sales Order Credit Maintenance soasmt.p
7.1.14 Sales Order Credit Inquiry socriq.p
7.1.15 Sales Order Credit Report socrrp.p
7.1.16 Sales Order Auto Credit Hold sochup.p
7.1.17 Sales Order Auto Credit Approval socaup.p
7.1.19 ATP Enforcement Menu...
7.1.19.1 ATP Enforcement Level Utility utatp.p
7.1.19.2 ATP Enforcement Check soatpiq.p
7.1.19.3 ATP Enforcement Exception Report soatprp.p
7.1.22 EMT Mass Supplier Change sobtbcv.p
7.1.24 Sales Order Control sosopm.p
7.3 Customer Schedules Setup Menu ...
7.3.1 Customer Calendar Maintenance rcccmt.p
7.3.2 Customer Calendar Browse rcbr001.p
7.3.3 Customer Order Period Maintenance rccpcmt.p
7.3.4 Customer Order Period Browse rcbr004.p
7.3.6 Dock Maintenance addkmt.p
7.3.7 Dock Browse adbr005.p
7.3.8 Dock Report addkrp.p
7.3.10 Site Ship-from ID Maintenance rcsfidmt.p
7.3.11 Shipping Label Definition Maintenance rcslmt.p
7.3.13 Scheduled Order Maintenance rcsomt.p
7.3.14 Scheduled Order Inquiry rcsoiq.p
7.3.15 Scheduled Order Report rcsorp.p
7.3.24 Customer Schedules Control rcpm.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 115

Menu Menu Label Program Name

7.5 Schedule Processing Menu ...
7.5.1 Customer Plan Schedule Maintenance rcpsmt.p
7.5.2 Customer Ship Schedule Maintenance rcssmt.p
7.5.3 Required Ship Schedule Maintenance rcrsmt.p
7.5.4 PRO/PLUS Sequence Schedules ...
7.5.4.1 Customer Controls Maintenance adccmt.p
7.5.4.2 Customer Controls Inquiry adcciq.p
7.5.4.5 Sequence Schedule Maintenance rcsqscmt.p
7.5.4.6 Sequence Schedule Inquiry rcsqsciq.p
7.5.4.7 Sequence Schedule Report rcrp05.p
7.5.4.10 Sequence Pre-Shipper–Automatic sosqsl.p
7.5.4.11 Sequence Shipper Report rcsqrp03.p
7.5.4.13 Sequence Cross-Ref Maintenance rcsqsxmt.p
7.5.4.14 Sequence Cross-Ref Report rcsqsxrp.p
7.5.4.16 Sequence Schedule Variance Report rcsqrp01.p
7.5.4.17 Plan/Ship Sequence Variance Report rcsqrp02.p
7.5.4.22 Sequence Schedule Detail Delete rcsqscdl.p
7.5.4.24 Sequence Schedule Control rcsqpm.p
7.5.5 Required Ship Schedule Update rcrsup.p
7.5.6 Selective Required Ship Schedule Update rcrssup.p
7.5.8 Schedule Inquiry rciq01.p
7.5.9 Schedule History Inquiry rciq02.p
7.5.10 Schedule Report rcrp01.p
7.5.11 Schedule Comparative rcrp02.p
7.5.12 Schedule Authorization Report rcrp03.p
7.5.13 Req Ship Schedule Summary Report rcrp07.p
7.5.14 Req Ship Schedule Detail Report rcrp09.p
7.5.16 Cumulative Shipped Maintenance rccadj.p
7.5.18 Cum Shipped Reset rccup01.p
7.5.20 Shipment History Report rcrp08.p
7.5.21 Ship Schedule Variance Report rcrp15.p
7.5.22 Ship to Plan Variance Report rcrp16.p
7.5.23 Schedule Delete/Archive rcdel.p
116 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

7.7 Containerization Menu ...
7.7.1 Container Workbench rcctwb.p
7.7.2 Container Inquiry rciq03d.p
7.7.3 Container by Item Inquiry rcctiq.p
7.7.5 SO Container Maintenance rcctmt.p
7.7.7 Shipping Label Print rcrp10.p
7.7.23 Container Delete/Archive rcctdel.p
7.9 Shipment Processing Menu ...
7.9.1 Picklist/Pre-Shipper—Automatic sososl.p
7.9.2 Pre-Shipper/Shipper Workbench rcshwb.p
7.9.3 Pre-Shipper/Shipper Inquiry rciq03.p
7.9.4 Pre-Shipper/Shipper Print rcrp13.p
7.9.5 Pre-Shipper/Shipper Confirm rcsois.p
7.9.6 Pre-Shipper/Shipper Report rcshrp01.p
7.9.7 Pre-Shipper/Shipper Auto Confirm rcauis.p
7.9.8 Sales Order Shipper Maintenance rcshmt.p
7.9.9 Sales Order Shipper Print rcrp11.p
7.9.10 Manual SO Shipper Verification rcvrfsh.p
7.9.12 Bills of Lading Menu ...
7.9.12.1 Bill of Lading Print rcrp12.p
7.9.12.2 Master Bill of Lading Maintenance rcmbmt.p
7.9.12.3 Master Bill of Lading Inquiry rcmbiq.p
7.9.12.4 Master Bill of Lading Print rcmbrp.p
7.9.12.23 Master Bill Delete/Archive icmbdel.p
7.9.13 Sales Order Packing List sosopk.p
7.9.14 Sales Order Shipping Label Print sosorp14.p
7.9.15 Sales Order Shipments sosois.p
7.9.17 PRO/PLUS Shipment Performance...
7.9.17.1 Performance Controls Maintenance sospcmt.p
7.9.17.3 Time-Based Status Code Maintenance sosttmt.p
7.9.17.4 Time-Based Status Code Browse sobr028.p
7.9.17.6 Quantity-Based Status Code Maintenance sostqmt.p
7.9.17.7 Quantity-Based Status Code Browse sobr029.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 117

Menu Menu Label Program Name

7.9.17.9 Shipment Reason Code Entry sorsnent.p
7.9.17.10 Missing Reason Code Report soshprp6.p
7.9.17.13 Shipment Performance Data Maintenance soshpmt.p
7.9.17.15 Shipment Performance Report soshprp.p
7.9.17.17 Reason Code Analysis Report soshprp1.p
7.9.17.18 Item Analysis Report soshprp2.p
7.9.17.19 Customer Analysis Report soshprp3.p
7.9.17.22 Performance Data Extract soshpex.p
7.9.17.23 Performance Data Delete/Archive soshpup.p
7.9.17.24 Shipment Performance Control soshppm.p
7.9.18 Backlog/Missed Shipment Report soshprp5.p
7.9.19 Fill Rate Report soshprp4.p
7.9.20 Undo Shipper Number Assignment rcslrb.p
7.9.21 Shipper Unconfirm rcunis.p
7.9.22 Shipper Gateway rcshgw.p
7.9.23 Shipper Delete/Archive rcscdel.p
7.9.24 Container/Shipper Control rcpm.p
7.12 Sales Quotation Menu ...
7.12.1 Sales Quote Maintenance sqqomt.p
7.12.2 Sales Quote Browse sqbr001.p
7.12.3 Sales Quote Print sqqorp05.p
7.12.5 Sales Quote Copy from Order sqqocpy.p
7.12.6 Sales Quote Copy from Quote sqqoqo.p
7.12.8 Sales Quote Repricing sqrepr.p
7.12.10 Sales Quote Release to Order sqqoso.p
7.12.13 Sales Quote by Quote Report sqqorp.p
7.12.14 Sales Quote by Customer Report sqqorp01.p
7.12.15 Sales Quote by Item Report sqqorp02.p
7.12.16 Sales Quote Gross Margin Report sqqorp08.p
7.12.17 Sales Quote Reason Lost Report sqqorp03.p
7.12.23 Expired Quote Delete/Archive sqqoup.p
7.12.24 Sales Quote Control sqqopm.p
7.13 Invoice Menu ...
118 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

7.13.1 Pending Invoice Maintenance soivmt.p
7.13.2 Pending Invoice Register soivrp.p
7.13.3 Invoice Print sosorp10.p
7.13.4 Invoice Post soivpst.p
7.13.7 Invoice History Browse sobr007.p
7.13.8 Invoice History Report soivrp09.p
7.13.9 Invoice Bill of Material Inquiry soivbiq.p
7.13.10 Sales Order Tracking Inquiry soiviq01.p
7.13.12 Closed Invoice Reprint soivrp10.p
7.13.13 Retrobilling Menu ...
7.13.13.1 Retrobill Maintenance rcrbmt.p
7.13.13.2 Retrobill Inquiry rcrbiq.p
7.13.13.3 Retrobill Report rcrbrp01.p
7.13.13.4 Retrobill History Report rcrbrp02.p
7.13.23 Invoice History Delete/Archive soivup.p
7.15 Sales Order Reports Menu ...
7.15.1 Sales Orders by Order Report sosorp.p
7.15.2 Sales Orders by Customer Report sosorp01.p
7.15.3 Sales Orders by Item Report sosorp02.p
7.15.5 Sales Order Gross Margin Report sosorp08.p
7.15.7 Sales Order Pricing Report sopirp01.p
7.15.9 Unconfirmed Sales Order Report sosorp16.p
7.15.11 EMT Tracking Report sobtbrp.p
7.15.13 Booking Transaction Browse sobr011.p
7.15.14 Booking Transaction Report sosorp03.p
7.15.15 Booking Transaction Summary by Item sosorp15.p
7.15.17 Shipment Transaction Browse sobr012.p
7.15.18 Shipment Transaction Report sosorp04.p
7.15.19 Shipment Transaction by Customer Report sosorp09.p
7.15.21 Transaction Summary by Item Report sosorp11.p
7.15.22 Transaction Summary by Customer Report sosorp12.p
7.15.23 Transaction Summary by Customer by Item sosorp13.p
7.17 Sales Analysis Menu ...
 Menu and Program Name Listing 119

Menu Menu Label Program Name

7.17.1 Salesperson Quota Maintenance sasphmt.p
7.17.2 Salesperson Quota Inquiry sasphiq.p
7.17.3 Salesperson Margin Inquiry sasphiq1.p
7.17.5 Sales by Salesperson Browse sabr003.p
7.17.6 Salesperson Ranking Report sasarp04.p
7.17.10 Sales by Site Report sasarp06.p
7.17.13 Sales by Customer Browse sabr001.p
7.17.14 Sales by Customer Report sasarp03.p
7.17.15 Customer Ranking Report sasarp01.p
7.17.17 Sales by Item Browse sabr002.p
7.17.18 Sales by Item Report sasarp05.p
7.17.19 Item Ranking Report sasarp02.p
7.17.22 Fiscal Year Change safyrcg.p
7.17.23 Sales Analysis Delete/Archive sasaup.p
7.18 Customer Consignment Inventory Menu...
7.18.1 Ship-To/Item Controls Maintenance socnstmt.p
7.18.2 Ship-To/Item Controls Report socnstrp.p
7.18.4 Consignment Reports Menu ...
7.18.4.1 Consignment Inventory Report ppptrp10.p
7.18.4.2 Consignment Inventory by Location iclorp02.p
7.18.4.3 Consignment Inventory by Order socnrp01.p
7.18.4.4 Consignment by Order with Sequence socnrp06.p
7.18.4.7 Aging Inventory Report by Order socnairp.p
7.18.4.8 Aging Inventory Report by Part socnair1.p
7.18.4.9 Aging Inventory by Order with Sequence socnrp07.p
7.18.4.13 Inventory Usage Report socnrp04.p
7.18.4.14 Authorization Usage Report socnrp09.p
7.18.4.15 Sequenced Usage Report socnrp08.p
7.18.4.16 Usage Report by Order socnrp02.p
7.18.4.17 Usage Report by Order with Sequence socnrp10.p
7.18.7 Consignment Inventory Transfer socnxfer.p
7.18.10 Aging Inventory Update socnaimt.p
7.18.11 Aging Inventory Batch Update socnaiup.p
120 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

7.18.13 Inventory Usage Create socnuac.p
7.18.14 Authorization Usage Create socnuac3.p
7.18.15 Sequenced Usage Create socnuac5.p
7.18.16 Usage Inquiry socnuiq.p
7.18.17 Authorization Usage Inquiry socnuaiq2.p
7.18.18 Sequenced Usage Inquiry socnusiq.p
7.18.19 Shipper Usage Create socnuac7.p
7.18.21 Consignment Inventory Adjustment socnadj.p
7.18.22 Usage Create Undo socnundo.p
7.18.24 Customer Consignment Control socncpm.p
7.20 Trade Management Menu ...
7.21 Credit Card Menu ...
7.21.1 External Address X-Ref Browse adbr024.p
7.21.2 Credit Card Transaction Browse sobr018.p
7.21.3 Credit Card Sales Order Browse sobr019.p
7.21.24 Credit Card Control ncpm.p
7.22 PRO/PLUS Container and Line Charge Menu...
7.22.1 Charge Type Maintenance cctmt.p
7.22.2 Charge Type Inquiry cctiq.p
7.22.5 Ship-To/Container Charge Maintenance ccscmt.p
7.22.6 Ship-To/Container Charge Inquiry ccsciq.p
7.22.7 Ship-To/Container Charge Report ccscpr.p
7.22.10 Container Item Maintenance ccpmt.p
7.22.11 Container Inquiry ccpiq.p
7.22.12 Container Data Report ccprp.p
7.22.13 Order Line Charge Maintenance rcslcmt.p
7.22.15 Ship-To Control Maintenance cclspm.p
7.22.16 Ship-To Control Inquiry cclsiq.p
7.22.17 Ship-To Control Report cclspr.p
7.22.19 Container Usage Report ccurp.p
7.22.24 Container/Line Charge Control cclpm.p
7.23 Service/Repair Order Menu ...
7.23.1 S/RO Maintenance srsromt.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 121

Menu Menu Label Program Name

7.23.2 S/RO Print srsrorp.p
7.23.13 S/RO by Status Browse srbr001.p
7.23.14 S/RO by Failure Browse srbr002.p
7.23.15 S/RO by Assigned to Browse srbr003.p
7.23.16 S/RO by Date Browse srbr004.p
7.23.17 S/RO by Item Browse srbr005.p
7.23.18 S/RO by Type Browse srbr006.p
7.23.19 S/RO by Disposition Browse srbr007.p
7.23.20 S/RO by Customer Browse srbr008.p
7.23.23 S/RO Delete/Archive srsroup.p
7.23.24 S/RO Control srsropm.p

8. Configured Products Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
8.1 Configured Structure Maintenance fopsmt01.p
8.2 Configured Structure Inquiry fopsiq02.p
8.3 Configured Structure Report fopsrp.p
8.5 Sales Order Bill Browse fobr001.p
8.6 Sales Order Bill Report fosobrp.p
8.8 Sales Quote Bill Browse fobr002.p
8.9 Sales Quote Bill Report fosqbrp.p
8.13 Sales Order Release to Work Order fosorel.p
8.24 Configured Products Control fopm.p

10. Project Realization Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
10.1 Project Definition Menu ...
10.1.1 Project Maintenance pjpjmt.p
10.1.2 Project Inquiry pjpjiq.p
10.1.3 Project Detail Inquiry pjpjiq01.p
10.1.4 Project Print pjpjrp14.p
122 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

10.3 Project Budget Menu ...
10.3.1 Project Budget Rollup pjbgrol.p
10.3.3 Project Budget Maintenance pjbgmt.p
10.3.13 Project Budget Report pjbgrp.p
10.5 Project Activity Order Menu ...
10.5.1 PAO Maintenance pjclmt.p
10.5.2 PAO Inquiry pjcliq02.p
10.5.4 PAO Planned Detail Inquiry pjcliq03.p
10.5.5 PAO Print pjclrp01.p
10.5.13 Project Activity Recording pjcarmt.p
10.5.14 Project Labor Recording pjlbrmt.p
10.5.16 PAO Close pjclcls.p
10.5.21 PAO Setup Menu ...
10.5.21.1 PAO Status Code Maintenance pjcasmt.p
10.5.21.2 PAO Status Code Browse pjbr015.p
10.5.21.4 PAO Default Maintenance pjcdfmt.p
10.5.21.5 PAO Default Browse pjbr029.p
10.5.24 PAO Control pjclpm.p
10.7 Material Order Menu ...
10.7.1 Material Order Maintenance fseomt.p
10.7.2 Material Order Confirmation fseoco.p
10.7.4 MO Manual Allocations fseoal.p
10.7.5 MO Automatic Allocations fseoal1.p
10.7.6 Material Order Shipments fseops.p
10.7.8 MO Direct/Pending Returns fseore.p
10.7.9 MO Pending Return Report fspenrp.p
10.7.11 Open Material Order Report fseorp1.p
10.7.12 Material Order Backlog Report fseodl.p
10.7.13 Material Order Shipment Report fseorp2.p
10.7.24 Material Order Control fseopm.p
10.9 Project Invoice Schedule Menu ...
10.9.1 Invoice Schedule Maintenance pjismt.p
10.9.2 Invoice Schedule Inquiry pjisiq.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 123

Menu Menu Label Program Name

10.9.4 Project Invoice Layout pjilmt.p
10.9.13 Invoice Generation pjivgen.p
10.9.24 Invoice Schedule Control pjivpm.p
10.11 Project Reports Menu ...
10.11.1 Project Report pjpjrp01.p
10.11.7 Project Transactions Inquiry pjshiq.p
10.11.8 Project Transactions Report pjshrp.p
10.11.14 Project-PAO WIP Report pjpjrp10.p
10.11.15 PAO WIP Status Report pjpjrp11.p
10.11.16 Project WIP Report pjpjrp20.p
10.11.19 Project Invoice Detail Report pjpjrp12.p
10.13 End User Address Menu ...
10.13.1 End User Address Maintenance adeumt.p
10.13.2 End User Address Browse adbr007.p
10.13.3 End User Address Report adeurp.p
10.13.24 End User Control fseucpm.p
10.15 Engineer Menu ...
10.15.1 Engineer Maintenance fsegmt.p
10.15.4 Engineer Status Maintenance fsessmt.p
10.15.5 Engineer Skills Maintenance fsegsmt.p
10.17 Area Menu ...
10.17.1 Area Maintenance fsregmt.p
10.17.2 Area Browse gpbr346.p
10.17.5 Area Structure Maintenance fssvar.p
10.17.6 Area Structure Inquiry fssvariq.p
10.19 Project Pricing Menu ...
10.19.1 Project Pricing Maintenance pjfpcmt.p
10.19.2 Project Pricing Inquiry pjfpciq.p
10.19.3 Project Pricing Report pjfpcrp.p
10.21 Project Realization Setup Menu ...
10.21.1 Work Code Maintenance fsfwkmt.p
10.21.2 Work Code Inquiry fsfwkiq.p
10.21.3 Work Code Report fsfwkrp.p
124 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

10.21.5 Invoice Sort Maintenance fsfismt.p
10.21.6 Invoice Sort Inquiry fsfisiq.p
10.21.7 Invoice Sort Report fsfisrp.p
10.21.9 Service Category Maintenance fsfscmt.p
10.21.10 Service Category Inquiry fsfsciq.p
10.21.11 Service Category Report fsfscrp.p
10.21.13 Default PRM Site Maintenance pjrdfmt.p
10.21.14 Default PRM Site Browse pjbr030.p
10.21.15 Default PRM Site Report pjrdfrp.p
10.21.17 Return Status Maintenance fsfpstmt.p
10.21.18 Return Status Inquiry fsfpstiq.p
10.21.19 Return Status Report fsfpstrp.p
10.21.21 Project Type Maintenance pjsvmt.p
10.21.22 Project Type Browse pjbr031.p
10.21.23 Project Type Report pjsvrp.p
10.23 Project Close Menu ...
10.23.1 Project Line Close Report pjclrp.p
10.23.2 Project Activity Close pjpjcl.p
10.23.3 Project Accounting Close pjclswip.p
10.23.23 Closed Project Delete/Archive pjpjup.p
10.24 Project Realization Control pjpjpm.p

11. Service/Support Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
11.1 Call Management Menu ...
11.1.1 Call Activities Menu ...
11.1.1.1 Call Maintenance fscamt.p
11.1.1.2 Call Inquiry fscaiq02.p
11.1.1.3 Call Detail Inquiry fscaiq.p
11.1.1.4 Call Print fscarp.p
11.1.1.5 Call Print with History fscarp02.p
11.1.1.7 Call Quote Maintenance fscqmt.p
11.1.1.8 Call Quote Inquiry fscqiq.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 125

Menu Menu Label Program Name

11.1.1.9 Call Quote Detail Inquiry fscqtiq.p
11.1.1.10 Call Quote Print fscqrp.p
11.1.1.11 Call Quote Release to Recording fscqca.p
11.1.1.12 Copy Call Quote fscqcp.p
11.1.1.13 Call Activity Recording fscarmt.p
11.1.1.14 Call Activity Inquiry fscariq.p
11.1.1.15 Call Invoice Recording fscaimt.p
11.1.1.21 Closed Call Move to History fscacls.p
11.1.1.22 Expired Quote Move to History fscqup.p
11.1.1.23 Call/Quote History Delete/Archive fscaarc.p
11.1.6 Call Queue Manager fsquemg.p
11.1.8 Call Generator fscagen.p
11.1.12 QAD Mobile User Maintenance fsmfsdmt.p
11.1.13 Call Escalation Menu ...
11.1.13.1 Escalation Maintenance fsesmt.p
11.1.13.2 Escalation Inquiry fsesiq.p
11.1.13.13 Escalation Monitor fsesmgr.p
11.1.13.24 Escalation Control fsescpm.p
11.1.15 Service Request Menu ...
11.1.15.1 Service Request Maintenance fssrmt.p
11.1.15.2 Service Request Browse fsbr018.p
11.1.15.3 Service Request Report fssrrp.p
11.1.15.7 SR Status Code Maintenance fssrsmt.p
11.1.15.8 SR Status Code Browse fsbr019.p
11.1.15.10 SR Queue Maintenance fssrqmt.p
11.1.15.11 SR Queue Browse gpbr341.p
11.1.15.13 Service Request Queue Manager fssrmg.p
11.1.15.23 Service Request Delete/Archive fssrarc.p
11.1.15.24 Service Request Control fssrpm.p
11.1.19 Call Reports Menu ...
11.1.19.1 Total Calls by Assigned Inquiry fscarp10.p
11.1.19.2 Total Calls by Queue Inquiry fscarp11.p
11.1.19.5 Warranty Cost Report fswarrp.p
126 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

11.1.21 Call Setup Menu ...
11.1.21.1 Call Status Code Maintenance fscasmt.p
11.1.21.2 Call Status Code Inquiry fscasiq.p
11.1.21.4 Call Types Maintenance fsfctmt.p
11.1.21.5 Call Types Browse fsbr028.p
11.1.21.7 Call Queue Maintenance fscaqmt.p
11.1.21.8 Call Queue Browse fsbr026.p
11.1.21.10 Call Default Maintenance fscdfmt.p
11.1.24 Call Management Control fscapm.p
11.3 Installed Base Menu ...
11.3.1 Installed Base Item Maintenance fsisbmt.p
11.3.2 Installed Base Inquiry fsbmisiq.p
11.3.3 Installed Base Report fsisrp02.p
11.3.5 Installed Configuration Maintenance fsbmismt.p
11.3.7 Service Item Maintenance fsptmt.p
11.3.9 Service Item by Site Maintenance fspfdmt.p
11.3.12 Field Notification Menu ...
11.3.12.1 Field Notification Maintenance fsfnmt.p
11.3.12.2 Field Notification Inquiry fsfniq.p
11.3.12.3 Field Notification Report fsfnrp.p
11.3.12.23 Field Notification Del/Archive fsfnarc.p
11.3.13 Installed Item Move fsisbmv.p
11.3.15 Warranty Type Maintenance fssvwmt.p
11.3.16 Warranty Type Inquiry fssvwiq.p
11.3.17 Warranty Type Report fssvwrp.p
11.3.21 Installed Base Marketing Letters fsletrp.p
11.3.22 Installed Base History ...
11.3.22.2 ISB History Browse fsbr056.p
11.3.22.3 ISB History Report fsftchrp.p
11.3.22.23 ISB History Delete/Archive fsftchup.p
11.3.23 Installed Config Table Rebuild fseuisb.p
11.5 Contract Management Menu ...
11.5.1 Contract Quote Menu ...
 Menu and Program Name Listing 127

Menu Menu Label Program Name

11.5.1.1 Contract Quote Maintenance fsqomt.p
11.5.1.2 Contract Quote Inquiry fsqoiq.p
11.5.1.3 Contract Quote Print fsqorp.p
11.5.1.5 Contract Quote Release to Contr fsqosa01.p
11.5.1.6 Contract Quote Copy from Quote fsqosa02.p
11.5.1.7 Contract Quote Copy from Contr fsqosa04.p
11.5.7 Contract Additional Charges fsscamt.p
11.5.8 Additional Charges Inquiry fsscaiq.p
11.5.10 Contract Type Maintenance fssvsmt.p
11.5.11 Contract Type Inquiry fssvsiq.p
11.5.12 Contract Type Report fssvsrp.p
11.5.13 Contracts Menu ...
11.5.13.1 Contract Maintenance fssamt.p
11.5.13.2 Contract Inquiry fssaiq.p
11.5.13.3 Contract Billing History Inquiry fssaiq04.p
11.5.13.4 Contract Print fssarp.p
11.5.13.6 Contract Copy to Contract fsqosa03.p
11.5.13.8 Renew Single Contract fsqosa05.p
11.5.13.10 Renewal Process/Report fssaexp.p
11.5.13.21 Contract Reports Menu ...
11.5.13.21.1 Contract Cash Flow Report fssarp06.p
11.5.13.21.2 Contract Deferred Income Report fssarp07.p
11.5.13.21.4 Limits Consumption Inquiry fssaliq.p
11.5.13.21.5 Limits Consumption Report fssalrp.p
11.5.13.23 Contract Delete/Archive fssaarc.p
11.5.18 Contract Billing Menu ...
11.5.18.1 Billing Cycle Code Maintenance fssbcmt.p
11.5.18.13 Billing Release to Invoice fssais.p
11.5.18.14 Billing Detail Report fssarp08.p
11.5.18.15 Contract Invoice Reprint fssairp.p
11.5.18.18 Billing Reversal Maintenance fssaisr.p
11.5.18.19 Billing Date Correction fssaub.p
11.5.18.21 Revenue Recognition fssdefre.p
128 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

11.5.18.22 Deferred/Accrued Revenue Report fssdefrp.p
11.5.18.23 Revenue Delete/Archive fsdefarc.p
11.5.24 Contract Control fssapm.p
11.7 RMA/RTS Menu ...
11.7.1 Return Material Menu (RMA) ...
11.7.1.1 RMA Maintenance fsrmamt.p
11.7.1.2 RMA Browse fsbr014.p
11.7.1.3 RMA Print fsrmrp08.p
11.7.1.5 RMA Release to Work Order fsrmarel.p
11.7.1.6 RMA Confirmation fsrmaco.p
11.7.1.13 RMA Receipts fsrmais.p
11.7.1.15 RMA Shipping Report fsrmrp06.p
11.7.1.16 RMA Shipments fsrmash.p
11.7.1.17 RMA Shipment History fsrmaq04.p
11.7.1.18 RMA by RMA Number Report fsrmrp01.p
11.7.1.19 RMA by Customer Report fsrmrp02.p
11.7.1.20 RMA by Item Report fsrmrp03.p
11.7.1.21 RMA by Completion Due Report fsrmrp05.p
11.7.3 Return to Supplier Menu (RTS) ...
11.7.3.1 RTS Maintenance fsrtvmt.p
11.7.3.13 RTS Receipts fsrtvrc.p
11.7.3.16 RTS Shipments fsrtvis.p
11.7.3.18 RTS by RTS Number Report fsrtrp01.p
11.7.3.19 RTS by Supplier Report fsrtrp02.p
11.7.3.20 RTS by Item Report fsrtrp03.p
11.7.3.21 RTS by Completion Due Report fsrtrp05.p
11.7.24 RMA/RTS Control fsrmcpm.p
11.9 End User Address Menu ...
11.9.1 End User Address Maintenance adeumt.p
11.9.2 End User Address Browse adbr007.p
11.9.3 End User Address Report adeurp.p
11.9.24 End User Control fseucpm.p
11.11 Material Order Menu (MO) ...
 Menu and Program Name Listing 129

Menu Menu Label Program Name

11.11.1 Material Order Maintenance fseomt.p
11.11.2 Material Order Confirmation fseoco.p
11.11.4 MO Manual Allocations fseoal.p
11.11.5 MO Automatic Allocations fseoal1.p
11.11.6 Material Order Shipments fseops.p
11.11.8 MO Direct/Pending Returns fseore.p
11.11.9 MO Pending Return Report fspenrp.p
11.11.11 Open Material Order Report fseorp1.p
11.11.12 Material Order Backlog Report fseodl.p
11.11.13 Material Order Shipment Report fseorp2.p
11.11.24 Material Order Control fseopm.p
11.13 Engineer Menu ...
11.13.1 Engineer Maintenance fsegmt.p
11.13.4 Engineer Status Maintenance fsessmt.p
11.13.5 Engineer Skills Maintenance fsegsmt.p
11.13.9 On-Call Maintenance fsocmmt.p
11.13.10 On-Call Inquiry fsocmiq.p
11.13.15 Engineer Schedule Menu ...
11.13.15.1 Engineer Master Schedule Maintenance fseshmt.p
11.13.15.2 Engineer Master Schedule Inquiry fseshiq.p
11.13.15.4 Engineer Detail Schedule Maintenance fsegdmt.p
11.13.15.5 Engineer Detail Schedule Inquiry fsegdiq.p
11.13.15.8 Engineer Assignment Maintenance fsegtmt.p
11.13.15.9 Engineer Diary fsegrp02.p
11.13.15.10 Engineer Calendar fsegrp01.p
11.13.15.11 Engineer Availability Inquiry fsegwiq.p
11.13.15.17 Engineer Holiday Maintenance fsfshemt.p
11.13.15.18 Engineer Holiday Inquiry fsfsheiq.p
11.13.15.24 Engineer Schedule Control fsegcpm.p
11.13.17 Engineer Paging Menu ...
11.13.17.1 Paging Initiation fspghmt.p
11.13.17.2 Paging Status Update fspghup.p
11.13.17.3 Paging Browse fsbr012.p
130 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

11.13.17.24 Paging Control fspgcpm.p
11.15 Area Menu ...
11.15.1 Area Maintenance fsregmt.p
11.15.2 Area Browse gpbr346.p
11.15.5 Area Structure Maintenance fssvar.p
11.15.6 Area Structure Inquiry fssvariq.p
11.15.9 Area Holiday Maintenance fsfshamt.p
11.15.10 Area Holiday Inquiry fsfshaiq.p
11.17 Pricing Menu ...
11.17.1 Service Pricing Maintenance fsfpcmt.p
11.17.2 Service Pricing Inquiry fsfpciq.p
11.17.3 Service Pricing Report fsfpcrp.p
11.17.4 Service Price List Copy fsfpccp.p
11.19 Service Structures/Routings Menu ...
11.19.1 Service BOM Code Maintenance fsbommt.p
11.19.2 Service BOM Code Inquiry fsbomiq.p
11.19.3 Service BOM Code Report fsbomrp.p
11.19.5 Service Structure Maintenance fspsmt.p
11.19.6 Service Structure Inquiry fspsiq.p
11.19.7 Service Structure Report fspsrp.p
11.19.9 Service Structure Copy fspscp.p
11.19.13 Service Work Center Maintenance fswcmt.p
11.19.14 Service Work Center Inquiry fswciq.p
11.19.15 Service Work Center Report fswcrp.p
11.19.17 Service Routing Maintenance fsromt.p
11.19.18 Service Routing Inquiry fsroiq.p
11.19.19 Service Routing Report fsrorp.p
11.19.20 Service Routing Copy fsrocp.p
11.19.21 Service Std Operation Maintenance fsopmmt.p
11.19.22 Standard Operation Browse rwbr002.p
11.19.23 Service Std Operation Report fsopmrp.p
11.21 Service/Support Setup Menu ...
11.21.1 Work Code Maintenance fsfwkmt.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 131

Menu Menu Label Program Name

11.21.2 Work Code Inquiry fsfwkiq.p
11.21.3 Work Code Report fsfwkrp.p
11.21.5 Invoice Sort Maintenance fsfismt.p
11.21.6 Invoice Sort Inquiry fsfisiq.p
11.21.7 Invoice Sort Report fsfisrp.p
11.21.9 Service Category Maintenance fsfscmt.p
11.21.10 Service Category Inquiry fsfsciq.p
11.21.11 Service Category Report fsfscrp.p
11.21.13 Default Site Maintenance fsrdfmt.p
11.21.17 Return Status Maintenance fsfpstmt.p
11.21.18 Return Status Inquiry fsfpstiq.p
11.21.19 Return Status Report fsfpstrp.p
11.21.21 Charges/Revenues Setup Menu ...
11.21.21.1 Charge Code Maintenance fsfcgmt.p
11.21.21.2 Charge Code Inquiry fsfcgiq.p
11.21.21.3 Charge Code Report fsfcgrp.p
11.21.21.5 Charge Product Line Maintenance fsfcccmt.p
11.21.21.6 Charge Product Line Inquiry fsfccciq.p
11.21.21.7 Charge Product Line Report fsfcccrp.p
11.21.21.9 Revenue Product Line Maintenance fsfccrmt.p
11.21.21.10 Revenue Product Line Browse fsbr033.p
11.21.21.11 Revenue Product Line Report fsfccrrp.p
11.21.21.13 Default Charge Code Maintenance fsfdcmt.p
11.21.21.14 Default Charge Code Browse fsbr038.p
11.21.22 Multiple Time Zones Setup Menu ...
11.21.22.1 Multiple Time Zones Maintenance fstzomt.p
11.21.22.2 Multiple Time Zones Inquiry fstzoiq.p
11.21.22.3 Multiple Time Zones Report fstzorp.p
11.21.22.20 End User Time Zone Change Util uteutz.p
11.21.22.22 Server Time Zone Change Util utsrvrtz.p
11.21.22.24 Multiple Time Zones Startup Utility utmtzon.p
11.21.23 Service/Support User Preferences fsfsumt.p
11.24 Service Management Control fsmg.p
132 User Guide — Introduction

12. Distribution Plan Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
12.1 Source Network Menu ...
12.1.1 Network Code Maintenance dnssmt.p
12.1.2 Network Code Browse dnbr002.p
12.1.3 Network Code Report dnssrp.p
12.1.13 Source Network Maintenance dnssmt01.p
12.1.14 Source Network Inquiry dnssiq01.p
12.1.15 Source Network Report dnssrp01.p
12.5 Transportation Management Menu ...
12.5.1 Transportation Mode Maintenance dntmmt.p
12.5.2 Transportation Mode Browse dnbr004.p
12.5.3 Transportation Mode Report dntmrp.p
12.5.5 Transportation Network Maintenance dnssmt02.p
12.5.6 Transportation Network Browse dnbr003.p
12.5.7 Transportation Network Report dnssrp02.p
12.5.9 Shipping Schedule Maintenance dnssmt03.p
12.5.10 Shipping Schedule Inquiry dnssiq03.p
12.5.11 Shipping Schedule Report dnssrp03.p
12.5.13 Freight Rate Table Maintenance dnftmt.p
12.5.14 Freight Rate Table Browse dnbr001.p
12.5.15 Freight Rate Table Report dnftrp.p
12.5.17 Shipping Load Summary Inquiry dntmiq01.p
12.5.18 Shipping Load Summary Report dntmrp01.p
12.5.20 Shipping Load Detail Inquiry dntmiq02.p
12.5.21 Shipping Load Detail Report dntmrp02.p
12.13 Distribution Requirements Planning Menu ...
12.13.1 Net Change Distribution Plan drmpnc.p
12.13.2 Regenerative Distribution Plan drmpup.p
12.13.3 Selective Distribution Plan drmprc.p
12.13.5 DRP Action Message Review/Update droamt.p
12.13.6 DRP Action Message Browse drbr002.p
12.13.7 DRP Action Message Report drmprp02.p
12.13.10 Planned Intersite Request Approval drdoap.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 133

Menu Menu Label Program Name

12.13.11 Planned Intersite Request Browse drbr001.p
12.13.12 Planned Intersite Request Report drdorp11.p
12.13.13 DRP Summary Inquiry drmpiq.p
12.13.14 DRP Summary Report drmprp.p
12.13.16 DRP Detail Inquiry drmpiq01.p
12.13.17 DRP Detail Report drmprp01.p
12.13.22 Low Level Code Update mrllup01.p
12.13.24 DRP Control drppm.p
12.15 Intersite Requests Menu ...
12.15.1 Intersite Request Maintenance dsdmmt.p
12.15.2 Intersite Request Browse dsbr001.p
12.15.3 Intersite Request Report dsdmrp.p
12.15.5 Distributed Inventory Inquiry dsloiq01.p
12.15.6 Distributed Inventory Report dslorp01.p
12.15.9 Intersite Demand Transfer dsdmup01.p
12.15.10 Intersite Demand Export dsdmexp.p
12.15.13 Orders in Transit Browse dsbr003.p
12.15.14 Orders in Transit Report dsdmrp03.p
12.15.17 Inventory in Transit Inquiry dsloiq02.p
12.15.18 Inventory in Transit Report dslorp02.p
12.15.20 Distributed Order Receipt dsdorc.p
12.15.23 Intersite Request Delete/Archive dsdmup.p
12.15.24 Distribution Management Control dmdrppm.p
12.17 Distribution Orders Menu ...
12.17.1 Intersite Demand Confirmation dsdmmt01.p
12.17.2 Intersite Demand Browse dsbr002.p
12.17.3 Intersite Demand Summary Inquiry dsdmiq02.p
12.17.4 Intersite Demand Report dsdmrp01.p
12.17.10 Intersite Demand Import dsdmimp.p
12.17.12 Intersite Demand Validation dsdmup02.p
12.17.13 Distribution Order Workbench dsdomt01.p
12.17.14 Distribution Order Maintenance dsdomt.p
12.17.15 Distribution Order Browse dsbr004.p
134 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

12.17.16 Distribution Order Report dsdorp.p
12.17.17 DO Shipment Reconciliation dsdorp02.p
12.17.18 Distribution Order Print dsdorp01.p
12.17.19 Distribution Order Picklist Print dsdopk01.p
12.17.20 Distribution Order Unpick dsunpk.p
12.17.21 Distribution Order Processing dsdomt02.p
12.17.22 Distribution Order Shipments dsdois.p
12.17.23 Closed Intersite Demand Delete/Archive dsdoup.p

13. Product Structures Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
13.1 Product Structure Code Maintenance bmmamt.p
13.2 Product Structure Code Browse bmbr002.p
13.3 Product Structure Code Report bmmarp.p
13.5 Product Structure Maintenance bmpsmt.p
13.6 Product Structure Inquiry bmpsiq.p
13.7 Where-Used Inquiry bmwuiq.p
13.8 Product Structure Reports Menu ...
13.8.1 Product Structure by Item Report bmpsrp.p
13.8.2 Product Structure by Number Report bmpsrp02.p
13.8.7 Item-Site Structure Inquiry pppsiq10.p
13.8.8 Item-Site Structure Report pppsrp10.p
13.8.13 Where-Used Inquiry bmwuiq.p
13.8.14 Where-Used Report bmwurp.p
13.8.16 Simulated Picklist Inquiry bmpkiq.p
13.8.17 Simulated Picklist Item Check bmpkcc.p
13.8.18 Simulated Picklist Report bmpkrp.p
13.8.20 Materials Summary Report bmpsrp06.p
13.9 Product Structure Copy bmpscp.p
13.10 Component Change bmpsmc.p
13.12 Cost and Lead Time Roll-Up Menu ...
13.12.1 Cost Roll-Up Freeze/Unfreeze bmfrzmt.p
13.12.2 Cost Roll-Up Freeze Report bmfrzrp.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 135

Menu Menu Label Program Name

13.12.4 Product Structure Cost Report bmpsrp01.p
13.12.5 Product Structure Cost Summary bmpsrp05.p
13.12.7 Co/By-Products Cost Report bmcsrp02.p
13.12.13 Product Structure Cost Roll-Up bmcsru01.p
13.12.14 Cumulative Lead Time Roll-Up bmpsru01.p
13.12.16 Cumulative Lead Time Report bmpsrp07.p
13.12.17 Lead Time Picture Report bmpsrp04.p
13.13 Engineering Change (ECO) Menu ...
13.13.1 ECO Maintenance bmecmt.p
13.13.2 ECO Browse bmbr001.p
13.13.3 ECO by ECO Number Report bmecrp.p
13.13.4 ECO by Item Report bmecrp01.p
13.13.22 Enable PCC Structure Maintenance bmpcnabl.p
13.15 Alternate Structure Maintenance bmasmt.p
13.16 Alternate Structure Inquiry bmasiq.p
13.17 Alternate Structure Report bmasrp.p
13.19 Item Substitution Maintenance ptsumt.p
13.20 Item Substitution Browse ptbr002.p
13.21 Item Substitution Report ptsurp.p
13.22 Co-Products/By-Products Menu ...
13.22.1 Co/By-Product Maintenance bmcbmt.p
13.22.2 Co/By-Product Inquiry bmcbiq.p
13.22.5 Average Cost Method Maintenance csacmmt.p
13.22.6 Average Cost Method Inquiry csacmiq.p
13.23 Product Structure Delete/Archive bmpsdel.p

14. Routings/Work Centers Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
14.1 Department Maintenance rwdpmt.p
14.2 Department Browse rwbr006.p
14.3 Department Report rwdprp.p
14.5 Work Center Maintenance rwwcmt.p
14.6 Work Center Browse rwbr004.p
136 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

14.7 Work Center Report rwwcrp.p
14.9 Standard Operation Maintenance rwopmmt.p
14.10 Standard Operation Browse rwbr002.p
14.11 Standard Operation Report rwopmrp.p
14.12 Master Comment Maintenance gpcmmt.p
14.13 Routing Menu ...
14.13.1 Routing Maintenance rwromt.p
14.13.2 Routing Maintenance (Rate Based) rwromt01.p
14.13.3 Routing Inquiry rwroiq.p
14.13.4 Routing Report rwrorp.p
14.13.6 Routing Copy rwrocp.p
14.13.7 Routing Update rwroup.p
14.13.13 Routing Cost Roll-Up rwroru.p
14.13.14 Routing Cost Report rwrorp01.p
14.13.15 Item Routing Cost Report rwrorp02.p
14.13.17 Operation Cost Calculation rwroru01.p
14.13.18 Operation Cost Browse rwbr003.p
14.13.19 Operation Cost Report rwrorp04.p
14.13.21 Actual Pay Rate Maintenance rwemmt.p
14.13.22 Actual Earning Code Maintenance rweamt.p
14.13.23 Routing Delete/Archive rwrodel.p
14.15 Alternate Routing Menu ...
14.15.1 Alternate Routing Maintenance rwarmt.p
14.15.2 Alternate Routing Browse rwbr001.p
14.15.3 Alternate Routing Report rwarrp.p
14.17 Work Center/Routing Standards Menu ...
14.17.1 Work Center/Routing Standards Maintenance rwwrmt.p
14.17.2 Work Center/Routing Standards Browse rwbr005.p
14.17.3 Work Center/Routing Standards Report rwwrrp.p
14.22 Enable PCC Routing Maintenance ropcnabl.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 137

15. Formula/Process Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
15.1 Formula Code Maintenance fmmamt.p
15.2 Formula Code Browse fmbr001.p
15.3 Formula Code Report fmmarp.p
15.5 Formula Maintenance fmpsmt.p
15.6 Formula Inquiry fmpsiq.p
15.7 Formula Reports Menu ...
15.7.1 Formula by Component Report fmpsrp.p
15.7.2 Formula by Item Number Report fmpsrp02.p
15.7.4 Formula Cost Report fmpsrp01.p
15.7.7 Item-Site Formula Inquiry fmpsiq10.p
15.7.8 Item-Site Formula Report fmpsrp10.p
15.7.13 Where-Used Inquiry fmwuiq.p
15.7.14 Where-Used Report fmwurp.p
15.7.16 Simulated Batch Inquiry fmpkiq.p
15.7.17 Simulated Batch Ingredient Check fmpkcc.p
15.7.18 Simulated Batch Ingredient Report fmpkrp.p
15.8 Formula Copy fmpscp.p
15.9 Batch Quantity Change fmptbmt.p
15.12 Co-Products/By-Products Menu ...
15.12.1 Co/By-Product Maintenance bmjpmt.p
15.12.2 Co/By-Product Inquiry bmjpiq.p
15.12.5 Average Cost Method Maintenance csacmmt.p
15.12.6 Average Cost Method Inquiry csacmiq.p
15.13 Process Definition Maintenance fmromt.p
15.14 Process Definition Inquiry fmroiq.p
15.15 Process Definition Report fmrorp.p
15.16 Process Definition Copy fmrocp.p
15.18 Process/Formula Maintenance fmopmt.p
15.19 Process/Formula Inquiry fmopiq.p
15.22 Enable PCC Formula Maintenance fmpcnabl.p
138 User Guide — Introduction

16. Work Orders Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
16.1 Work Order Maintenance wowomt.p
16.2 Work Order Browse wobr003.p
16.3 Work Order Reports Menu ...
16.3.1 Work Order by Order Report woworp.p
16.3.2 Work Order by Item Report woworp01.p
16.3.3 Work Order Status Report woworp02.p
16.3.4 Work Order Cost Report woworp05.p
16.3.5 Work Order WIP Cost Report woworp09.p
16.3.6 Work Order History Report woworp03.p
16.3.13 Co/By-Product Work Order Inquiry wojpiq.p
16.5 Work Order Component Check wowocc.p
16.6 Work Order Release/Print woworl.p
16.7 Multiple WO Release/Print woworl01.p
16.8 Multiple WO Status Change wowomt01.p
16.9 Work Order Split wowosp.p
16.10 Work Order Component Issue wowois.p
16.11 Work Order Receipt woworc.p
16.12 Work Order Receipt Backflush wowoisrc.p
16.13 Work Order Bills/Routings Menu ...
16.13.1 Work Order Bill Maintenance wowamt.p
16.13.2 Work Order Bill Browse wobr002.p
16.13.3 Work Order Bill by Order Report wowarp01.p
16.13.4 Work Order Bill by Item Report wowarp.p
16.13.13 Work Order Routing Maintenance woopmt.p
16.13.14 Work Order Routing Browse wobr001.p
16.13.15 Work Order Routing Report wooprp.p
16.15 Work Order Bill Shortage Inquiry wowsiq.p
16.16 Work Order Bill Shortage Report wowsrp.p
16.17 Work Order Bill Shortage by Item wowsrp01.p
16.18 Work Order Dispatch Report woworp04.p
16.19 Work Order Operation Backflush wobkfl.p
16.21 Work Order Accounting Close wowocl.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 139

Menu Menu Label Program Name

16.22 WIP Material Cost Revaluation wocswip.p
16.23 Work Order Delete/Archive wowoup.p
16.24 Work Order Control wowopm.p

17. Shop Floor Control Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
17.1 Labor Feedback by Work Order sfoptr01.p
17.2 Labor Feedback by Employee sfoptr02.p
17.3 Labor Feedback by Work Center sfoptr03.p
17.4 Non-Productive Labor Feedback sfoptr04.p
17.5 Operation Complete Transaction sfoptr05.p
17.6 Operation Move Transaction sfoptr06.p
17.7 Operation Scrap Transaction sfscrap.p
17.13 Shop Floor Reports Menu...
17.13.8 Operation Transaction Browse sfbr001.p
17.13.9 Operation Transaction Detail Inquiry sfopiq12.p
17.13.10 Operations Accounting Report sfacrp01.p
17.13.11 Input/Output Inquiry sfioiq.p
17.13.12 Input/Output Report sfiorp.p
17.13.13 Operations by Work Center Report sfoprp11.p
17.13.14 Operations by Work Order Report sfoprp12.p
17.13.15 Operations by Employee Report sfoprp13.p
17.13.16 Down Time Report sfoprp14.p
17.13.17 Down Time by Reason Report sfoprp15.p
17.13.18 Work Center Utilization Report sfwcrp04.p
17.13.19 Efficiency by Work Center Report sfwcrp03.p
17.13.20 Efficiency by Work Order Report sfoprp01.p
17.13.21 Efficiency by Employee Report sfemrp01.p
17.13.22 Operations Numbering Report reopnrp.p
17.21 Flow Menu...
17.21.1 Flow Setup Menu...
17.21.1.1 Schedule Period Maintenance kbppmt.p
17.21.1.2 Schedule Period Browse kbbr001.p
140 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

17.21.1.4 Production Line Maintenance flplmt.p
17.21.1.5 Production Line Browse flbr004.p
17.21.1.7 Production Line Item Maintenance flplimt.p
17.21.1.8 Production Line Item Browse flbr006.p
17.21.1.10 Flex Fence Maintenance flffmt.p
17.21.1.13 Rate Code by Item Maintenance flcimt.p
17.21.1.14 Rate Code by Item Browse flbr011.p
17.21.1.16 Rate Code by Type/Group Maintenance flrcgmt.p
17.21.1.17 Rate Code by Item Type Browse flbr012.p
17.21.1.18 Rate Code by Item Group Browse flbr013.p
17.21.1.19 Schedule Code Maintenance flscmt.p
17.21.1.22 Work Ctr/Location Maintenance pppoulmt.p
17.21.3 Flow Schedule Maintenance flschmt.p
17.21.5 Flow Schedule Copy flschcp.p
17.21.7 Flow Schedule Receipts flschrc.p
17.21.9 Import MRP Orders to Schedule flimpmrp.p
17.21.10 Export Schedule to Repetitive flexprep.p
17.21.13 Flow Inquiry and Reports Menu...
17.21.13.1 Linearity Summary Inquiry fllniq.p
17.21.13.2 Linearity Summary Report fllnrp.p
17.21.13.7 Flow Schedule View flscvw.p
17.21.13.10 Flow Schedule Detail View flscdv.p
17.21.13.11 Flow Schedule Detail Report flscdrp.p
17.21.19 Flow Schedule Close flschcl.p
17.21.23 Flow Delete/Archive flschup.p
17.21.24 Flow Control flpm.p
17.22 Kanban Menu ...
17.22.1 Kanban Item Master Maintenance kbptmt.p
17.22.2 Supermarket Maintenance kbsmmt.p
17.22.3 Kanban Process Maintenance kbpmt.p
17.22.4 Kanban Master Maintenance kbmt.p
17.22.5 Container Type Maintenance kbcntmt.p
17.22.6 Demand Calc Template Maintenance kbtmpmt.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 141

Menu Menu Label Program Name

17.22.7 Demand Calc Template Update kbtmpup.p
17.22.8 Kanban Master Copy kbkbcp.p
17.22.9 Average Demand Calculation kbadrp.p
17.22.10 Safety Stock Calculation kbssrp.p
17.22.11 Basic Process Calculations kbepeirp.p
17.22.12 Process Item Operation Rollup kbknpdru.p
17.22.13 Process Shift Maintenance kbscmt.p
17.22.14 Prelim Level Schedule Report kbplsrp.p
17.22.15 Inventory Validation Report kbivrp.p
17.22.16 Kanban Card Management Menu
17.22.16.1 Kanban Card Maintenance kbcdmt.p
17.22.16.2 Kanban Multi-Card Maintenance kbcdmt04.p
17.22.16.3 Kanban Card Inquiry kbsziq.p
17.22.16.4 Kanban Card Print kbcdrp03.p
17.22.16.5 Kanban Multi-Card Print kbcdrp01.p
17.22.16.8 Kanban Card Activate kbcdmt01.p
17.22.16.9 Kanban Card Deactivate kbcdmt02.p
17.22.16.10 Kanban Card Close kbcdmt03.p
17.22.16.12 Kanban Card Create kbcdcr.p
17.22.16.13 Kanban Card Status Report kbcdstrp.p
17.22.16.14 Kanban Card Audit Report kbcarp.p
17.22.16.16 Kanban Card Management kbcm.p
17.22.16.18 Kanban Label Definition Maint kbld1mt.p
17.22.18 Kanban Dispatch Menu
17.22.18.1 Kanban Dispatch List Processing kbdlrp.p
17.22.18.2 Kanban Dispatch Maintenance kbdmt.p
17.22.18.4 Dispatch View by Dispatch ID kbdcdiiq.p
17.22.18.5 Dispatch View By Source/Item kbdcdsiq.p
17.22.18.7 Dispatch Report kbdcrp.p
17.22.19 Kanban Transactions Menu
17.22.19.1 Kanban Consume/Post kbtr1.p
17.22.19.2 Kanban Authorize kbtr2.p
17.22.19.3 Kanban Acknowledge kbtr3.p
142 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

17.22.19.4 Kanban Ship kbtr4.p
17.22.19.5 Kanban Fill/Receive kbtr5.p
17.22.19.6 Accumulator Monitor kbacmgr.p
17.22.19.8 Item/Loop Card Transaction View kbtriq.p
17.22.19.9 Item/Loop Transactions View kbtriqa.p
17.22.19.10 Kanban Card Transactions View kbtriq3.p
17.22.19.11 Kanban Transaction Hist Inquiry kbtriqb.p
17.22.19.12 Transaction History Browse kbbr008.p
17.22.19.15 Kanban Transactions Audit Report kbtrrp.p
17.22.19.17 Authorized Card Report kbemptiq.p
17.22.19.18 Missing Kanbans Report kbmirp.p
17.22.19.20 Kanban Consumption Import kbcnsim.p
17.22.19.21 Supplier Kanban Consumption kbcnsmt.p
17.22.19.23 Transaction Delete/Archive kbtrup.p
17.22.20 Historical Buffer Evaluation kbhbevmt.p
17.22.23 Workbench Menu
17.22.23.1 Kanban Workbencha kbkbwb.p
17.22.23.2 Supermarket Workbench kbsmwb.p
17.22.23.3 Level Mix Workbench kblmwb.p
17.22.23.13 Kanban Workbench Export kbkbwbex.p
17.22.23.14 Kanban Workbench Import kbkbwbim.p
17.22.23.16 Supermarket Workbench Export kbsmwbex.p
17.22.23.17 Supermarket Workbench Import kbsmwbim.p
17.22.23.19 Level Mix Workbench Export kblmwbex.p
17.22.23.20 Level Mix Workbench Import kblmwbim.p
17.22.24 Kanban Control kbpm.p
17.23 Operation History Delete/Archive sfopup.p
17.24 Shop Floor Control sfoppm.p

a. Workbench programs are not available through the character user interface.
 Menu and Program Name Listing 143

18. Repetitive Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
18.1 Production Line Menu ...
18.1.1 Production Line Maintenance splnmt.p
18.1.2 Production Line Browse rebr002.p
18.1.3 Production Line Detail Browse rebr003.p
18.1.4 Production Line Report relnrp.p
18.1.6 Line Changeover Maintenance rechmt.p
18.1.7 Line Changeover Browse rebr001.p
18.1.8 Line Changeover Report rechrp.p
18.1.10 Line Schedule Workbench resqwb.p
18.1.11 Line Allocation Maintenance splamt.p
18.1.12 Line Allocation Inquiry splaiq.p
18.1.13 Line Schedule Browse rebr004.p
18.1.14 Line Schedule Report resqrp.p
18.1.15 Line Utilization Report reutlrp.p
18.1.18 Repetitive Schedule Update recrms.p
18.1.22 Shift Maintenance rescmt.p
18.1.23 Shift Report rescrp.p
18.2 Schedule Menu ...
18.2.1 Schedule Maintenance rerpmt.p
18.2.2 Item Schedule Inquiry rerpiq.p
18.2.3 Item Schedule Summary rerpiq04.p
18.2.4 Schedule Explosion rerpex.p
18.2.5 Operation Schedule Report reoprp01.p
18.2.13 Production Line Schedule Inquiry relsiq.p
18.2.14 Production Line Schedule Browse rebr011.p
18.2.15 Production Line Schedule Report relsrp.p
18.3 Picklist Menu ...
18.3.1 Repetitive Picklist Calculation repkup.p
18.3.2 Repetitive Picklist Inquiry repkiq.p
18.3.3 Repetitive Picklist Report repkrp.p
18.3.5 Repetitive Picklist Print repkrp01.p
18.3.6 Repetitive Picklist Transfer repkis.p
144 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

18.3.8 Repetitive Picklist Undo repkunpk.p
18.3.9 Repetitive Picklist Delete repkdel.p
18.4 Reports Menu ...
18.4.1 Repetitive Transaction Browse sfbr001.p
18.4.2 Repetitive Trans Detail Inquiry reopiq12.p
18.4.4 Reject by Item Report reoprp23.p
18.4.5 Reject by Reason Report reoprp25.p
18.4.6 Down Time by Reason Report reoprp24.p
18.4.8 Work Center Dispatch Report reworp04.p
18.4.10 Rep Operations Accounting Report reacrp01.p
18.4.12 Repetitive WIP Cost Report reptrp30.p
18.4.13 Operations by Item Report reoprp17.p
18.4.14 Operations by Employee Report reoprp18.p
18.4.15 Operations by Work Center Report reoprp16.p
18.4.16 Operations Numbering Report reopnrp.p
18.4.17 Productivity by Item Report reoprp21.p
18.4.18 Productivity by Employee Report reoprp20.p
18.4.19 Productivity by Work Center Report reoprp22.p
18.4.21 Efficiency by Item Report reptrp01.p
18.4.22 Efficiency by Employee Report reemrp01.p
18.4.23 Efficiency by Work Center Report rewcrp01.p
18.6 Cumulative Order Maintenance rewomt.p
18.7 Cumulative Order Browse rebr005.p
18.8 Cumulative Order Report reworp.p
18.9 Cumulative Order Accounting Close rewocl.p
18.13 Repetitive Setup Transaction reoptr07.p
18.14 Repetitive Labor Transaction reoptr10.p
18.15 Repetitive Down Time Transaction reoptr12.p
18.16 Repetitive Rework Transaction reoptr13.p
18.17 Repetitive Reject Transaction reoptr11.p
18.18 Repetitive Scrap Transaction reoptr14.p
18.19 Non-Productive Labor Feedback reoptr15.p
18.22 Advanced Repetitive ...
 Menu and Program Name Listing 145

Menu Menu Label Program Name

18.22.1 Production Line Menu ...
18.22.1.1 Production Line Maintenance splnmt.p
18.22.1.2 Production Line Browse rebr002.p
18.22.1.3 Production Line Detail Browse rebr003.p
18.22.1.4 Production Line Report relnrp.p
18.22.1.6 Line Changeover Maintenance rechmt.p
18.22.1.7 Line Changeover Browse rebr001.p
18.22.1.8 Line Changeover Report rechrp.p
18.22.1.10 Line Schedule Workbench resqwb.p
18.22.1.11 Line Allocation Maintenance splamt.p
18.22.1.12 Line Allocation Inquiry splaiq.p
18.22.1.13 Line Schedule Browse rebr004.p
18.22.1.14 Line Schedule Report resqrp.p
18.22.1.15 Line Utilization Report reutlrp.p
18.22.1.18 Repetitive Schedule Update recrms.p
18.22.1.22 Shift Maintenance rescmt.p
18.22.1.23 Shift Report rescrp.p
18.22.2 Schedule Menu ...
18.22.2.1 Schedule Maintenance rerpmt.p
18.22.2.2 Item Schedule Inquiry reschiq.p
18.22.2.3 Item Schedule Summary rerpiq04.p
18.22.2.4 Schedule Explosion reschex.p
18.22.2.5 Operation Schedule Report reoprp01.p
18.22.2.6 Cumulative Completed Maintenance reccmt.p
18.22.2.7 Schedule Delete reschdel.p
18.22.2.13 Production Line Schedule Inquiry relsiq.p
18.22.2.14 Production Line Schedule Browse rebr011.p
18.22.2.15 Production Line Schedule Report relsrp.p
18.22.3 Picklist Menu ...
18.22.3.1 Repetitive Picklist Calculation repkup.p
18.22.3.2 Repetitive Picklist Inquiry repkiq.p
18.22.3.3 Repetitive Picklist Report repkrp.p
18.22.3.5 Repetitive Picklist Print repkrp01.p
146 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

18.22.3.6 Repetitive Picklist Transfer repkis.p
18.22.3.8 Repetitive Picklist Undo repkunpk.p
18.22.3.9 Repetitive Picklist Delete repkdel.p
18.22.4 Reports Menu ...
18.22.4.1 Operation Transaction Inquiry reopiq01.p
18.22.4.2 Operation Trans Detail Inquiry reopiq02.p
18.22.4.3 Scrap Analysis Report rescrp01.p
18.22.4.4 Reject Analysis Report rerjrp01.p
18.22.4.5 Rework Analysis Report rerwrp01.p
18.22.4.6 WIP Adjustments Analysis Report rewarp01.p
18.22.4.7 Down Time By Reason Report reoprp24.p
18.22.4.8 Work Center Dispatch Report reworp04.p
18.22.4.9 Rep Operations Accounting Report reacrp01.p
18.22.4.10 Cumulative Order Cost Report reworp02.p
18.22.4.11 WIP Status Report reworp05.p
18.22.4.12 Operations Numbering Report reopnrp.p
18.22.4.13 WIP Valuation Report reworp03.p
18.22.4.14 Scrap Valuation Report rescrp02.p
18.22.4.15 WIP Adjustments Valuation Report rewarp02.p
18.22.4.16 Operations By Item Report reoprp37.p
18.22.4.17 Operations By Employee Report reoprp38.p
18.22.4.18 Operations By Work Center Report reoprp36.p
18.22.4.19 Productivity By Item Report reoprp41.p
18.22.4.20 Productivity By Employee Report reoprp40.p
18.22.4.21 Productivity By Work Center Report reoprp42.p
18.22.4.22 Efficiency By Item Report reptrp31.p
18.22.4.23 Efficiency By Employee Report reemrp31.p
18.22.4.24 Efficiency By Work Center Report rewcrp31.p
18.22.5 Subcontract Shipping Menu ...
18.22.5.4 Sub Container Maintenance rectmt.p
18.22.5.5 Sub Shipper Maintenance reshmt.p
18.22.5.6 Sub Shipper/Container Inquiry reiq03.p
18.22.5.9 Sub Shipper Print rerp11.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 147

Menu Menu Label Program Name

18.22.5.11 Sub Shipper Issue resubis.p
18.22.5.23 Sub Shipper Delete/Archive rescdel.p
18.22.6 Cumulative Order Maintenance recwomt.p
18.22.7 Cumulative Order Inquiry recwoiq.p
18.22.8 Cumulative Order Report reworp01.p
18.22.9 Post Accumulated Usage Variances reuvup.p
18.22.10 Cumulative Order Close reclose.p
18.22.11 Cumulative Order Create recwup.p
18.22.12 WIP Status Inquiry rewoiq05.p
18.22.13 Backflush Transaction rebkfl.p
18.22.14 Run Labor Transaction relbr.p
18.22.15 Setup Labor Transaction reset.p
18.22.16 Reject Transaction reject.p
18.22.17 Rework Transaction rework.p
18.22.18 Scrap Transaction rescrap.p
18.22.19 Move Transaction remove.p
18.22.20 Down Time Transaction redt.p
18.22.21 WIP Adjust Transaction rewadj.p
18.22.22 Non-productive Labor Feedback renplf.p
18.22.23 History Delete/Archive Menu ...
18.22.23.1 Operation History Delete/Archive sfopup.p
18.22.23.2 Cumulative Order Delete/Archive recwoup.p
18.22.24 Repetitive Control rerepm.p
18.23 History Delete/Archive Menu ...
18.23.1 Operation History Delete/Archive sfopup.p
18.23.2 Cumulative Order Delete/Archive recwoup.p
18.24 Repetitive Control repm.p

19. Quality Management Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
19.1 Specifications Menu ...
19.1.1 Master Specification Maintenance mpmpmt.p
19.1.2 Master Specification Browse mpbr002.p
148 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

19.1.3 Master Specification Report mpmprp.p
19.1.5 Master Specification Copy mpmpcp.p
19.1.13 Item Specification Maintenance mpitmt.p
19.1.14 Item Specification Browse mpbr004.p
19.1.15 Item Specification Report mpitrp.p
19.1.20 Specification Where-Used Browse mpbr003.p
19.1.22 Enable PCC Item Spec Maintenance qcpcnabl.p
19.2 Procedures Menu ...
19.2.1 Procedure Maintenance qctsmt.p
19.2.2 Procedure Browse qcbr003.p
19.2.3 Procedure Report qctsrp.p
19.3 Inventory Sampling Menu ...
19.3.1 Sampling Pattern Maintenance qcspmt.p
19.3.2 Sampling Pattern Browse qcbr001.p
19.3.3 Sampling Pattern Report qcsprp.p
19.3.13 Sample by Expire Days Inquiry qclsiq.p
19.3.14 Sample by Lot Interval Inquiry qclsiq02.p
19.7 Quality Order Maintenance qcwomt.p
19.8 Quality Order Browse qcbr004.p
19.9 Quality Order Report qcworp.p
19.11 Quality Order Results Entry qcwoisrc.p
19.12 Quality Order Results Report qcpfrp.p
19.13 Test Results Maintenance mptrmt.p
19.14 Test Results Browse mpbr001.p
19.15 Test Results Report mpcarp.p
19.20 Certificate of Analysis Print mpcarp01.p
19.22 Test Results Delete/Archive mpcaup.p
19.23 Quality Order Delete/Archive qcqcup.p
19.24 Quality Management Control qcqcpm.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 149

20. Product Line Plan Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
20.1 Product Line Plan Maintenance plppmt.p
20.2 Product Line Plan Inquiry plppiq.p
20.3 Product Line Plan Report plpprp.p
20.5 Shipments Plan Maintenance plppmt01.p
20.6 Shipments Plan Inquiry plppiq01.p
20.7 Shipments Plan Report plpprp01.p
20.9 Orders Plan Maintenance plppmt02.p
20.10 Orders Plan Inquiry plppiq02.p
20.11 Orders Plan Report plpprp02.p
20.13 Production Plan Maintenance plppmt03.p
20.14 Production Plan Inquiry plppiq03.p
20.15 Production Plan Report plpprp03.p
20.17 Inventory Plan Maintenance plppmt04.p
20.18 Inventory Plan Inquiry plppiq04.p
20.19 Inventory Plan Report plpprp04.p
20.21 Backlog Plan Maintenance plppmt05.p
20.22 Backlog Plan Inquiry plppiq05.p
20.23 Backlog Plan Report plpprp05.p

21. Resource Plan Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
21.1 Resource Maintenance rprsmt.p
21.2 Resource Browse rpbr003.p
21.3 Resource Report rprsrp.p
21.5 PL Resource Bill Maintenance rppqmt.p
21.6 PL Resource Bill Browse rpbr001.p
21.7 PL Resource Bill Report rppqrp.p
21.9 PL Resource Load Summary Inquiry rprsiq03.p
21.10 PL Resource Load Summary Report rprsrp03.p
21.11 PL Resource Load Detail Inquiry rprsiq04.p
21.12 PL Resource Load Detail Report rprsrp04.p
150 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

21.17 Item Resource Bill Maintenance rprrmt.p
21.18 Item Resource Bill Browse rpbr002.p
21.19 Item Resource Bill Report rprrrp.p
21.21 Item Resource Load Summary Inquiry rprsiq01.p
21.22 Item Resource Load Summary Report rprsrp01.p
21.23 Item Resource Load Detail Inquiry rprsiq02.p
21.24 Item Resource Load Detail Report rprsrp02.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 151

22. Forecast/Master Plan Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
22.1 Forecast Maintenance fcfsmt01.p
22.2 Forecast Worksheet Maintenance fcfsmt.p
22.3 Forecast Inquiry fcfsiq.p
22.4 Forecast Report fcfsrp.p
22.7 Forecast Simulation Menu ...
22.7.1 Simulation Criteria Maintenance ffscmt.p
22.7.2 Simulation Criteria Inquiry ffsciq.p
22.7.5 Simulated Forecast Calculation ffcalc.p
22.7.7 Detail Forecast Maintenance ffdfmt.p
22.7.8 Detail Forecast Inquiry ffdfiq.p
22.7.9 Detail Forecast Report ffdfrp.p
22.7.11 Simulation To Simulation Copy ffsicp.p
22.7.12 Single Item Simulation Copy ffptcp.p
22.7.13 Simulation To Summarized Fcst ffsucp.p
22.7.17 User Forecast Method Maintenance ffmthdmt.p
22.7.23 Detail Forecast Delete/Archive ffdfup.p
22.9 Seasonal Build Maintenance fcfcmt.p
22.10 Seasonal Build Browse fcbr001.p
22.11 Seasonal Build Report fcfcrp.p
22.12 Seasonal Build MRP Utility fcfcmrp.p
22.13 Master Schedule Order Maintenance wowomt.p
22.14 Master Schedule Order Browse msbr001.p
22.15 Master Schedule Order Report msmsrp02.p
22.18 Master Schedule Summary Inquiry msmsiq.p
22.19 Master Schedule Summary Report msmsrp.p
22.21 Master Schedule Detail Inquiry msmsiq01.p
22.22 Master Schedule Detail Report msmsrp01.p
152 User Guide — Introduction

23. Material Requirements Plan Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
23.1 Net Change Materials Plan mrmpnc.p
23.2 Regenerate Materials Plan mrmpup.p
23.3 Selective Materials Plan mrmprc.p
23.5 Action Message Review/Update mroamt.p
23.6 Action Message Browse drbr002.p
23.7 Action Message Report mrmprp02.p
23.8 Planned Repetitive Sched Approval mrwoln.p
23.9 Planned Order Browse mrbr001.p
23.10 Planned Work Order Approval mrwoap.p
23.11 Planned Purchase Order Approval mrprap.p
23.12 Planned Order Report mrworp11.p
23.13 MRP Summary Inquiry mrmpiq.p
23.14 MRP Summary Report mrmprp11.p
23.16 MRP Detail Inquiry mrmpiq01.p
23.17 MRP Detail Report mrmprp01.p
23.19 Past Due Receipts Inquiry mrmpiq03.p
23.20 Past Due Receipts Report mrmprp03.p
23.22 Low Level Code Update mrllup01.p
23.24 MRP Control mrmrppm.p

24. Capacity Requirements Plan Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
24.1 Recalculate Capacity Plan crcrpup.p
24.4 Input/Output Inquiry sfioiq.p
24.5 Input/Output Report sfiorp.p
24.13 Work Center Load Summary Inquiry crwciq01.p
24.14 Work Center Load Summary Report crwcrp01.p
24.16 Work Center Load Detail Inquiry crwciq02.p
24.17 Work Center Load Detail Report crwcrp02.p
24.19 Department Load Summary Inquiry crdpiq01.p
24.20 Department Load Summary Report crdprp01.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 153

Menu Menu Label Program Name

24.22 Department Load Detail Inquiry crdpiq02.p
24.23 Department Load Detail Report crdprp02.p

25. General Ledger Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
25.1 Current Entity Change glenchg.p
25.3 General Ledger Setup Menu ...
25.3.1 Entity Menu...
25.3.1.1 Entity Code Maintenance glenmt.p
25.3.1.2 Entity Code Browse gpbr322.p
25.3.1.3 Intercompany Accounts Inquiry glenaciq.p
25.3.1.4 Intercompany Accounts Report glenacrp.p
25.3.1.6 Consolidation Entity Delete/Archive glenup.p
25.3.3 Entity Code Change glennew.p
25.3.4 GL Calendar Maintenance glcalmt.p
25.3.5 GL Calendar Browse glbr003.p
25.3.6 GL Calendar Report glcalrp.p
25.3.7 Format Position Maintenance glfmmt.p
25.3.8 Format Position Browse gpbr324.p
25.3.9 Format Position Report glfmrp.p
25.3.11 Project Code Maintenance glpjmt.p
25.3.12 Project Code Browse gpbr344.p
25.3.13 Account Code Maintenance glacmt.p
25.3.14 Account Code Browse gpbr309.p
25.3.15 Account Code Report glacrp.p
25.3.17 Sub-Account Code Maintenance glsbmt.p
25.3.18 Sub-Account Code Browse gpbr351.p
25.3.20 Cost Center Code Maintenance glccmt.p
25.3.21 Cost Center Code Browse gpbr059.p
25.3.23 Allocation Code Maintenance glalmt.p
25.3.24 Allocation Code Report glalrp.p
25.5 General Ledger Budgets Menu ...
25.5.1 Budget Maintenance glbgmt.p
154 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

25.5.2 Budget Browse glbr002.p
25.5.3 Budget Report glbgrp.p
25.5.5 Budget Copy glbgcpy.p
25.5.7 Budget Calculation glbgcalc.p
25.5.23 Budget Delete glbgdel.p
25.8 Daybook Menu ...
25.8.1 Daybook Maintenance gldymt.p
25.8.2 Daybook Browse glbr016.p
25.8.4 Default Daybook Maintenance gldydfmt.p
25.8.5 Default Daybook Browse glbr015.p
25.8.13 Daybook Report Official gldyrp01.p
25.8.14 Daybook Report Trial gldyrp02.p
25.8.16 Central Daybook Report Official gldyrp03.p
25.8.17 Central Daybook Report Trial gldyrp04.p
25.8.19 Daybook GL Transaction Inquiry by Account gldyiq1.p
25.8.20 Daybook Transaction Register gldyreg.p
25.8.21 Daybook Inquiry with Drill-Down gldyiq2.p
25.12 Master Comment Maintenance gpcmmt.p
25.13 General Ledger Transactions Menu ...
25.13.1 Standard Transaction Maintenance gltrmt.p
25.13.2 Retroactive Transaction Maintenance glrtrmt.p
25.13.3 Reversing Transaction Maintenance glrvmt.p
25.13.4 Transaction Copy glrccpy.p
25.13.5 Year End Adjustment Transaction glyamt.p
25.13.7 Transaction Post gltrpst.p
25.13.9 Foreign Exchange Revaluation glfxmt.p
25.13.11 Transaction Consolidation glcons.p
25.13.12 Transaction Year-End Close glyrcl.p
25.13.13 Unposted Transaction Inquiry glutriq.p
25.13.14 Unposted Transaction Register glutrrp.p
25.13.17 Account Balance Inquiry glabiq.p
25.13.18 Transaction by Account Inquiry gltriq1.p
25.13.19 Transaction by Reference Inquiry gltriq.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 155

Menu Menu Label Program Name

25.13.20 Inquiry by Account with Drill-Down gltriq2.p
25.13.21 Transaction Register gltrrp.p
25.15 General Ledger Reports Menu ...
25.15.1 Account Balance Summary glabrp.p
25.15.2 Account Balance Detail gldabrp.p
25.15.4 Trial Balance Summary gltbrp.p
25.15.5 Trial Balance Detail gldtbrp.p
25.15.6 Trial Balance Budget glbtbrp.p
25.15.8 Balance Sheet glbsrp.p
25.15.9 Balance Sheet Comparative glcbsrp.p
25.15.10 GL Account Sheet Report glacshrp.p
25.15.11 GL Statement of Account glacstrp.p
25.15.12 Financial Statement Proforma glpfrp.p
25.15.13 Income Statement glinrp.p
25.15.14 Income Statement Comparative glcinrp.p
25.15.15 Income Statement 4 Column gl4inrp.p
25.15.16 Income Statement 12-Column gl12inrp.p
25.15.18 Cost Center Activity glctrrp.p
25.15.19 Cost Center Activity Comparative glcctrrp.p
25.15.21 Project Activity Summary glpjrp.p
25.15.22 Project Activity Detail gldpjrp.p
25.15.23 Project Activity Comparative glcpjrp.p
25.17 Custom Reports Menu ...
25.17.1 Custom Report Format Maintenance glcrfmt.p
25.17.2 Custom Report Format Browse gpbr328.p
25.17.4 Custom Report Account Maintenance glcrmt.p
25.17.5 Custom Report Account Browse glbr009.p
25.17.8 Custom Report Copy glcrcpy.p
25.17.13 Custom Report Print glcrrp.p
25.19 Transaction Import/Export Menu ...
25.19.1 Translation Exchange Rate Maintenance glexcmt.p
25.19.2 Translation Exchange Rate Report glexcrp.p
25.19.4 From-Account Cross-Reference Maintenance glacxfmt.p
156 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

25.19.6 Account Cross-Reference Report glacxrp.p
25.19.10 Entity Consolidation Detail Inquiry glencdiq.p
25.19.11 Entity Consolidation Detail Report glencdrp.p
25.19.13 Foreign Exchange Revaluation glfxmt.p
25.19.14 Transaction Export gltrexp.p
25.19.15 Transaction Import gltrimp.p
25.19.16 Transaction Post gltrpst.p
25.19.17 Imported Transaction Revaluation gltrrev.p
25.19.20 GL Consolidation gltrdcs.p
25.21 GL Report Writer ...
25.21.1 Analysis Code Maintenance gracmt.p
25.21.2 Analysis Code Inquiry graciq.p
25.21.3 Where Used Inquiry grwuiq.p
25.21.5 Row Group Maintenance grrgmt.p
25.21.7 Column Group Maintenance grcgmt.p
25.21.9 Report Maintenance grrxmt.p
25.21.12 G/L Report Writer Utilities ...
25.21.12.1 Rounding Method Maintenance mgrndmt.p
25.21.12.2 Rounding Method Browse adbr016.p
25.21.12.3 Rounding Method Report mgrndrp.p
25.21.12.5 Reporting Unit Code Maintenance grunitmt.p
25.21.12.6 Reporting Unit Code Inquiry grunitiq.p
25.21.12.7 Reporting Unit Code Report grunitrp.p
25.21.12.12 User Language Detail Maintenance mglngumt.p
25.21.12.13 Rename Analysis Code gracut.p
25.21.12.15 Modify Maintenance Security grmtsec.p
25.21.13 Reports/Listings Menu ...
25.21.13.1 Analysis Code Listing gracrp.p
25.21.13.2 Row Group Listing grrgrp.p
25.21.13.3 Column Group Listing grcgrp.p
25.21.13.5 Report Validation Listing grvalrp.p
25.21.13.6 Report Content Listing grrcrp.p
25.21.13.7 Report Exceptions Listing grexcrp.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 157

Menu Menu Label Program Name

25.21.13.8 Report Name Listing grrpnmrp.p
25.21.15 Report Base Period Maintenance grrpermt.p
25.21.17 Run Report grrunrp.p
25.21.19 Output Manager Menu ...
25.21.19.1 Print Report Image gromrp.p
25.21.19.3 Export Report Image gromex.p
25.21.19.5 Page Number Inquiry grompgiq.p
25.21.19.13 Report Output Filter gromsel.p
25.21.19.23 Image Delete/Archive grgrup.p
25.21.21 Synchronize G/L Data grsync.p
25.21.23 Quarter Maintenance grqtrmt.p
25.21.24 GL Report Writer Control grgrpm.p
25.24 General Ledger Control glcopm.p

26. Multiple Currency Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
26.1 Currency Maintenance mccumt.p
26.2 Currency Browse mcbr002.p
26.4 Exchange Rate Maintenance mcexrmt.p
26.5 Exchange Rate Browse mcbr003.p
26.7 Currency Account Maintenance mccuacmt.p
26.8 Currency Account Browse mcbr008.p
26.10 Exchange Rate Relationship Maintenance mcdexrmt.p
26.11 Exchange Rate Relationship Browse mcbr010.p
26.12 Derived Exchange Rate Calculation mcderccp.p
26.13 Bank Maintenance apbkmt.p
26.14 Bank Browse gpbr311.p
26.15 Bank Report apbkrp.p
26.19 EMU Currency Maintenance mcmumt.p
26.20 EMU Currency Browse mcbr004.p
26.21 Euro Functionality Menu ...
26.21.1 Pre-Conversion Menu ...
26.21.1.2 Initial Euro Exchange Rate Copy etratecp.p
158 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

26.21.1.6 AR EMU Revaluation etarfxmt.p
26.21.1.7 AP EMU Revaluation etapfxmt.p
26.21.1.8 GL EMU Revaluation etglfxmt.p
26.21.1.9 Imported Transactions EMU Revaluation etglfimp.p
26.21.1.12 Financial Integrity Checks Menu ...
26.21.1.12.1 GL Integrity Report etinglrp.p
26.21.1.12.3 AR Integrity Report etinarrp.p
26.21.1.12.4 AP Integrity Report etinaprp.p
26.21.1.12.6 PO Integrity Report etinporp.p
26.21.1.12.8 Inventory Integrity Report etininrp.p
26.21.1.12.9 WIP Integrity Report etinwirp.p
26.21.1.12.11 Fixed Assets Integrity Report etinfarp.p
26.21.1.12.12 Combined Integrity Checks etincbrp.p
26.21.1.12.13 Trial Balance gltbrp.p
26.21.1.12.14 Income Statement glinrp.p
26.21.1.12.15 Balance Sheet glbsrp.p
26.21.1.12.16 AR Aging as of Effective Date arcsrp05.p
26.21.1.12.17 AP Aging as of Effective Date apvorp04.p
26.21.1.12.18 Inventory Valuation as of Date ppptrp06.p
26.21.1.12.19 Work Order WIP Cost Report woworp09.p
26.21.1.12.20 AR Tax by Tax Rate Report txarrp01.p
26.21.1.12.21 AP Tax by Tax Rate Report txaprp01.p
26.21.1.12.22 Purchase Receipts Report poporp06.p
26.21.1.13 Accounts Not To Convert Maintenance etexacmt.p
26.21.1.14 Accounts Not To Convert Report etexacrp.p
26.21.1.16 Supplier Item Price Creation etsipc.p
26.21.1.18 Count Program etcount.p
26.21.1.19 Count and Estimate Report etcntrp.p
26.21.1.20 Hash Total Report ethashrp.p
26.21.1.23 Conversion Checklist Report etvack.p
26.21.3 Post-Conversion Menu ...
26.21.3.1 Financial Integrity Checks Menu ...
26.21.3.1.1 GL Integrity Report etinglrp.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 159

Menu Menu Label Program Name

26.21.3.1.3 AR Integrity Report etinarrp.p
26.21.3.1.4 AP Integrity Report etinaprp.p
26.21.3.1.6 PO Integrity Report etinporp.p
26.21.3.1.8 Inventory Integrity Report etininrp.p
26.21.3.1.9 WIP Integrity Report etinwirp.p
26.21.3.1.11 Fixed Assets Integrity Report etinfarp.p
26.21.3.1.12 Combined Integrity Checks etincbrp.p
26.21.3.1.13 Trial Balance gltbrp.p
26.21.3.1.14 Income Statement glinrp.p
26.21.3.1.15 Balance Sheet glbsrp.p
26.21.3.1.16 AR Aging as of Effective Date arcsrp05.p
26.21.3.1.17 AP Aging as of Effective Date apvorp04.p
26.21.3.1.18 Inventory Valuation Report ppptrp06.p
26.21.3.1.19 Work Order WIP Cost Report woworp09.p
26.21.3.1.20 AR Tax by Tax Rate Report txarrp01.p
26.21.3.1.21 AP Tax by Tax Rate Report txaprp01.p
26.21.3.1.22 Purchase Receipts Report poporp06.p
26.21.3.3 Conversion Audit Trail etaudtrp.p
26.21.3.4 GL Conversion Audit Trail etacaud.p
26.21.3.6 Count Program etcount.p
26.21.3.7 Hash Total Report ethashrp.p
26.21.3.13 Routing Cost Roll-Up rwroru.p
26.21.3.14 Product Structure Cost Roll-Up bmcsru01.p
26.21.3.16 WIP Revaluation wocswip.p
26.21.3.18 Sales Order Revaluation sosorv.p
26.21.3. 19 Adjust Customer Balances utcsbal.p
26.21.3. 20 Adjust Supplier Balances utvdbal.p
26.21.3.22 GL Report Writer Synchronize grsync.p
26.21.3.23 Budget Calculation glbgcalc.p
26.21.5 Cust Second Currency Mass Update etcmmaup.p
26.21.24 Euro Functionality Control ettkpm.p
160 User Guide — Introduction

27. Accounts Receivable Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
27.1 DR/CR Memo Maintenance ardrmt.p
27.2 DR/CR Memo Inquiry ardriq.p
27.3 DR/CR Memo Register ardrrp.p
27.4 DR/CR Memo Report ardrrp01.p
27.6 Customer Payments/Drafts Menu ...
27.6.1 Bank Maintenance apbkmt.p
27.6.2 Bank Browse gpbr311.p
27.6.4 Payment Maintenance arpamt.p
27.6.5 Payment Inquiry arpaiq.p
27.6.6 Payment Register arparp.p
27.6.9 Unapplied Payment Application arpamt01.p
27.6.10 Payment Application Register arparp01.p
27.6.12 PRO/PLUS Self-Billing Menu ...
27.6.12.1 Self-Bill Maintenance arsbmt.p
27.6.12.4 Self-Bill Auto Create arsbac.p
27.6.12.7 Self-Bill Payment Application arsbpap.p
27.6.12.8 Self-Bill Payment Undo arsbpu.p
27.6.12.10 Self-Bill Discrepancy Report arsbrp02.p
27.6.12.11 Invoice/Memo AR Balance Report arsbrp03.p
27.6.12.13 Self-Bill Report arsbrp.p
27.6.12.15 Shipment-Invoice Crossref Report arsbsirp.p
27.6.12.23 Self-Bill Delete/Archive arsbdel.p
27.6.12.24 Self-Billing Control arsbpm.p
27.6.13 Draft Maintenance dmdmmt.p
27.6.14 Draft Inquiry dmdmiq.p
27.6.15 Draft Report dmdmrp.p
27.6.16 Draft Summary Register dmdmrp01.p
27.6.18 Draft Print dmdmprt.p
27.6.20 Draft Approval dmdmap.p
27.6.22 Draft Discounting dmdisc.p
27.6.24 Approved Draft Reversal dmaprv.p
27.8 Customer Credit Inquiry arcsiq01.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 161

Menu Menu Label Program Name

27.9 Customer Credit Report arcsrp04.p
27.10 Customer Credit Review/Update arcsup.p
27.11 Customer Dunning Letter Print ardunrp.p
27.12 Finance Charge Calculation arfinup.p
27.13 Customer Account Inquiry arcsiq.p
27.14 Customer Account Statement Print arcsrp03.p
27.15 DR/CR Memo Print armorp.p
27.16 AR Aging by Due Date Report arcsrp01.p
27.17 AR Aging by Invoice Date Report arcsrp02.p
27.18 AR Aging as of Effective Date arcsrp05.p
27.19 AR Batch Report arbarp.p
27.20 AR Balance Report arcsrp.p
27.21 AR-GL Transactions Report arglrp.p
27.22 Invoice Numbering Report arivnbrp.p
27.23 Closed AR Delete/Archive arrcup.p
27.24 Accounts Receivable Control arpm.p

28. Accounts Payable Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
28.1 Voucher Maintenance apvomt.p
28.2 Voucher Inquiry apvoiq.p
28.3 Voucher Register Menu ...
28.3.1 Voucher Register apvorp.p
28.3.2 Voucher Register by Assigned-To apvorpem.p
28.3.4 Voucher Numbering Report apvonbrp.p
28.4 Voucher Hold Inquiry apvoiq01.p
28.5 Voucher Hold Report apvorp03.p
28.6 Voucher Confirmation—Automatic apvoco01.p
28.7 Voucher Confirmation—Manual apvoco.p
28.8 Recurring Vouchers Menu ...
28.8.1 Recurring Voucher Maintenance aprvmt.p
28.8.2 Recurring Voucher Inquiry aprviq.p
28.8.4 Recurring Voucher Release aprvvo.p
162 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

28.9 Supplier Payments/Checks Menu ...
28.9.1 Bank Maintenance apbkmt.p
28.9.2 Bank Browse gpbr311.p
28.9.3 Bank Report apbkrp.p
28.9.4 Payment Selection—Automatic appaup.p
28.9.5 Payment Selection—Manual appaup01.p
28.9.6 Payment Selection Register apparp.p
28.9.9 Payment—Automatic Checks apckprt.p
28.9.10 Payment—Manual Checks apmcmt.p
28.9.11 Payment Browse apbr002.p
28.9.12 Payment Register apckrp.p
28.9.13 Check Cancellation Maintenance apcrmt.p
28.9.15 Check Void Maintenance apvcmt.p
28.9.17 Check Status Report apcrrp.p
28.9.18 Draft Status Report apdrrp.p
28.10 ERS Menu ...
28.10.1 ERS Maintenance apersmt.p
28.10.2 ERS Browse apbr004.p
28.10.3 ERS Report apersrp.p
28.10.13 ERS Processor apersup.p
28.12 Log Charge Pending Voucher Maint lapvomt.p
28.13 Supplier Activity Inquiry apvniq.p
28.14 Supplier Activity (1099) Report apckrp01.p
28.15 Supplier Prepayment Inquiry apvniq01.p
28.17 Accounts Payable Reports Menu...
28.17.1 Voucher/Standard Cost Variance Report apicrp01.p
28.17.2 Voucher/PO Cost Variance Report apicrp02.p
28.17.4 AP Aging by Voucher Date Report apvorp02.p
28.17.5 AP Aging by Due Date Report apvorp01.p
28.17.6 AP Aging as of Effective Date apvorp04.p
28.17.8 AP Batch Report apbarp.p
28.17.10 Unposted AP-GL Transactions Report apglrp.p
28.17.13 Logistics Charge Variance Report laaprp01.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 163

Menu Menu Label Program Name

28.17.14 Open Logistics Charge Report laaprp02.p
28.20 1099-MISC Menu ...
28.20.1 1099-MISC Report ap1099rp.p
28.20.2 1099-MISC Form Print ap1099pt.p
28.20.3 1099-MISC Magnetic Media Report ap1099mg.p
28.21 Uninvoiced Logistics Charge Delete/Archive aplaup.p
28.22 Uninvoiced Receipt Delete/Archive aprcup.p
28.23 Closed AP Delete/Archive aphtup.p
28.24 Accounts Payable Control appm.p

30. Cost Management Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
30.1 Cost Set Maintenance csmsmt.p
30.2 Cost Set Browse csbr001.p
30.3 Cost Set Copy to Cost Set cscscp01.p
30.6 Item Cost Set Browse ppbr002.p
30.9 Cost Set to Site Assignment cssiup.p
30.10 Site by Cost Set Browse csbr003.p
30.11 Cost Set by Site Browse csbr004.p
30.13 Cost Simulation Menu ...
30.13.1 Simulation Cost Element Maintenance sccemt.p
30.13.2 Simulation Cost Element Browse scbr003.p
30.13.3 Simulation Cost Element Report sccerp.p
30.13.5 Simulation Item-Element Cost Maintenance csptmt03.p
30.13.6 Simulation Item-Element Cost Inquiry csptiq03.p
30.13.7 Simulation Item-Element Cost Report csptrp03.p
30.13.8 Simulation Item-Element Cost Update scptup.p
30.13.9 Simulation Item-Element Cost Copy csptcp03.p
30.13.10 Simulation Subcontract Cost Maintenance scopmt.p
30.13.11 Simulation Subcontract Cost Browse scbr002.p
30.13.12 Simulation Subcontract Cost Report scrp04.p
30.13.13 Simulation Work Center Rate Maintenance scwcmt.p
30.13.14 Simulation Work Center Rate Browse scbr001.p
164 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

30.13.15 Simulation Work Center Rate Report scrp03.p
30.13.16 Simulation Work Center Rate Update scwcup.p
30.13.18 Simulation Cost Rollup scroru.p
30.13.19 Simulation Structure Cost Rollup sccsru01.p
30.13.21 Simulation to Simulation Copy scsccp.p
30.13.22 Simulation to WC/Routing Copy scsccp01.p
30.13.23 Item/Routing to Simulation Copy scsccp02.p
30.15 Cost Planning Menu ...
30.15.1 Cost Plan by Site Maintenance csplmt.p
30.15.2 Cost Plan by Site Browse csbr002.p
30.15.3 Cost Plan by Site Update csplup.p
30.17 Cost Elements Menu ...
30.17.1 Cost Element Maintenance sccemt01.p
30.17.2 Cost Element Browse scbr004.p
30.17.3 Cost Element Report sccerp01.p
30.17.4 Cost Element Copy cssccp.p
30.17.5 Item-Element Cost Maintenance csptmt13.p
30.17.6 Item-Element Cost Inquiry csptiq13.p
30.17.7 Item-Element Cost Report csptrp13.p
30.17.9 Item-Element Cost Copy csptcp13.p
30.17.10 Item-Element Cost Calculation ppbdov03.p
30.17.11 Item-Element Cost Name Change cscecg.p
30.18 Linked-Site Costing Menu...
30.18.1 Linked-Site Rules Maintenance cslsrmt.p
30.18.2 Linked-Site Rules Inquiry cslsriq.p
30.18.3 Linked-Site Item Browse csbr005.p
30.18.5 Linked-Site Refresh Utility cslsrup.p
30.19 Cost Category Translations sclngdmt.p
30.20 Cost Update from Cost Elements csscup.p
30.21 Cost Set Report scrp01.p
30.22 Comparative Cost Set Report scrp05.p
30.23 Cost Set Delete cscsdel.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 165

31. Cash Management Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
31.1 Cash Flow—Misc. Maintenance cmcfmmt.p
31.2 Cash Flow—Misc. Browse cmbr001.p
31.3 Cash Flow—Misc. Report cmcfmrp.p
31.5 Cash Expected Date Maintenance cmcfxmt.p
31.8 Cash Flow Projection Report cmpcfrp.p
31.13 Cash Book Maintenance cmbkmt.p
31.14 Cash Statement of Account Print cmbkrp.p
31.24 Cash Management Control cmcmpm.p

32. Fixed Assets Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
32.1 Fixed Asset Setup Menu ...
32.1.1 Method Maintenance famtmt.p
32.1.2 Method Report famtrp.p
32.1.5 Fixed Asset Calendar Maintenance facalmt.p
32.1.6 Fixed Asset Calendar Report facalrp.p
32.1.9 Book Maintenance fabkmt.p
32.1.10 Book Browse fabr012.p
32.1.13 Location Maintenance falcmt.p
32.1.14 Location Report falcrp.p
32.1.17 Class Maintenance faclmt.p
32.1.18 Class Report faclrp.p
32.3 Fixed Asset Maintenance fafamt.p
32.4 Fixed Assets Browse fabr019.p
32.5 Fixed Asset Report Menu ...
32.5.1 Periodic Activity Report faparp.p
32.5.3 Depreciation Adjustment Report faajrp.p
32.5.5 Acquisition Report faaqrp.p
32.5.7 Depreciation Expense Report faderp.p
32.5.9 Asset Depreciation Array Report fadarp.p
32.5.11 Asset Owned Report faaorp.p
166 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

32.7 Fixed Asset Batch Maintenance fabchmt.p
32.8 Fixed Asset Batch Report fabchrp.p
32.11 Fixed Asset Meter Maintenance famtrmt.p
32.12 Fixed Asset Meter Report famtrrp.p
32.13 Fixed Asset Transaction Post fapsmt.p
32.14 Fixed Asset Transaction Void favdmt.p
32.16 Fixed Asset Transfers fatrmt.p
32.17 Fixed Asset Transfer Report fatrrp.p
32.19 Fixed Asset Retirements fartmt.p
32.20 Fixed Asset Retirement Report fartrp.p
32.23 Retired Asset Delete/Archive fartup.p
32.24 Fixed Asset Control fafapm.p

33. Enterprise Operations Plan

Menu Menu Label Program Name
33.1 System Setup Menu ...
33.1.1 GL Calendar Browse glbr003.p
33.1.2 GL Calendar Report glcalrp.p
33.1.4 Calendar Cross-Reference Build spglclmt.p
33.1.5 Calendar Cross-Reference Inquiry spglcliq.p
33.1.24 Operations Plan Control spsppm.p
33.3 Family Setup Menu ...
33.3.1 Family Hierarchy Maintenance spfhmt.p
33.3.2 Family Hierarchy Inquiry spfhiq.p
33.3.3 Family Hierarchy Report spfhrp.p
33.3.5 Family Hierarchy Copy spfhcp.p
33.3.6 Family Hierarchy Change spfhmc.p
33.3.8 Family Hierarchy Where-Used Inquiry spwuiq.p
33.3.13 Family Item Cost Maintenance spfcmt.p
33.3.14 Family Item Cost Inquiry spfciq.p
33.3.15 Family Item Cost Report spfcrp.p
33.3.23 Family Hierarchy Delete/Archive spfhup.p
33.5 Item Setup Menu ...
 Menu and Program Name Listing 167

Menu Menu Label Program Name

33.5.1 Weeks of Coverage Maintenance spptmt.p
33.5.2 Weeks of Coverage Inquiry spptiq.p
33.5.3 Weeks of Coverage Report spptrp.p
33.5.5 Coverage by Date Maintenance spwksmt.p
33.5.6 Coverage by Date Inquiry spwksiq.p
33.5.7 Coverage by Date Report spwksrp.p
33.5.13 Source Matrix Maintenance spsmmt.p
33.5.14 Source Matrix Inquiry spsmiq.p
33.5.15 Source Matrix Report spsmrp.p
33.5.17 Line Allocation Maintenance splamt.p
33.5.18 Line Allocation Inquiry splaiq.p
33.5.20 Pallet Maintenance sppalmt.p
33.5.21 Pallet Inquiry sppaliq.p
33.5.23 Item Pallet Maintenance spptlmt.p
33.5.24 Item Pallet Inquiry spptliq.p
33.7 Family Processing Menu ...
33.7.1 Global Consolidation sppncal.p
33.7.3 Global Production Maintenance sppnmt.p
33.7.4 Global Production Inquiry sppniq.p
33.7.5 Global Production Report sppnrp.p
33.7.7 Rollup Percentage Report spfhrp01.p
33.7.13 Family Plan Rollup spfprl.p
33.7.14 Family Plan Explosion spfhbd.p
33.7.16 Profit Projection Report sppfrp.p
33.13 Item-Site Consolidation Menu ...
33.13.1 Transaction Data Load sptrup.p
33.13.3 Item-Site Data Maintenance spedimt.p
33.13.4 Item-Site Data Inquiry spediiq.p
33.13.5 Item-Site Data Report spedirp.p
33.13.6 Item-Site Data Consolidation spitcvt.p
33.13.8 Source Matrix Explosion spsmex.p
33.13.13 Sales Data Maintenance spspmt.p
33.13.14 Sales Data Inquiry spspiq.p
168 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

33.13.15 Sales Data Report spsprp.p
33.13.17 Inventory Data Maintenance spipmt.p
33.13.18 Inventory Data Inquiry spipiq.p
33.13.19 Inventory Data Report spiprp.p
33.13.21 Production Data Maintenance spppmt.p
33.13.22 Production Data Inquiry spppiq.p
33.13.23 Production Data Report sppprp.p
33.15 Enterprise Operations Plan Menu ...
33.15.1 Operations Plan Maintenance spfpmt.p
33.15.2 Operations Plan Inquiry spfpiq.p
33.15.3 Operations Plan Summary Report spfprp09.p
33.15.4 Operations Plan Detail Report spfprp04.p
33.15.6 Operations Plan Line Maintenance spflmt.p
33.15.7 Operations Plan Line Inquiry spfliq.p
33.15.9 Line Utilization Maintenance splpmt.p
33.15.10 Line Utilization Summary Report spflrp09.p
33.15.11 Production Labor Inquiry spactiq.p
33.15.12 Site Utilization Inquiry spflut.p
33.15.13 Operations Plan Explosion spmrpex.p
33.15.14 Operations Plan Approval spmrpud.p
33.15.15 Operations Plan Batch Approval spmrpbp.p
33.15.17 Balance Target Inventory and MRP spsbexrp.p
33.15.19 Coverage Detail Report spcvdrp.p
33.15.20 Coverage Summary Report spcvsrp.p
33.15.21 Operations Plan Resource Inquiry sprsiq05.p
33.15.23 Operations Plan Delete/Archive spfpup.p
33.17 Simulation Plan Menu ...
33.17.1 Copy Plan To Simulation spfpcp01.p
33.17.3 Copy Simulation to Plan spfpcp03.p
33.17.6 Simulation Summary Report spfsrp09.p
33.17.7 Simulation Detail Report spfsrp04.p
33.17.13 Simulation Plan Maintenance spfsmt.p
33.17.14 Simulation Plan Inquiry spfsiq.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 169

Menu Menu Label Program Name

33.17.16 Simulation Line Plan Maintenance spslmt.p
33.17.17 Simulation Line Plan Inquiry spfsliq.p
33.17.19 Simulation Line Utility Maintenance splsmt.p
33.17.20 Simulation Line Utility Report spslrp09.p
33.17.23 Simulation Delete/Archive spfspup.p
33.19 Performance Measurement Menu ...
33.19.1 Sales Data Inquiry spspiq.p
33.19.2 Sales Data Report spsprp.p
33.19.4 Inventory Data Inquiry spipiq.p
33.19.5 Inventory Data Report spiprp.p
33.19.7 Production Data Inquiry spppiq.p
33.19.8 Production Data Report sppprp.p
33.19.13 Performance Inquiry spplat.p
33.19.14 Performance Report spplrp.p

35. EDI ECommerce Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
35 EDI ECommerce Menu ...
35.1 Document Import edixsnf.p
35.4 Document Export Menu ...
35.4.1 Shipment ASN Export edomasn.p
35.4.2 Consignment Usage Export edomsi.p
35.4.3 Invoice Export edominv.p
35.4.4 Purchase Order Ack. Maintenance edompoak.p
35.4.5 Purchase Order Acknowledgment edomack.p
35.4.8 Supplier Shipping Schedule edomsch.p
35.4.9 Purchase Order Export edompo.p
35.4.11 Supplier Self Billing Export edomvchr.p
35.4.13 Inventory Cycle Count Export edomcyct.p
35.4.15 Packing List Export edompick.p
35.4.16 DO Packing List Export edomdopk.p
35.4.17 Price Catalog Export edompc.p
35.4.18 Warehouse Shipment Advice edomdosh.p
170 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

35.4.20 Generic Gateway Export edomgngw.p
35.4.23 Export Reprocessing edoxrpr.p
35.7 Session Report edpsrp.p
35.9 Import/Export Session Menu ...
35.9.1 Exchange Doc Status Inquiry edxfsiq.p
35.9.2 Exchange Doc Status Report edxfsrp.p
35.9.3 Exchange Data Repository Maintenance edxrmt.p
35.9.4 Exchange Data Repository Inquiry edxriq.p
35.9.5 Exchange Data Repository Report edxrrp.p
35.9.8 Application Doc Status Inquiry edmfsiq.p
35.9.9 Application Doc Status Report edmfsrp.p
35.9.10 Application Data Repository Maintenance edmfrmt.p
35.9.11 Application Data Repository Inquiry edmfriq.p
35.9.12 Application Data Repository Report edmfrrp.p
35.9.13 Exchange/Application Xref Browse edbr021.p
35.9.14 Exchange/Application Xref Report edrrxrp.p
35.9.16 Document Tracking Menu ...
35.9.16.1 Document Tracking Maintenance eddtrkmt.p
35.9.16.3 Document Tracking Inquiry eddtrkiq.p
35.9.16.13 Document Tracking Archive/Delete eddtarch.p
35.9.17 Turnaround Data Maintenance edtarmt.p
35.9.18 Turnaround Data Browse edbr028.p
35.9.19 Turnaround Data Report edtarrp.p
35.9.21 Import Reprocessing edixrpr.p
35.9.22 Export Reprocessing edoxrpr.p
35.11 ECommerce Domain Menu ...
35.11.1 Domain Cross Reference Maintenance eddmnmt.p
35.11.11 Change Current ECommerce Domain eddomchg.p
35.13 ECommerce Setup Menu ...
35.13.1 EC Subsystem Definition Maintenance edssmt.p
35.13.2 EC Subsystem Report edssrp.p
35.13.3 EC Subsystem/Exchange Maintenance edsxxmt.p
35.13.4 EC Subsystem/Exchange Report edsxxrp.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 171

Menu Menu Label Program Name

35.13.5 EC Subsystem/Application Maint edmxxmt.p
35.13.6 EC Subsystem/Application Report edmxxrp.p
35.13.7 Trading Partner Maintenance edtrptmt.p
35.13.8 Trading Partner Browse edbr024.p
35.13.9 Trading Partner Report edtprp.p
35.13.10 Trading Partner Parameter Maintenance edtppmmt.p
35.13.11 Trading Partner Parameter Inq edtppmiq.p
35.13.12 Trading Partner Parameter Report edtpprp.p
35.13.13 Transmission Group Maintenance edtgmt.p
35.13.14 Transmission Group Browse edbr027.p
35.13.15 Transmission Group Report edtgrp.p
35.13.16 Data Cross-Reference Maintenance edxrefmt.p
35.13.17 Data Cross-Reference Browse edbr022.p
35.13.18 Data Cross-Reference Report edxrefrp.p
35.13.19 HTTP Adapter Maintenance edhttpmt.p
35.13.20 HTTP Adapter Report edhttprp.p
35.13.21 Data Validation Maintenance edvalmt.p
35.13.22 Data Validation Browse edbr023.p
35.13.23 Data Validation Report edvalrp.p
35.13.24 ECommerce Control edcpm.p
35.15 Transformation Setup Menu ...
35.15.1 Exchange Definition Copy edxfcp.p
35.15.2 Application Definition Copy edmfcp.p
35.15.3 Implementation Definition Copy edmicp.p
35.15.6 Exchange Definition Maintenance edxfmt.p
35.15.7 Exchange Definition Inquiry edxfiq.p
35.15.8 Exchange Definition Report edxfrp.p
35.15.10 Application Definition Maintenance edmfmt.p
35.15.11 Application Definition Inquiry edmfiq.p
35.15.12 Application Definition Report edmfrp.p
35.15.13 Implementation Definition Maintenance edmimt.p
35.15.14 Implementation Definition Inq edmiiq.p
35.15.15 Implementation Definition Report edmirp.p
172 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

35.15.17 Transformation Definition Maintenance edtrmt.p
35.15.18 Transformation Definition Inq edtriq.p
35.15.19 Transformation Definition Report edtrrp.p
35.15.21 ECommerce Function Maintenance edtrfmt.p
35.15.22 ECommerce Function Inquiry edtrfiq.p
35.15.23 ECommerce Function Report edtrfrp.p
35.17 ECommerce Utilities Menu ...
35.17.1 Transformation Definition Copy edtrcp.p
35.17.2 ECommerce Function Copy edtrfcp.p
35.17.3 Transformation ReNumber Utility edtrrenm.p
35.17.5 Export/Import Controller edioctrl.p
35.17.7 Trading Partner Library Load edtpload.p
35.17.8 Trading Partner Library Unload edtpdstr.p
35.17.13 Inbound Delete/Archive edxfarch.p
35.17.14 Outbound Delete/Archive edmfarch.p
35.17.15 Comment Cross-Ref Archive/Delete edcmarch.p
35.17.16 Turnaround Data Archive/Delete edtararc.p
35.17.21 Trading Partner Para Desc Update utrplpd.p
35.17.22 Update Transformation Variables uxedtrv.p
35.17.24 ECommerce Control edcpm.p
35.22 EMT Menu ...
35.22.1 Manual Ack Resolution edbtbmar.p
35.22.2 Supplier Change Rejection Maintenance edbtbscr.p
35.22.4 Change Management Report edcmfrp.p
35.22.13 ECommerce EMT Manager edectrmg.p
35.22.15 PO Change Ack Export edomackc.p
35.22.16 PO Change Export edompoc.p

36. Manager Functions Menu

Menu Menu Label Program Name
36.1 Domain/Account Control mgglpm.p
36.2 Domain Constants Menu ...
36.2.1 Holiday Maintenance mghdmt.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 173

Menu Menu Label Program Name

36.2.2 Holiday Browse mgbr017.p
36.2.5 Calendar Maintenance mgscmt.p
36.2.6 Calendar Inquiry mgsciq.p
36.2.9 Rounding Method Maintenance mgrndmt.p
36.2.10 Rounding Method Browse adbr016.p
36.2.11 Rounding Method Report mgrndrp.p
36.2.13 Generalized Codes Maintenance mgcodemt.p
36.2.14 Generalized Codes Browse mgbr004.p
36.2.15 Generalized Codes Validation Report mggencrp.p
36.2.17 Reason Codes Maintenance mgrnmt.p
36.2.18 Reason Codes Browse mgbr007.p
36.2.19 Reason Codes Report mgrnrp.p
36.2.21 Number Ranges Menu ...
36.2.21.1 Number Range Maintenance nrsqmt.p
36.2.21.2 Sequence Browse nrbr001.p
36.2.21.5 Sequence Number Maintenance nrnxmt.p
36.2.21.13 Sequence Number History Report nrsqrp.p
36.2.21.23 Sequence Delete/Archive nrsqup.p
36.2.22 Change Tracking Maintenance mgtblcmt.p
36.2.23 Change Tracking Browse mgbr223.p
36.3 System Security Menu ...
36.3.1 User Maintenance mgurmt.p
36.3.2 User Inquiry mguriq.p
36.3.3 User Password Maintenance mgurmtp.p
36.3.4 User Group Maintenance mgurgpmt.p
36.3.5 User Group Inquiry mgurgpiq.p
36.3.9 GL Account Security Maintenance mgacsmt.p
36.3.10 Menu Security Maintenance mgpwmt.p
36.3.11 Menu Security Change mgpwcg.p
36.3.13 Entity Security Maintenance glsecmt.p
36.3.14 Entity Security Inquiry glseciq.p
36.3.15 Site Security Maintenance clsismt.p
36.3.17 Inventory Movement Code Security sosimt.p
174 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

36.3.18 Inv Mvmt Code Security Browse gpbr502.p
36.3.19 Field Security Maintenance mgflpwmt.p
36.3.20 Field Security by Group mgflgpmt.p
36.3.21 Desktop Security Menu ...
36.3.21.1 Program Information Maintenance mgpgmimt.p
36.3.21.2 Program Information Browse mgbr060.p
36.3.21.3 Rule Maintenance mgrulemt.p
36.3.21.4 Rule Master Browse mgbr027.p
36.3.21.5 Constant Maintenance mgcnstmt.p
36.3.21.6 Constant Master Browse mgbr058.p
36.3.21.7 Profile Maintenance mgprofmt.p
36.3.21.8 Profile Master Browse mgbr057.p
36.3.21.9 Profile Program Maintenance mgprpgmt.p
36.3.21.10 Profile Program Browse mgbr035.p
36.3.21.11 Profile Program Rule Maintenance mgpprlmt.p
36.3.21.12 Profile Program Rule Browse mgbr036.p
36.3.21.14 Group Maintenance mggrpmt.p
36.3.21.15 Group Master Browse mgbr032.p
36.3.21.16 Group Constants Value Maintenance mggrcnmt.p
36.3.21.17 Group Constants Value Browse mgbr034.p
36.3.21.18 User Group Security Maintenance mgusrsmt.p
36.3.21.20 User Constants Value Maintenance mguscnmt.p
36.3.21.21 User Constants Value Browse mgbr029.p
36.3.21.23 Reports and Utilities Menu ...
36.3.21.23.1 Profile Master Report mgprofrp.p
36.3.21.23.2 Profile Where-Used Report mgpfwurp.p
36.3.21.23.3 Profile Program Rule Report mgpfrlrp.p
36.3.21.23.4 Profile User Report mgpfusrp.p
36.3.21.23.5 Constant Master Report mgcnstrp.p
36.3.21.23.6 Constant Where-Used Report mgcnwurp.p
36.3.21.23.7 Group Master Report mggrprp.p
36.3.21.23.8 Group Constants Value Report mggrcnrp.p
36.3.21.23.9 Program Constant Report mgpgcnrp.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 175

Menu Menu Label Program Name

36.3.21.23.10 Rule Master Report mgrulerp.p
36.3.21.23.11 Rule Where-Used Report mgrlwurp.p
36.3.21.23.13 User Constants Value Report mguscnrp.p
36.3.21.23.14 User Profile Report mguspfrp.p
36.3.21.23.15 User Profile Program Rule Report mguspprp.p
36.3.21.23.16 Buffer Where-Used Inquiry mgbfwuiq.p
36.3.21.23.18 Program Information Update mgpgmiut.p
36.3.21.23.19 Profile Copy Utility mfgprofcp.p
36.3.21.23.21 Browse UI Records Maintenance mgusrbmt.p
36.3.21.24 Desktop Security Control mgsecpm.p
36.3.22 User Access by Application Inquiry lvusriq.p
36.3.23 Reports and Utilities Menu ...
36.3.23.1 Logon Attempt Report mgurpsrp.p
36.3.23.2 User Account Status Report mguactrp.p
36.3.23.4 User Group Report mgurgprp.p
36.3.23.12 Force Password Change Utility utfrcpsw.p
36.3.23.13 Entity Security Report glsecrp.p
36.3.23.15 Site Security Report clsisrp.p
36.3.23.16 GL Account Security Report mgacsrp.p
36.3.23.19 Activated Field Security Report mgflpwrp.p
36.3.23.20 Dictionary Field Security Report mgfldcrp.p
36.3.24 Security Control mgurpmmt.p
36.4 System Interface Menu ...
36.4.1 Language Code Maintenance mglmmt.p
36.4.3 Language Detail Maintenance mglngumt.p
36.4.4 Menu System Maintenance mgmemt.p
36.4.5 Menu System Report mgmerp.p
36.4.6 Configured Message Maintenance mgcfmmt.p
36.4.7 Message Maintenance mgmsgmt.p
36.4.8 Message Browse mgbr006.p
36.4.9 Message Report mgmsgrp.p
36.4.10 Config Msg Verif Report rcrp14.p
36.4.11 User Function Maintenance mgufmt.p
176 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

36.4.12 User Function Browse mgbr008.p
36.4.13 Field Help Maintenance mgflhusr.p
36.4.14 Field Help Report mgflhdrp.p
36.4.15 Field Help Book Report mgflbook.p
36.4.16 Procedure Help Report mgflprrp.p
36.4.17 Label Menu ...
36.4.17.1 Label Master Maintenance gplblmt.p
36.4.17.2 Label Master Browse gpbr405.p
36.4.17.5 Label Detail Maintenance gplbldmt.p
36.4.17.6 Label Detail Browse by Field gpbr406.p
36.4.17.7 Label Detail Browse by Program gpbr407.p
36.4.17.24 Label Control gplblpm.p
36.4.18 Field Help Dump mgfldmp.p
36.4.19 Field Help Load mgflld.p
36.4.20 E-mail Definition Maintenance mgemmt.p
36.4.21 Report Setup Menu ...
36.4.21.1 Report Maintenance rprprsmt.p
36.4.21.2 Report Synchronization rprpsync.p
36.4.21.3 Report Parameter Maintenance rprpptmt.p
36.4.21.4 Report Parameter Synchronization rpptsync.p
36.4.21.13 Admin User Variant Maintenance rpuvmt01.p
36.4.21.14 Personal Use Variant Maintenance rpuvmt02.p
36.4.21.21 Report Resource Import rprroim.p
36.4.21.22 Report Resource Export rprroex.p
36.4.21.24 Report Control rppm.p
36.5 External Interface Menu ...
36.5.3 Sales and Use Tax Interface Menu ...
36.5.3.1 Tax Interface Startup Utility vqstart.p
36.5.3.2 Tax Interface Shutdown Utility vqshut.p
36.5.3.13 Tax Zone Update Utility vqadtzup.p
36.5.3.24 Tax Interface Control vqpm.p
36.5.5 Planning Interfaces...
36.5.5.1 Planning Data Export giapexp.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 177

Menu Menu Label Program Name

36.5.5.2 Planning Schedule Import giapimp.p
36.5.5.13 APO Model Definition giapommt.p
36.5.5.14 APO ATP Site/Item Definition giaposmt.p
36.5.5.16 APO ATP Inquiry giapoiq.p
36.5.5.24 APO ATP Control giapopm.p
36.5.7 Logistics Interface Menu ...
36.5.7.1 Logistics System Maintenance lglgsmt.p
36.5.7.2 Logistics System-Site Reference lgsimt.p
36.5.7.4 Logistics Item Cost Export lgsctex.p
36.5.7.6 Logistics Inventory Export lgldref.p
36.5.7.12 Sales Order Owner Change lgsocown.p
36.5.7.13 Mass Item Export lgmssyit.p
36.5.7.14 Mass Customer Export lgsycu3e.p
36.5.7.15 Mass AR Balance Export lgmsarex.p
36.5.7.18 Item Owner Browse lgbr003.p
36.5.7.19 Customer Owner Browse lgbr004.p
36.5.7.20 Sales Order Owner Browse lgbr005.p
36.5.7.21 External Order Cross-Reference gprxiq.p
36.5.9 Demand Planning Menu ...
36.5.9.1 Demand Planning Export gidpexp.p
36.5.9.2 Demand Planning Import gidpimp.p
36.5.9.13 DP Site/Item Definition Maint gidpsimt.p
36.5.9.14 DP Site/Item Inquiry gidpiq.p
36.5.9.15 DP Site/Item Report gidprpt.p
36.5.9.16 DP Site/Item Definition Update gidpsiup.p
36.5.9.24 Demand Planning Control gidppm.p
36.5.24 Transaction Export Report/Delete witerp.p
36.6 Multiple Database Menu ...
36.6.1 Database Connection Maintenance mgdcmt.p
36.6.2 Database Connection Inquiry mgdciq.p
36.6.3 Database Connection Report mgdcrp.p
36.6.13 Database Connect mgdccn.p
36.6.15 Database Disconnect mgdcdc.p
178 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

36.8 Q/LinQ ...
36.8.1 Q/LinQ Setup Menu ...
36.8.1.1 Register External Application qqaprmt.p
36.8.1.2 Export Specification Maintenance qqespmt.p
36.8.1.3 Import Specification Maintenance qqispmt.p
36.8.1.4 Export/Import Specification Copy qqspeccp.p
36.8.1.5 Export/Import Specification List qqspclst.p
36.8.1.20 Code Mapping Maintenance qqcodmt.p
36.8.1.21 Code Mapping Inquiry qqcodiq.p
36.8.5 Interface Session Monitor qqsesmon.p
36.8.7 Send Export Documents qqsnd.p
36.8.8 Destination List Maintenance qqdalmt.p
36.8.9 Receive Import Documents qqrcv.p
36.8.10 Process Import Documents qqimprc.p
36.8.11 Debug CIM Document qqimdbug.p
36.8.12 Process Received Acknowledgment qqprcack.p
36.8.13 Dump Export/Import Doc for Edit qqdp.p
36.8.14 Reload Edited Export/Import Doc qqld.p
36.8.15 Document Control Tag Maintenance qqtagmt.p
36.8.16 Export/Import Document Query qqbr.p
36.8.17 Export/Import Document Report qqierp.p
36.8.18 Dump Export/Import Docs to File qqwrt.p
36.8.22 Data Synchronization Setup Menu ...
36.8.22.1 Synchronization Profile Maintenance qqsypmt.p
36.8.22.2 Synchronization Profile Inquiry qqsypiq.p
36.8.22.3 Sync Table–Field Maintenance qqsytfmt.p
36.8.22.4 Sync Table–Field Browse qqbr030.p
36.8.22.8 Synchronization Mass Export qqsymsex.p
36.8.23 Export/Import Doc Delete/Archive qqrup.p
36.8.24 Q/LinQ Control qqctrmnt.p
36.10 Domain Menu ...
36.10.1 Domain Maintenance mgdommt.p
36.10.2 Domain Browse mgbr225.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 179

Menu Menu Label Program Name

36.10.3 Domain Report mgdomrp.p
36.10.13 Change Current Domain mgdomchg.p
36.12 Enhanced Controls Menu ...
36.12.1 Audit Trail Report - Existing atexrp.p
36.12.2 Audit Trail Report - Deleted atdelrp.p
36.12.4 E-Signature Events Report esevtrp.p
36.12.5 E-Signature History Report eshstrp.p
36.12.7 E-Signature Failure Report esflrp.p
36.12.13 Audit Trail Setup Menu ...
36.12.13.1 Audit Group Maintenance attgmt.p
36.12.13.2 Audit Group Report atgrrp.p
36.12.13.4 Audit Workbench Refresh atwpref.p
36.12.13.5 Audit Workbench Profile Maintenance atwpmt.p
36.12.13.6 Audit Workbench Profile Report atwprp.p
36.12.13.8 Audit Profile Activation atwpact.p
36.12.13.9 Activated Audit Profile Report ataprp.p
36.12.13.11 Audit DB Maintenance atdbmt.p
36.12.13.12 Audit DB Report atdbrp.p
36.12.13.23 Audit Trail Creation Process atttpui.p
36.12.13.24 Audit Trail Control atpm.p
36.12.14 E-Signature Setup Manu ...
36.12.14.1 E-Signature Group Maintenance escgmt.p
36.12.14.2 E-Signature Group Report esgrrp.p
36.12.14.4 E-Signature Workbench Refresh eswpref.p
36.12.14.5 E-Sig Workbench Profile Maintenance eswpmt.p
36.12.14.6 E-Sig Workbench Profile Report eswprp.p
36.12.14.8 E-Signature Profile Activation eswpact.p
36.12.14.9 Activated E-Sig Profile Report esacrp.p
36.12.14.11 E-Sig Category Master Report escatrp.p
36.12.14.21 E-Sig Failure Archive/Delete esesigup.p
36.12.14.22 E-Signature Archive/Delete esesup.p
36.12.14.23 E-Signature Restore esesld.p
36.13 Printer Management Menu ...
180 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

36.13.1 Printer Type Maintenance mgmgmt04.p
36.13.2 Printer Setup Maintenance mgmgmt05.p
36.13.4 Printer Default Maintenance mgupmt.p
36.13.5 Printer Default Browse mgbr009.p
36.13.13 Print Queue Maintenance mgmgmt07.p
36.14 Batch Processing Menu ...
36.14.1 Batch ID Maintenance mgbcmt.p
36.14.3. Batch Request Detail Maintenance mgbcdmt.p
36.14.4 Batch Request Detail Browse mgbr227.p
36.14.5 Batch Request Detail Report mgbcdrp.p
36.14.13 Batch Request Processor mgbatch.p
36.15 CIM Interface Menu ...
36.15.1 CIM Data Load mgbdld.p
36.15.2 CIM Data Load Processor mgbdpro.p
36.15.3 CIM Data Load Report/Delete mgbdrp.p
36.15.4 CIM Data Load Process Monitor mgbdmon.p
36.16 Database Management Menu ...
36.16.1 Database Table Size Inquiry mgdbiq.p
36.16.2 Database Table Size Report mgdbrp.p
36.16.3 Database Table Dump/Load mgdl.p
36.16.4 Database Table Dump/Load w/Batch mgdmpld.p
36.16.5 Archive File Reload mghstld.p
36.16.10 License Registration Menu
36.16.10.1 License Registration lvreg.p
36.16.10.3 License Registration Report lvlarrp.p
36.16.10.8 Application Usage Profile Report lvauprp.p
36.16.10.13 Detailed License Violation Report lvlvdrp.p
36.16.10.14 Summary License Violation Report lvlvsrp.p
36.16.12 User Monitor Inquiry lvmon.p
36.16.13 Sequence Maintenance mgsqmt01.p
36.16.14 Sequence Inquiry mgsqiq01.p
36.16.15 Sequence Report mgsqrp01.p
36.16.17 Database Sequence Initialization utsequp.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 181

Menu Menu Label Program Name

36.16.22 Multiple Time Zones Setup Menu ...
36.16.22.1 Multiple Time Zones Maintenance fstzomt.p
36.16.22.2 Multiple Time Zones Inquiry fstzoiq.p
36.16.22.3 Multiple Time Zones Report fstzorp.p
36.16.22.4 Multiple Time Zones Load Utility uttzld.p
36.17 Master Data Reports Menu ...
36.17.1 Master Data Audit Report mgaurp.p
36.17.2 Master Data Audit Detail Report mgaudrp.p
36.17.5 Master Comments Report gpcmrp.p
36.17.6 Control Table Report mgpmrp.p
36.18 System Cross-Reference Menu ...
36.18.1 Tables/Fields by Menu Report utxrrp02.p
36.18.2 Tables/Fields by Program Report utxrrp10.p
36.18.4 Menu Items by Field Report utxrrp03.p
36.18.5 Menu Items by Table Report utxrrp13.p
36.18.6 Menu Items by Message Report utxrrp07.p
36.18.8 Messages by Menu Item Report utxrrp06.p
36.18.13 Programs by Field Report utxrrp11.p
36.18.14 Programs by Table Report utxrrp14.p
36.18.16 Program Source File Report utxrrp04.p
36.18.17 Program Run Report utxrrp12.p
36.18.19 Source File Where-Used Summary utxrrp05.p
36.18.20 Source File Where-Used Detail utxrrp08.p
36.18.21 Run Program Where-Used Detail utxrrp09.p
36.18.23 Program Summary Bill File Create utxrsb.p
36.18.24 Cross-Reference Update Menu ...
36.18.24.1 Cross-Reference Update from Src utxrup.p
36.18.24.3 Menu Item Cross Reference Create utxrbl.p
36.18.24.5 Permanent Prog Link Maintenance utxrmt.p
36.18.24.13 Cross-Reference Entries Report utxrrp90.p
36.18.24.15 Missing Component Program Report utxrrp91.p
36.18.24.16 Missing Menu Execution File Report utxrrp92.p
36.18.24.18 Programs with no Menu Exec Report utxrrp93.p
182 User Guide — Introduction

Menu Menu Label Program Name

36.18.24.23 Obsolete Cross-Reference Delete utxrdel.p
36.19 AppServer Menu ...
36.19.1 AppServer Service Maintenance mgasmt.p
36.19.2 AppServer Service Browse mgbr222.p
36.20 UI: Manager Functions ...
36.20.1 Drill Down/Lookup Maintenance mgdlfhmt.p
36.20.2 Drill Down Browse mgbr001.p
36.20.3 Lookup Browse mgbr005.p
36.20.4 User Tool Maintenance mgtoolmt.p
36.20.6 Menu Substitution Maintenance mgmsmt.p
36.20.7 Menu Substitution Browse mgbr013.p
36.20.10 Desktop Menu ...
36.20.10.1 User Option Maintenance mgusromt.p
36.20.10.2 User Option Browse mgbr062.p
36.20.10.3 User Option Telnet Maintenance mgusrtmt.p
36.20.10.4 User Option Report mgusrrp.p
36.20.10.8 Menu URL Maintenance mgurlmt.p
36.20.10.9 Menu URL Browse mgbr220.p
36.20.10.11 Browse URL Maintenance mgburlmt.p
36.20.10.12 Browse URL Browse mgbr221.p
36.20.10.15 Session Master Maintenance mgsessmt.p
36.20.13 Browse Maintenance mgbwmt.p
36.20.14 Browse Master Browse mgbr003.p
36.20.15 Browse Detail by Field mgbr040.p
36.20.18 View Maintenance mgvwmt.p
36.20.19 View Browse mgbr020.p
36.20.21 Browse Link Maintenance mgbplmt.p
36.20.22 Browse Link Browse mgbr240.p
36.22 Operating Sytems Command Menu ...
36.22.1 Exit to Operating System mgoscall.p
36.22.3 Program Execute mgmgmt24.p
36.22.4 Program/Text File Display mgfdsply.p
36.22.13 Disk Space Inquiry mgdfds.p
 Menu and Program Name Listing 183

Menu Menu Label Program Name

36.23 Archive/Delete Utilities Menu ...
36.23.1 Audit Detail Delete/Archive mgaudup.p
36.23.2 GL Transaction Delete/Archive mgmgrp01.p
36.23.3 Logon History Archive/Delete mguslhup.p
36.24 Database Control mgdbpm.p
184 User Guide — Introduction
 Glossary
A Account. One component of an account
number defined in GL setup functions. Other
ABC Class. A classification and ranking components of an account number are sub-
system based on annual dollar usage of account, cost center, and project. Accounts
inventory. track company-wide assets, liabilities, equities,
• Class A inventory items have the highest expenses, and revenues.
annual usage and receive the most attention.
Account Currency. The currency used by a
• Class B items have lower annual usage and
are controlled using reorder point. GL account.
• Class C items have the lowest annual usage. Accounting Period. Economic cycle for
Inventory value is determined by annual which financial records are maintained; for
usage, unit cost, lead time, space available example, a calendar year or a fiscal year.
for storage, and quality.
Accounts Payable. Liabilities resulting from
Absorbed Tax. A sales tax not passed on to the
purchasing transactions.
customer.
Accounts Payable Variance. The difference
Abstract Class. A class with no instances.
between invoice price and purchase order cost.
Abstract classes organize a class hierarchy or Calculated when the supplier invoice is
define methods and variables for subclasses. vouchered in Accounts Payable.
Also called virtual class.
Accounts Receivable. Financial claims
Accelerated Depreciation. Depreciation
resulting from sales transactions.
methods that provide greater depreciation
expense in the earlier years of an asset’s Accrued Revenue. In accrual-basis
economic life. Examples include accounting, revenue is recorded in the period in
declining-balance and sum-of-the-years’-digits which it is earned, regardless of whether cash
methods. is received in that period. Accrued revenue is a
billing option for service contracts that are
Accessory. An additional, non-required
billed at the end of the service duration.
component of a configured end product. For
example, a CD player is an accessory for a car. Accumulated Expense Account. A GL
Options and accessories can be organized in account used to track the amount of
feature groups. See also Option and Feature depreciation that has accumulated and been
Group. posted since the start of the depreciation
calculation.
186 User Guide — Introduction

Acquisition Cost. The amount required to AICPA. See American Institute of Certified
purchase a fixed asset. Public Accountants (AICPA).
Action Message. A system message usually Algorithm. A step-by-step problem-solving
created during MRP calculations to call procedure.
attention to a current or potential problem and
Allocation. The act of reserving inventory for
suggest corrective action.
a specific purpose. Does not name specific
Active Schedule. The supplier schedule inventory, and no physical movement of
currently in force. Only one schedule per order inventory takes place.
line item can be active at a time.
Alpha Factor. A smoothing factor used in
Advance Ship Notice (ASN). An electronic forecast methods 03 and 04. Alpha closer to
document derived from a shipper document zero applies increasingly equal weight to all
and sent by a supplier to a customer when a sales history. Alpha closer to one increasingly
shipment leaves the supplier site, informing the favors recent sales history.
customer that the shipment is on the way. ASN
Alternate Routing. A routing used instead of
formats are defined for various international
the primary routing. Results in an identical
standards; for example, an 856 Transaction Set
item.
per ANSI ASC X12. An ASN takes the place
of an invoice in some supplier-customer American Institute of Certified Public
arrangements. See Electronic Data Interchange Accountants (AICPA). Organization that
(EDI). establishes standards of financial accounting
and reporting for the private sector.
Advanced Planning and Scheduling (APS).
A type of planning and scheduling system that Amortization. Some capital expenditures,
considers: primarily non-tangibles, can be amortized
• Static item and resource data such as shop rather than depreciated. This method generally
calendars, product structures, and routings uses a straight-line method over a specific time
• Sources of supply and demand period. Items that could be eligible for
amortization include trademarks, certain
• Multiple material and capacity constraints
start-up expenses, software, and other
• A set of predefined business objectives
intangible assets.
Based on this data, the APS system determines
the production schedule that best meets both Analysis Code. (1) For the GL Report Writer,
the established resource constraints and the identifies user-defined reporting hierarchies for
business objectives of the enterprise. See also grouping and linking GL elements of any of
Finite Capacity Scheduling (FCS) and five segment types: entity, account, cost center,
Optimized Schedule. sub-account, and project. (2) A code used to
group items or customers for pricing.
AETC. See Authorized Excess Transportation
Code (AETC). ANSI. American National Standards Institute,
the United States organization responsible for
AIAG. Automotive Industry Action Group. A
approving National Standards and the parent
nonprofit trade association of North American organization of ASC X12. This group is the
vehicle manufacturers and suppliers. recognized coordinator and clearinghouse for
information in the U.S. and, in some cases,
 Glossary 187

Canadian national business standards. It also ASN. See Advance Ship Notice (ASN).
serves as the North American representative to Assay. A test of the physical and chemical
the International Organization of properties of a sample.
Standardization (ISO).
Assemble to Order (ATO). To assemble an
Application. A program addressing a specific
end item from stocked assemblies according to
business function. a customer order. ATO describes one type of
Application Program Interface (API). A set of configured product, which must be assembled
routines, protocols, and tools that connect on a final assembly work order. An ATO item
applications, usually for the purpose of sharing is contrasted with a kit, which requires no
data. assembly. See Kit.
Applied Payments. Payments made toward Assembly. A group of components that, when
specific invoices, memos, or finance charges. put together, make up an end item or a higher
level configuration.
Apportioning Method. The method by which
the total invoice amount from a third-party Assembly Items List. A list of items and
logistics supplier is allocated to individual line subassemblies used in manufacturing an
items on a purchase order. assembly.
APS. See Advanced Planning and Scheduling Asset Account. A GL account used to track
(APS). the acquisition cost of a fixed asset.
As-Built Configuration. Detailed information Asset Suspense Account. A GL account
about the actual components making up a used to track the remaining value of a fixed
manufactured or configured item. Derived by asset when it is disposed of.
examining the transaction history created by ATP. See Available to Promise (ATP).
the work order on which the item is built. Can
be used to update the installed base for service/ Attribute. A property, such as a variable,
support. encapsulated in a component. Properties define
a component’s appearance and state.
ASCII. American Standard Code for
Information Interchange. Standard method for Audit Profile. A record associated with a
representing characters on computers. specific database table that contains
information that controls the table auditing,
ASC X12. American National Standards
including a detailed list of fields and field types
Institute Accredited Standards Committee X12. in the table, a logical field that determines
This committee develops and maintains U.S. whether auditing is enabled, and a list of delete
generic standards for electronic data event keys associated with the table.
interchange. Generically, X12 refers to any of
the standards that have been published by the AUTHNBR Unique Days. Number of days an
ANSI ASC X12 committee as well as any of authorization number must remain unique,
the industry-specific standards that are a subset when authorization numbers are included in
of any ANSI X12 standard. schedule requirement detail.
188 User Guide — Introduction

Authorized Excess Transportation Code standard cost. Each time a receipt is processed,
(AETC). A shipping term consisting of a the average cost of the item is recalculated and
combination of reason code, responsibility inventory is revalued. Also known as normal
code, and authorization code. The reason code costing.
usually indicates who is responsible—
Average Costs per Unit. The total cost to
customer or supplier—for excess freight on a
produce a quantity of goods divided by the
shipment.
total number of units.
Available. An inventory status that indicates to
Average Weeks of Coverage. The factor
the system that items can be used to fill
specifying an item’s desired global inventory
demand.
coverage level. Affects either family plans or
Available Inventory. On-hand inventory operations plans, depending on when you
balance less allocations, backorders, and calculate target inventory levels. Used by plan
quantities held for quality problems. Often calculations to determine target inventory
called beginning available balance. levels based on sales forecasts.
Available (Shift) Hours. Number of weekly Averaging Interval. The time unit used in
shift hours available for production. The calculating averages. A larger averaging
system calculates shift hours based on holidays interval causes the average to be less affected
and the shift calendar or shop calendar. by large variations.
Available to Promise (ATP). The
uncommitted portion of inventory or planned
production, maintained in the master schedule B
to support customer order promising. ATP
Back Scheduling. A scheduling technique that
quantity is the uncommitted inventory balance
begins with the due date for an order and works
in the first period and is normally calculated for
backward to determine the required start date
each period in which a Master Production
and/or due dates for an operation.
Schedule (MPS) receipt is scheduled. In the
first period, ATP equals on-hand inventory less Backflush. The automatic recording of
customer orders due and overdue. In any component/raw material issues based on:
period containing MPS scheduled receipts, • The quantity of end items received, and
ATP equals MPS minus customer orders for the • The quantity per of the component from the
period and all subsequent periods before the end item’s bill of material
next MPS scheduled receipt. A negative ATP Can be used for both work order and repetitive
reduces prior period ATP. production, as well as shipping of kit
Available Work. Work on hand and ready to be configured items. Backflush quantity for a base
performed. Differs from scheduled work that process is used to calculate the issue
may not yet be physically on hand. (backflush) quantities for co-products and
by-products.
Average Costs. A costing method that keeps a
running average of an item’s costs. A simple Backlog. (1) All customer orders received but
weighted average is used to track material and not shipped. Also known as open orders. (2)
labor costs, while overhead is tracked as a The difference between work input and output
at a work center. Also known as queue.
 Glossary 189

Backlog Plan. Plan that includes projected Base Process. A process resulting in the
number of open orders for a given product line production of co-products and by-products.
at a given site in any month. Also records the Has an item master number and a BOM or
actual number for comparison. formula code specifying the co-products and
by-products. Components can be linked to it,
Backorder. An unfilled portion of an order or
but these are not required.
commitment. Represents an immediate (or past
due) demand against an item where inventory Base Value. The item price or cost.
is insufficient to satisfy demand.
Basis. See Depreciable Basis.
Balance Sheet. A financial report showing
Batch. (1) A standard run or lot size,
what resources (assets and liabilities) the
determined by container size, convention, line
company has accumulated over time and
rates, and/or standard run length. (2) In Fixed
current equity (Equity = Assets – Liability).
Assets, a group of similar fixed assets added
Bar Code. A series of alternating bars and together into the system. Fixed-asset batches
spaces printed or stamped on parts, containers, have no relation or similarity to batches used in
labels, or other media representing encoded other financial modules. (3) A group of
information that can be read electronically. transactions processed together.
BASDA. Business and Accounting Software Batch Number. (1) A number used for tracing
Developers Association. Recognized within groups of work orders through a batch-oriented
the software development industry and various process. (2) An ID for tracking a group of
standards organizations as the authority on the transactions processed together.
introduction of the euro and its effects on
Batch Processing. A computer technique
accounting software packages.
where transactions are accumulated and
Base Currency. The currency in which your processed together.
company does business. It is specified in
Batch Work Order. A streamlined work order
Domain/Account Control and used for
that does not yet have a bill or routing.
recording all transactions.
Operations Plan Explosion generates work
Base Currency Account. An account orders to satisfy end-item plan demands. For
denominated in the functional base currency of items defined as co-products, the explosion
the database. creates batch work orders (Status B) for the
base process. When you change the work order
Base Increase/Decrease. A constant
status from B to F, the system generates firm
multiplier applied to monthly forecast
planned work orders for the co-products and
quantities.
by-products associated with the base process.
Base Percent. The portion of an item or trailer See Firm Planned Work Order.
charge amount that is taxable.
Before Image File. The mechanism used for
storing changes made to data in the database. It
is primarily used to restore the internal
integrity of the database if processing errors
occur.
190 User Guide — Introduction

Beginning Available Balance. Available Blanket Purchase Order. A long-term

inventory. commitment to a supplier for products, against
which short-term releases are generated to
Best Fit Method. Of the possible system-
satisfy requirements. When needed, a release is
defined forecast methods (01-06), the best fit
made against the blanket order, resulting in a
method calculates forecast using the other
purchase order.
system-defined methods and chooses results
with the least mean absolute deviation. Blending. The process of physically mixing
two or more lots of material to produce a
Bill in Arrears. To bill a customer for a service
homogeneous lot.
after it is performed.
Blow-Through. A product structure coding
Bill of Labor. See Bill of Resources.
and structuring technique used primarily for
Bill of Lading (BOL). Detailed breakdown of a phantom (non-stocked) subassemblies. Permits
shipment; for example, products shipped, total MRP logic to bypass a phantom item to
weight of product, and containers used for determine requirements for the phantom item’s
packing. Typically, this is a third-party carrier’s components. Usually retains the ability to net
contract and receipt for goods transported against occasional inventories of the phantom
between two points and deliverable to a item. See Phantom.
specified individual.
BOL. See Bill of Lading (BOL).
Bill of Material (BOM). A listing of all
BOM. See Bill of Material (BOM).
subassemblies, components, and raw materials
of a parent assembly. Shows the quantity of BOM Code. A code uniquely identifying a
each required to make one parent assembly. product structure or formula.
Also called a product structure or formula.
BOM Explosion. Demand for components of a
Used with a master production schedule to
parent item calculated by multiplying parent
determine items for which purchase
item requirements by component usage
requisitions and production orders must be
quantity specified in a bill of material.
released.
BOM Type. A code specifying the type of
Bill of Resources. A list of key resources
BOM and routing to be used on a preventive
needed to manufacture one unit of a specified
maintenance schedule associated with a
product. Shows the timing and duration of each
contract.
resource relative to the due date of the product.
Used with a master production schedule to Book Inventory. An accounting definition of
determine the total load on each resource by inventory units and/or value obtained from
time period. Also known as bill of labor or perpetual inventory records rather than by
product load profile. actual count.
Billable. Charges incurred that are to be Book Service Date. The service date used for
invoiced. calculating depreciation.
Bottleneck. Any facility, department, or work
center delaying production. Usually a work
center where work orders arrive faster than
they leave.
 Glossary 191

Browse. A screen containing information C

already entered into the system. Drill-down
browses let you filter, sort, graph, or print Calendar Days. All days of the year, workdays
information. Look-up browses let you display and non-workdays. Typically used to schedule
selected data and choose a value to use. purchase order due dates.

Bucket. A system in which information is Call. Any type of contact generating a service
accumulated into time periods such as weekly response.
or monthly. Call Activity Recording (CAR). The recording
Bucketless System. A system where time- of actual time, materials, and expenses
phased data is processed, stored, and displayed consumed in handling a call.
using dated records rather than defined time Call Escalation. The automatic forwarding of
buckets. calls not resolved within a certain time.
Burden Cost. A variable overhead cost that Call Invoice Recording (CIR). The generation
varies with an item’s manufacturing time. of pending invoices based on activity managed
Cannot be directly related to individual in Call Activity Recording.
products. Examples are heating, rent, and
Call Management. Processes and tools for
maintenance.
managing the solution of a service contact.
Burden Rate. A cost, usually in dollars per
Capacity. The maximum work load for a work
hour, normally added to the cost of every
center, machine, and so on.
standard production hour to cover overhead
expenses. Capacity Management. The establishing,
measuring, monitoring, and adjusting of
Business Unit. Any supplying or
capacity levels for the long, medium, and short
manufacturing organization in a supply chain
range. Determines the resources required to
that uses Enterprise Material Transfer
meet production schedules. Includes resource
functionality. Also called entity. See also,
planning, capacity requirements planning, and
Primary Business Unit (PBU) and Secondary
input/output control.
Business Unit (SBU).
Capacity Requirements Plan (CRP). The
Buyer. The individual responsible for
determination of labor and machine resources
purchasing. Buyer duties include vendor
required to accomplish the tasks of production.
selection, negotiation, order placement, follow-
Used for medium-range capacity management
up; evaluation of new materials, processes, or
to determine and then provide the resources
vendor performance; and value analyses.
required to meet detailed item schedules
By-product. A product that is an incidental established by MRP.
result of a process and usually has little sales
Capped Tax. A tax having a maximum
value. Recyclable products and waste products
amount. For example, tax is assessed only on
are types of by-products.
the first $700.00 of the transaction amount.
CAR. See Call Activity Recording (CAR).
Carrier. A business entity responsible for the
transportation of goods
192 User Guide — Introduction

Carrying Cost. Costs involved in storing and Charge Type. A code corresponding to a
maintaining inventory. Includes invested service type defined in RMA/RTS Control that
capital invested, taxes, insurance, enables you to modify the level of service
obsolescence, and spoilage. Carrying cost is provided for individual line items on an RMA.
usually represented as a percent of the value
CHUI. See Character User Interface.
per unit of time, usually one year.
CIM. See Computer Integrated Manufacturing
Category. An item classification created by the
(CIM).
user.
CIM Data Loading. An automated process for
Cellular Manufacturing. A manufacturing
importing data, usually from non-QAD 2008 -
process that produces families of items within a
Standard application databases. CIM load
single line or cell of machines operated by
emulates entering data through the user
machinists who work only within the line or
interface (UI) and performs all UI validations.
cell.
CIM Interface. A program that imports
Change Management Records. Records that
transaction data from an external file or system
track pending changes made to EMT sales
and loads it into the QAD 2008 - Standard
orders during their life cycle. When a change is
application.
accepted or rejected, the record is deleted.
CIR. See Call Invoice Recording (CIR).
Changeover. The refitting of equipment to
neutralize the effects of just-completed Class. In Fixed Assets, classes group fixed
production, or to prepare for production of the assets with common characteristics such as:
next scheduled item. • GL accounts
Character User Interface. An interface that • Depreciation books
displays only keyboard characters on the • Service lives for calculating depreciation
screen rather than icons and forms. Sometimes • Depreciation methods
abbreviated as CUI or CHUI. Closed Loop MRP. A system for production
Charge Code. (1) In a service context, a code planning, control, and execution built around
used to determine payment responsibility for MRP, in which all functions are included in the
work recorded against a call. Usually, a single system and all provide feedback to keep the
charge code is defined for warranty, contract, resulting production plan valid. The plan is
covered, giveaway, billable, and fixed billable. then executed using MRP, shop floor control,
Sometimes an additional charge code is and purchasing. See Manufacturing Resource
defined for a particular project or service. Planning (MRP II).
(2) In Logistics Accounting, charge codes Closed Work Order. A work order for which
represent logistics charges incurred and products have been received into inventory and
payable to a third-party supplier when there are no outstanding component
purchasing or shipping items. requirements or labor time tickets.
Charge Product Line. The product line used
to provide non-sales related general ledger
account numbers for the cost of activity
recorded against a call.
 Glossary 193

Closing Rate Method. A method used to Computer Integrated Manufacturing (CIM).

translate financial statements. The closing rate An electronic bridge networking separate
method translates all assets and liabilities with computer systems into a coherent, integrated
the closing exchange rate effective at the time whole.
of reporting. This approach is based on the
Concurrent Session. An individual
view that a foreign subsidiary is a unit separate
session that was launched against a database at
from the domestic parent company.
the customer site and uses QAD application
Code. A unique combination of letters and/or software. Contrast with Named User or
numbers identifying a specific record. Location.
COGS. See Cost of Goods Sold (COGS). Configured Messaging. The process in which
Column Group. A set of user-defined columns
a system message is tied to a program name
that identify the data, period, and calculations and a user-determined error severity level.
used when the column group is added to a Configured Product. A product in which
report in the GL Report Writer. different end-item combinations can be made
Column Type. An attribute of a column in a
from a relatively small number of assembly
column group. Values are: options.
• Actual. Actual posted amounts are included Connection Domain. A domain associated
in the column. with a connected database, not the current
• Budget. Budgeted amounts are included. A working database.
budget code is specified to indicate the
Consignment. Describes the process of a
budget for extraction.
supplier placing material at a customer location
• Calculation. The column performs
without receiving payment until after the goods
calculations on other columns or cells.
are used or sold.
Component. (1) Raw material, part or
Consolidated Entity. A separate entity that
subassembly that goes into a higher level
consolidates the financial results of a company
assembly, compound, or other item.
and its subsidiaries. The only accounting
Manufacturing plants use component
activities that occur in this entity are parent
information to determine how much of each
consolidation entries, subsidiary consolidation
material is required to assemble an item. (2) In
entries, and consolidation adjustments. Entries
Fixed Assets, a component is part of a fixed
made in the consolidated entity are not pushed
asset if the asset contains more than one item.
back to the operating entities.
For example, a computer is a fixed asset that
contains three components: the mouse, Consolidation. The addition of the accounting
keyboard, and CPU. records for two or more business units, subject
to rules dictated by accounting practice and
Composite Lead Time. See Cumulative Lead
legislation. Translation is necessary when the
Time.
business units are in different base currencies.
Compound Interest. Interest on accumulated
unpaid interest and on the original principal.
194 User Guide — Introduction

Consolidation Domain. Refers to the domain Control Accounts. An account that takes the
where consolidation takes place. This can be a place of individual accounts after they are
domain set up specifically for this purpose moved to the sub-ledger. It shows the debits
only, but this does not have to be the case. You and credits in summary form. The debits and
can use a domain that represents an active credits can be found in detail in the sub-ledger.
business operation in the database. When sub-ledgers are used, each amount is
posted twice: once to the sub-ledger and once
Consolidation Entry. An unposted GL entry
to the general ledger control account. The sum
created in the consolidated entity. The
of the individual account balances in the
consolidation entry imports the financial period
sub-ledger should be equal to the balance in the
activity of the subsidiary and parent entities to
GL control account.
the consolidated entity and translates the data
according to either the closing rate method or Control Programs. Programs defining how
temporal rate method. processing takes place within the system. Can
be as simple as maintaining the next customer
Consolidation Set. A way of identifying the
number or as complex as defining product
group of subsidiary entities with GL
allocation rules. Should be initialized before
transactions that need to be reported by a
using any module in the system.
parent entity. The system uses attributes of the
consolidation set to manage the GL Control Record Structures. In EDI
consolidation process. ECommerce, EC subsystem-dependent
exchange file definitions indicating:
Construction in Process Account. A GL
account used to track the purchase cost of a • How exchange file records are identified
fixed asset. during import or created during export.
• Which record in the exchange file and which
Consuming Destination. The point of usage positions in the record contain the trading
for a kanban-controlled item. partner and trading partner document IDs
retrieved during import or created during
Container. A packing item used to hold goods
export.
and subsets of other containers such as a box,
pallet, rack, or trailer. Controlled Substances. A set of control and
reporting functions for monitoring compliance
Container ID. A unique number assigned by
with regulatory agency requirements.
the system to a specific container for a specific
shipment. Controlling Hierarchy. In the GL Report
Writer, an analysis code used to produce a full
Containerization. A shipment method in
iteration of a report definition for each node in
which commodities are placed in containers,
a hierarchy.
and, after initial loading, are not rehandled
until unloaded at the destination. Conventions. A method for averaging
depreciation in the first and last year of a fixed
Contract Billing. The process of creating a
asset’s life. This is required because assets are
customer invoice based on an agreed-upon
not always acquired on the first day of the year
price for contract coverage.
or disposed of on the last day of the year. The
system supports the following conventions:
• Full Period
 Glossary 195

• Half Period Cost Allocation. A method for assigning costs

• Next Period to co-products.
• Full Quarter • When using standard costs, enter co-product
• Half Quarter allocation percentages in Co/By-Product
• Full Year Maintenance (15.12.1).
• Half Year • When using average and last costs,
co-product allocation percent is determined
• Modified Half Year Version 1 by the allocation method selected in Average
• Modified Half Year Version 2 Cost Method Maintenance (15.12.5).
Co-product. A product that is the intended Cost Center. Optional component of an
result of a base process, and which typically account number defined in GL setup functions.
has sales value. The primary difference Other components of an account number are
between co-products and by-products is that account, sub-account, and project code. Cost
MRP plans a base process to satisfy demand centers provide additional detail on GL reports
for co-products, but not for by-products. and are used with budgets.
Copy Code. Used with analysis codes by the Cost of Goods Account. The general ledger
GL Report Writer to copy a defined item, row account used to record costs of products
group, or column group. Allows for efficient shipped to a customer.
setup of new records.
Cost of Goods Sold (COGS). Material cost of
Correction of Accounting (COA) Operation. items sold. Usually does not include labor.
A method commonly used in Central and
Costed Product Structure. An indented list of
Eastern Europe in which balancing entries are
used to reverse previous debit and credit raw materials, items, and subassemblies
activity. Preferred in some countries because it making up a parent assembly, with required
provides a clear view of how debit and credit quantities and costs for each item. The cost of
activity is affected by corrections. each item is multiplied by the quantity required
to give total cost for the parent assembly.
Cost. See Acquisition Cost.
Coverage. The amount of a service price for
which the service provider is responsible.
Credit Terms. Payment codes designating due
dates, early payment discounts, and interest for
customers and suppliers.
Criteria Template. A group of variables used
to characterize a forecast calculation.
Critical Path. The shortest length of time
required to manufacture a product.
Critical Ratio. A calculation used by
dispatching to set priorities. Calculated by
dividing the time remaining until the due date
by the time remaining to complete the work
196 User Guide — Introduction

order. A ratio of 1 means the work order is on Currency Translation. Restating a monetary
time. Less than 1 means the order is late. amount in a different currency. Also known as
Greater than 1 means the order is ahead of currency conversion.
schedule. Current Exchange Rate. The exchange rate in
CRP. See Capacity Requirements Plan (CRP). effect at reporting or transaction time, which is
used to convert the amount from the
CUI. See Character User Interface.
transaction currency to the base currency.
Cum Start. Cumulative Start Date. The date a
Custodian. Employees responsible for
scheduled order shipment began accumulating
tracking the location of fixed assets.
quantities.
Custom Table. Depreciation tables used as a
Cumulative Accounting. A method of
substitute for the standard depreciation
tracking shipments and receipts in which
methods when calculating depreciation.
trading partners maintain running totals of
Depreciation is calculated by specifying a
required and shipped/received quantities.
depreciation factor for each period and year of
Cumulative Lead Time. The longest possible the asset’s life.
length of time it takes to have an item/product
Customer Order. A request for a product or a
available if you start today with no components
number of products to be delivered by a
in stock or production. For any item planned
specified date. Often referred to as an actual
through MRP, lead time is found by reviewing
demand, as distinct from a forecast demand.
the lead time for each bill of material path
below the item, and taking the largest time. Customer Schedule. A cumulative, schedule-
driven sales order from a customer with
Cumulative Manufacturing Lead Time. The
multiple line items from which releases of
cumulative planned lead time when all
shipments are issued.
purchased items are assumed to be in stock.
Customer Services. A set of functions
Cumulative Order. An order accumulating
including the Project Realization Management
costs of repetitive production. Can be entered
module, used for creating and managing
manually, or created by the system whenever
installation projects, and the Service/Support
repetitive feedback is entered for an item and
Management module, used to track activities
site.
related to after-market service.
Currency Code. A code that identifies
Cycle. (1) The interval of time during which a
monetary units and forms the basis of exchange
system or process, such as a seasonal demand
rate relationships. Each database has one base
or a manufacturing operation, periodically
currency, but you can specify foreign
returns to similar initial conditions. (2) The
currencies during sales, purchasing, service,
interval of time when an event or set of events
and accounting transactions.
is completed.
Currency Conversion. Restating a monetary
Cycle Counting. A physical inventory
amount in a different currency. Also known as
technique where inventories are counted on a
currency translation.
periodic basis rather than once a year. Can be
taken when an item reaches its reorder point,
when new stock is received, or on a regular
 Glossary 197

basis. High-value, fast-moving stock is NRM. The format is a compound string that
generally counted more frequently than low- allows for optional display of date components
value, slow-moving items. The most effective (year, month, week, day), including delimiters
cycle counting systems require counting of a between components; for example, 06:15:97.
certain number of items each workday. Each sequence can have one date-driven
segment, or none, but not more than one
Daybooks. Also known as journals. Method of
D grouping GL transactions for satisfying legal
reporting requirements or for organizing GL
Data File. An organized set of data records in a
reporting in a manner consistent with common
computer system.
business practices. Multiple daybooks can exist
Data Item. The smallest element of data in a at any time. Transactions can be grouped in
database. daybooks by transaction type and transaction-
Data Record. A collection of related data
document type.
items. DEA. U.S. Drug Enforcement Agency.
Data Record Structures. The records Debit and Credit Separation. Users can view
comprising each electronic business document debit and credit activity separately in the GL by
implemented in EDI ECommerce in a running Account Balance Inquiry (25.13.17),
standards neutral format (SNF). These record Account Balance Detail (25.15.2), and reports
definitions are used for both the exchange files generated by GL Report Writer (25.21).
and the document repository.
Declining Balance Switch to Straight Line.
Data Retrieval Code. In GL Report Writer, A declining-balance method that switches to
either an analysis code or a basic GL item the straight-line method when the depreciation
(account, sub-account, and so on) used to calculated by straight-line is greater than the
extract data from GL tables. Used in data rows, depreciation calculated by the declining-
actual or budget columns, and in report balance method. This method fully depreciates
records. A set of data retrieval codes, including the asset.
one of each GL type, constitutes a query
Declining-Balance Method. An accelerated
specification.
depreciation method that provides higher
Database. A collection of logically related depreciation charges in the earlier years of
tables and records. Each database can have asset life and lower depreciation charges in the
only one base currency, GL calendar, and chart later years. The annual depreciation is
of accounts. When a multiple database calculated by using a constant depreciation
environment is established, distributed percentage rate and multiplying it by the
functionality enables planning and execution remaining net book value each year of the
across databases. asset’s service life. This method does not
Date-Driven Segment. A displayed value in depreciate an asset to zero.
an NRM numbering sequence that depends on Default. Information used or action taken by
the transaction effective date or the fiscal the system if a user does not specify different
period corresponding to the effective date. The information.
effective date is supplied by the program using
198 User Guide — Introduction

Default Domain. The domain a user typically Dependent Demand. (1) Calculated demand,
works in. Each user is assigned a default not forecast, for component items and raw
domain that displays during log-in. materials that are directly related to production
of higher level assemblies or end products. (2)
Deferred Revenue. In deferred accounting,
In operations planning, refers to end-item
collected revenue is held in a deferred account
demands exploded from a family plan. For
and is posted periodically. Deferred revenue is
example, a family consists of end items A
a billing option for service contracts that are
(25% of family forecast) and B (75%). If the
billed at the beginning of the service duration.
family forecast is 100 cases, the dependent
Delete Event Key. Fields used to identify demand is 25 cases of A and 75 of B.
deleted records in the audit database. Initially,
Depreciable Asset. Tangible item of value
the primary index fields for each database table
used by a business to produce income that uses
are defined as delete event keys. Users can add
depreciation to allocate its cost to periods in its
additional keys as needed.
service life.
Delivery Schedule. The required and agreed
Depreciable Basis. Value used for calculating
time or rate of delivery of goods or services
depreciation as the depreciation base. The
purchased for a future period.
depreciable basis is the fixed-asset acquisition
Demand. A need for a product or a component. cost minus any salvage value.
Can come from a customer order, forecast, and
Depreciation. The allocation of a fixed asset’s
so on.
cost to periods in its service life. The system
Demand Pattern. Seasonal pattern of demand supports the following depreciation methods:
such as summer, fall, Christmas. • Straight Line
Demand Pull. The triggering of material • Declining Balance
movement to a work center only when that • Sum of the Years’ Digits
work center is ready to begin the next job. • Flat Rate
Denomination. A denomination of a currency • Units of Production
is a way of expressing that currency, while • Custom Table
retaining its link with the originating currency. Depreciation Book. Book used for tracking a
For example, during the transition to the euro, fixed asset’s depreciation. It can be the posting
the French franc was considered a book that posts to the GL.
denomination of the euro.
Depreciation Convention. See Conventions.
Departments. A grouping of work centers for
Derived Cross-Rates. An exchange rate that is
reporting, planning, and accounting. Every
work center must belong to exactly one derived from one or two other exchange rates.
department. CRP calculates capacity and load Derived Exchange Rate. An exchange rate
by department. Labor, burden, and cost of derived from the established rates of two
production are tracked in the general ledger by different currencies and a common third
department. currency, such as a union currency.
 Glossary 199

Desktop. An interface that lets users access the Discount at Invoice. A practice in which tax is
QAD 2008 - Standard application using a Web based on sales or purchase amount minus credit
browser. The Desktop is designed for use over terms discounts. Discounts at invoice are
a company intranet or wide-area network. calculated at order entry.
Destination List. A list of application IDs Discount at Payment. A practice in which tax
registered with Q/LinQ that can be used for is based on sales or purchase amount minus
publishing, sending, and deleting or archiving credit terms discounts actually taken.
documents. Destination lists create only one Discounts at payment are calculated when
copy of a document for management and payments are received or generated.
storage, minimizing disk space and
Discrete. Constituting a separate, distinct item.
performance requirements.
Discrete Order Quantity. An order quantity
Detail Allocation. The act of reserving exact
that represents an integer number of periods of
items of inventory at a specific location by
demand. See also Lot for Lot (LFL).
specifying lot and/or serial numbers, expiration
dates, sites and/or locations. Dispatch List. (1) A listing of all
manufacturing orders by priority. Contains
Device. Any piece of hardware available to
information on priority, location, quantity, and
the computer, such as a disk or a printer.
capacity requirements of an order by operation.
Direct Delivery. One of two possible delivery Usually generated daily and sorted by work
methods using Enterprise Material Transfer center. (2) In kanban environments, a list used
(EMT). The supplier delivers goods directly to to move empty containers back to a supply
the end customer, bypassing the ordering source. See Kanban Dispatch List.
entity. The other is Transshipment.
Dispatcher. The individual who assigns calls
Direct Exchange Rate. An exchange rate to engineers. If paging is used, can notify an
explicitly defined between two currencies. engineer of an incoming call.
Direct Labor. Labor specifically applied to a Disposition Date. Date of permanent removal
product being manufactured or utilized in the of a depreciable asset from income producing
performance of a service. activity. This is often referred to as the
Retirement Date.
Direct Payments. Cash, checks, and wire
transfers sent by a customer. Disposition Reason. Reason for disposal of
an asset and required input at time of disposal.
Disassembly. Decomposition, separation, or
Reasons include sold, stolen, destroyed,
processing of an item into parts, pieces, or
donated, and impaired.
subunits that consist of co-products and by-
products. An example is the processing of meat Distribution Items. Typically, items that one
and poultry. site supplies to another site.
Disbursement. Physical issuance and
reporting of the movement of raw material,
components, or other items from a storage
room or warehouse.
200 User Guide — Introduction

Distribution Requirements Planning (DRP). Document Type Definition (DTD). A

The balancing of supply and demand for items specification that accompanies an XML
transferred between sites by calculating item document and identifies the specific functions
requirements, creating planned orders, and of the XML markup. See also Extensible
managing shipment schedules and Markup Language (XML).
transportation. Domain. A business operation with a single
Distribution Resource Planning. The currency and chart of accounts. Each database
extension of distribution requirements planning must have at least one domain and can have as
into the planning of the key resources many as required. Each domain can include
contained in a distribution system: warehouse one or more entities, one of which is
space, work force, money, trucks, freight cars. designated as primary.
Dock. An adjunct to customer ship-to sites. Downtime. Any time when a resource
Multiple docks are possible per ship-to. The scheduled for operation is not producing.
dock is assigned in the customer schedule setup Draft. A promise to pay on a certain date.
process. Similar to a promissory note.
Document Format. The specific printable data
Drill Down. A browse program attached to
and form layout of a document associated with a particular field, such as the Customer field.
a business transaction, such as a shipment. May Drill downs display records in the database and
be dictated by locale, reason for transaction, let you filter, sort, and graph data. You use such
legal requirements, or common business programs to find needed data. For example, use
practice. a drill-down browse to determine the number
Document Repository. A set of tables of a customer whose name you remember.
containing all electronic business documents Drop Shipment. A distribution arrangement
exchanged with trading partners using EDI where the seller serves as a selling agent by
ECommerce. This intermediate repository collecting orders without maintaining
holds trading partner documents and allows inventories. The manufacturer then ships
them to be formatted into a state acceptable for orders directly to customers.
gateway processing during import. It also
allows for the consolidation of all required DRP. See Distribution Requirements Planning
trading partner document data during the (DRP).
export process. DTD. See Document Type Definition (DTD).
Document Type. A category identifying the Dual Pricing. Allows various financial
type of business transaction that a printed documents, such as sales orders and invoices,
document describes. Valid document types to be expressed in two currencies. The second
include shippers, invoices, credit notices, and currency is for informational purposes only.
material receivers.
Due Date. (1) Work order: The date a product
is available for issue to a shop or shipment to a
customer. (2) Purchase order: The date a
product is due to arrive from a vendor. (3)
Sales order: The date an order is due to ship.
 Glossary 201

Dunning Letter. A letter sent to a customer EDI. See Electronic Data Interchange (EDI).
showing all open accounts receivable
EDI ECommerce. The EDI component of
transactions that meet selection criteria.
QAD Enterprise Applications.
Severity of language in each letter sent
typically increases with the length of time an EDIFACT. Electronic Data Interchange for
AR item is unpaid. Administration, Commerce, and Transport.
Generally used to refer to the set of
Dunning Level. Code used to determine the
international standards that were developed to
appropriate dunning letter to issue a customer.
enable EDI among businesses located in North
Tracks the number of letters that have been
America, Europe, and other geographic
sent to a customer and the number of times
regions. In 1987, the EDIFACT syntax
each AR item has been listed in the letters.
proposals were accepted by the ISO Technical
Dynamic Unpeg. The process in which peg Board and the number ISO 9735 was allotted.
quantities are unpegged from unconfirmed These standards are application,
shippers and pegged to ship lines on newly communications medium, and machine-
created shippers for the same order line independent.
number.
EEC. European Economic Community.
Effective Date. (1) The date when a
component or an operation is to be added or
E removed from a bill of material or assembly
EC. See Electronic Commerce (EC) process. (2) Used in the explosion process to
create demands for correct items. Normally,
EC Subsystem. Electronic commerce
bill of material and routing systems provide for
subsystem. Includes the software and hardware
an effectivity start date and stop date, for each
components required for EDI ECommerce to
relationship. Can be controlled by serial
exchange electronic business documents with
number rather than date. (3) The first date to be
trading partners. The software components of
used by a transaction. Also known as As Of
an EC subsystem commonly include data
Date or GL Effective Date. (4) The date used to
communications, document mapping and
select tax rates and price lists for a transaction.
translation, and document management
features such as acknowledgment, Effectivity Date. See Effective Date.
reconciliation, and archiving. Efficiency. The relationship between planned
ECCN. Export Control Classification Number. standard time and actual time charged to a task.
Calculated by dividing standard hours earned
ECN. See Engineering Change Notice (ECN).
by actual direct labor hours. May be more than
Economic Order Quantity (EOQ). A demand 100%.
rate calculation used to balance total inventory
Electronic Business Document. A business
costs against order costs. A type of fixed-order
document, such as a purchase order or invoice,
quantity used to determine the optimal amount
represented in a machine-interpretable format
of an item to be purchased or manufactured at
defined according to international, national,
one time. The purpose of the calculation is to
industry, or proprietary standards.
minimize combined costs of acquiring and
carrying inventory.
202 User Guide — Introduction

Electronic Commerce (EC). The use of End User. A person who normally uses an
computer and telecommunication technologies item, requests maintenance for it, and reports
to conduct business. problems. Each sold-to customer can have
many end users.
Electronic Data Interchange (EDI). An
international protocol for electronically Ending Year. The last year of historical sales
transmitting documents such as purchase data analyzed by a forecast calculation.
orders, supplier schedules, sales orders,
End-Item Planning. Operations planning for
customer schedules, invoices, and advance ship
end items. Typically performed in the short- to
notices (ASNs) between trading partners. Also
medium-term horizon (zero to six months).
used by EMT to transfer messages between
Used to optimize global target inventory and
business units.
production levels, and to develop production
Electronic Signature Category. A QAD- schedules for supply sites and production lines.
provided definition of a set of data that can be For this, operations plans are developed and
signed as a unit in certain menu programs. maintained for every end item.
Electronic Signature Profile. A record that Engineer. In customer service functions, an
contains information that controls how individual who provides labor required to
electronic signatures are applied for a given complete a project or resolve a support call.
signature category. It includes list of programs
Engineer Schedule. A list indicating when an
that create signatures, a detailed list of tables
engineer is available to take calls. Includes
and fields included in the signed record, filters
days and hours worked, and availability on
that determine whether specific records are
holidays. An engineer can work from a master
subject to signatures, and fields that control
schedule or an individual schedule.
various aspects of the signature process.
Engineering Change Notice (ECN). A
Elimination Entries. Adjustments made in the
document tracking revision to a product
consolidating entity to support the concept that
structure, item list, or drawing authorized by an
the parent company and its subsidiaries are
engineering department. Usually has a control
viewed as a single economic entity. These
number and a stated reason, such as safety or
adjustments eliminate any problems caused by
cost reduction. Must be reviewed and agreed
transactions that have occurred between the
upon by all affected departments.
two separate legal entities.
Enterprise Material Transfer (EMT). The
EMT. See Enterprise Material Transfer (EMT).
automatic translation of sales orders or material
EMU. See European Monetary Union (EMU). orders into purchase orders and transmission to
the appropriate supplier using EDI
End Item. An item that is a final product in
ECommerce. EMT also manages and
itself, for which an order or independent
coordinates changes so that SO (or MO) and
requirement exists. Can be a component of a
PO information are synchronized. Multi-level
different end item. Also called a parent item. In
EMT manages orders across multiple levels
the item master table, designated by Purchase/
within an organization. Order changes made at
Manufacture codes blank, M, P, D, L, and W.
the top or bottom of the hierarchy are
transmitted up or down to the next level.
 Glossary 203

Entity. (1) An independent unit for financial which does not meet the selection criteria,
reporting purposes. An entity generates a these countries have decided not to participate
separate balance sheet and income statement, in the initial phase of the single European
plans budgets, and is assessed for taxes. All GL currency program.
transactions are posted by entity. The primary
European Union (EU). The economic
entity is the default entity for GL transactions.
integration of European countries under a
There is no limit to the number of entities in a
single macroeconomic and fiscal policy.
database. (2) In relation to database
architecture, an entity is a single person, place, Evaluated Receipts Settlement (ERS).
or thing about which data can be stored. Method of recording a pending payment to a
supplier without a supplier invoice. Liabilities
Entity Relationship. A data modeling
to a supplier are recorded automatically, based
technique that creates a graphical
on quantities received at the unit price
representation of the entities, and the
established by you and the supplier in purchase
relationships between entities, within an
order agreements.
information system.
Exception Message. See Action Message.
EOQ. See Economic Order Quantity (EOQ).
Exception Reports. A report listing only items
ERS. See Evaluated Receipts Settlement
that deviate from the plan.
(ERS).
Exchange Files. Data files containing
EU. See European Union (EU).
electronic business documents passed between
Euro. The new European currency that the EC subsystem and EDI ECommerce. These
replaced all of the existing national currencies files are comprised of the control record
of participating member countries in the structures defined by the EC subsystem and the
European Monetary Union at the start of 1999. data record structures defined by ECommerce.
Euro Transparency. Concept that the euro can Exchange Rate. The rate at which money of
be accepted in place of a EMU national one country can be exchanged for money of
currency, and any EMU national currency can another country.
be accepted in place of the euro. Applies only
Exchange Rate Gain/Loss. The amount that
during the transition period while the national
the base currency value of an asset or liability,
currency is considered a denomination of the
denominated in a foreign currency, has
euro.
increased or decreased due to a fluctuation of
European Monetary Union (EMU). A subset exchange rates over time. There are two types
of EU countries that have replaced their of exchange rate gains and losses: unrealized
national currencies with a single currency, the and realized.
euro. Consists of: Austria, Belgium, Finland,
Expediter. The production control person in
France, Germany, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg,
charge of expediting.
Netherlands, Portugal, Spain.
The remaining EU countries (Denmark, Expediting. Rushing a work or purchase order
Greece, Sweden, and the United Kingdom) through a production system to reduce normal
have not yet replaced their national currencies lead time.
with the euro. With the exception of Greece,
204 User Guide — Introduction

Expense. A non-inventory item consumed Fab Qty. Fabrication quantity. The maximum
during service of a call or execution of a quantity of an item a customer authorizes you
project. Examples include meals and travel to produce in anticipation of the customer's
costs for an engineer or technician. scheduled demand.
Explode. Demand for components of a parent Fabrication Authorization. Communication of
item calculated by multiplying parent item a customer to a supplier authorizing them to
requirements by component usage quantity fabricate items through a specified time period.
specified in a bill of material. Acts as the customer’s agreement to pay for all
items fabricated within the authorization
Explosion. See Explode.
horizon.
Exponential Smoothing. A forecasting
Family. A group of end items whose similarity
technique using a weighted moving average to
of design and manufacture facilitates aggregate
give the most recent sales data more weight.
planning and evaluation of sales performance
Should not be used for seasonal items.
and/or cost.
Export. To electronically render or disseminate
Family Hierarchy. A record defining the nature
information in a form other programs can use.
of demand relationships for a product family.
Extensible Markup Language (XML). A Defines end items and subfamilies, and
specification designed especially for Web percentage of total family sales forecast
documents that allows the definition, contributed by each. Also identifies marketing
transmission, validation, and interpretation of sites that generate sales forecasts. Resembles
data between applications and organizations. product structures (bills of material).
External Sequence. An NRM sequence Family Item. A planning item used with
number that is always supplied externally, family-level operations. Identifies groups of
typically entered by a user and validated by similar items differentiated only by size, color,
NRM. Never generated by the system. NRM packaging, or other minor characteristics. Has
verifies that the number belongs to the set an item Purchase/Manufacture code of F.
defined by the sequence and that it has not yet
Family Plan. An operations plan showing a
been used.
family item’s sales forecasts, target inventory
External Setup. The elements of a setup levels, and production demands for a planning
procedure performed while a process is horizon. Can be viewed from global and site
running. levels.
External Warehouse. A customer warehouse Family-Level Planning. Operations planning
where inventory is kept. for family items. Typically performed in the
long- to medium-term horizon (six months to
three years). Used to project long-term labor,
F equipment, and financial commitments, and to
develop long-term material procurement plans
Fab Auth Days. Fabrication authorization for negotiations with strategic suppliers.
days. The time period or authorization horizon
FAS. See Final Assembly Schedule (FAS).
during which a customer authorizes a supplier
to fabricate items.
 Glossary 205

FASB. See Financial Accounting Standards Final Assembly Schedule (FAS). A schedule
Board (FASB) used in assemble-to-order environments. The
master production schedule (MPS) schedules
FCS. See Finite Capacity Scheduling (FCS).
options, models, and accessories. The FAS
FDA. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. schedules product assembly. Quantities on the
Feature Group. In configured products, a way FAS cannot exceed quantities on the MPS. In
of organizing a set of related options and an FAS system, order entry must be fully
accessories. See also Accessory and Option. integrated.

Field. A single piece of electronic information Financial Accounting Standards Board

such as a quantity or item number. One or more (FASB). Organization that establishes
fields make up a record. standards of financial accounting and reporting
for the private sector.
Field Notification. The alerting of end users to
a product defect. SSM provides a number of Financial Integrity Checks. Automatic cross-
related utilities for use in managing product checks that verify the integrity of related data
recalls. elements in your database. The most common
relationship checked is between total and detail
Field Replaceable Unit (FRU). A unit or amounts, where the sum of the details should
component that can be replaced during a equal the total amount.
service visit. Useful to a dispatcher or service
engineer in helping to determine how a service Financial Transaction. Any transaction posted
call is to be handled. to the general ledger that affects ending
account balances.
Field Service. The organization providing
service at end-user sites, in contrast to service Finished Goods. See End Item.
centers that repair products from their own Finished Products Inventories. Items for
facilities. Also called field operations. which all manufacturing operations, including
FIFO. First In, First Out. A method of final tests, are complete. Available for
inventory valuation that assumes inventory shipment to customers as either end items or
received first is used first. An accounting repair parts.
method only, and not necessarily related to Finite Capacity Scheduling (FCS). A
actual physical movements of items or scheduling technique used by advanced
materials. planning and scheduling (APS) systems that
File. See Data File. simultaneously takes into account material and
capacity constraints when generating a supply
Filter. A method for narrowing the data to be schedule. This is in contrast with standard
displayed in browses. For example, you may material requirements planning (MRP)
want to display item records in product line scheduling techniques, which assume infinite
1500 only. A filter lets you do this by entering capacity for all resources when scheduling
selection criteria. orders.
Filter Criteria. A conditional clause in a Firm Days. The number of days in a schedule
synchronization profile that determines which firm interval. The schedule firm interval begins
records from a table to synchronize. with the first day of a schedule release.
206 User Guide — Introduction

Firm Planned Work Order. A planned order Flex Fence. In flow scheduling, a percentage
frozen in quantity and time that cannot be of the current schedule used as a tolerance to
changed by MRP. Can only be changed by the determine whether future schedule
planner. requirements are within a reasonable range of
the current schedule.
Fixed Asset. Tangible item of value used by a
business to produce income. Floor Stock. Inexpensive, easily replenished
components such as screws, usually stocked on
Fixed Exchange Rate. An exchange rate that
a factory floor and used as needed, without
cannot be changed between the time an order is
requisitions.
negotiated and the time its invoice is paid.
Flow Schedule. In lean manufacturing, a time-
Fixed Order Quantity (FOQ). A demand rate
phased statement of item production
lot sizing rule where a fixed quantity must be
requirements for a specific flow production
ordered. Although order quantity is
line at a given site, which may be associated
predetermined, the time period is variable. For
with existing work orders and demand orders.
example, 250 items is the fixed order quantity,
but can be ordered once a week or once a FOB. See Free on Board (FOB).
month.
Focused Factory. A plant that produces a
Fixed Price. (1) In SSM, used to denote an limited number of products and/or employs a
item repaired or serviced with a preset price, limited number of processes.
regardless of costs involved. (2) In other order
Follow-Up. Monitoring of a work order’s
functions such as sales and purchases,
progress to see if operations are performed and
determines whether prices are fixed or subject
materials are received on schedule.
to update due to inflation or commodity
pricing. Prices not fixed are subject to batch FOQ. See Fixed Order Quantity (FOQ).
update based on changes in price lists. Forecast. An estimate of future demand for an
Fixed Value Segment. Any printable character item at a particular site, stated in terms of
(except commas) used as part of an NRM quantity per week. Enables you to purchase or
sequence; for example, NY. Remains manufacture necessary products in appropriate
unchanged once established. quantities in advance. Created by mathematical
means using historical data.
Flat-Rate Method. Depreciation method that
calculates depreciation by using a constant Forecast Horizon. The time period covered by
percentage and multiplying it by the a forecast.
depreciable basis over the asset’s service life Forecast Interval. See Forecast Period.
until the sum of the depreciation is greater than
the basis amount. At this time, the final year of Forecast Method. Statistical techniques used
depreciation is adjusted so that the total of to calculate forecast. Identified by a two-digit
depreciation equals the basis amount. number. Methods 01-06 are predefined by the
system.
Forecast Period. The time unit for forecasts,
typically weeks, months, quarters, or years.
 Glossary 207

Forecast Year. The year for which a forecast is Free on Board (FOB). Terms of a sale that
calculated. identify when title passes from a seller to a
buyer, and who pays shipping.
Forecasting. A business function that attempts
to predict sales and use of products so they can FRU. See Field Replaceable Unit (FRU).
be purchased or manufactured in appropriate
Full Pegging. The ability of a system to
quantities in advance.
automatically trace requirements for a given
Foreign Currency. Any currency other than component up to its ultimate end item,
the system base currency used by an entity in a customer, or contract number.
transaction.
Full-Period Convention. Depreciation
Foreign Currency Account. A GL account convention in which a full-period depreciation
denominated in a foreign currency. Transaction is calculated for the first period of the asset’s
currency amounts are held in the foreign life. No depreciation is calculated for the last
currency specified. period of the asset’s life. Depreciation is
calculated as if the asset was put into and taken
Foreign Currency Transaction. Any
out of service the first day of the month.
transaction denominated in a currency other
than the base currency. Full-Quarter Convention. Depreciation
convention in which a full-quarter depreciation
Format Positions. The headings for
is calculated for the first quarter of the asset’s
displaying and totaling groups of related
life. No depreciation is calculated for the last
accounts on income statements and balance
quarter of the asset’s life.
sheets. Also determine the order in which GL
accounts appear. Associated with either an Full-Year Convention. Depreciation
income statement or a balance sheet, but not convention in which a full-year depreciation is
both. taken regardless of the period that the asset was
put into service. No depreciation is calculated
Formula. Expression of ingredient usage as a
for the last year of the asset’s life.
quantity per batch or percent of batch. Can also
include processing instructions and ingredient Function Key. A key located above the
sequencing directions. alphabetic keyboard to which functions can
be assigned. For example, in the Windows UI,
Forward Scheduling. A technique for
F1 invokes field help.
scheduling work order operations forward from
an order release date to a date when more
capacity is available.
Four-Wall Location. Location within a
G
QAD Enterprise Applications site representing GAAP. See Generally Accepted Accounting
the external warehouse. See External Principles (GAAP).
Warehouse.
Gain on Disposal Account. A GL account
Frame. An area of a screen containing fields used to track gains from fixed-asset disposal.
and surrounded by a border. Usually fields in a
frame are for similar data.
208 User Guide — Introduction

Gateway Program. A program that either Global. Pertaining to corporate or enterprise-

loads data into the internal database from an wide planning and data consolidation.
outside source—such as a text file or an
Global Change. A change made in one part of
external application—or extracts data from the
a computer system that is automatically
database for transmittal to an outside
reflected throughout the entire system.
destination.
Global Tax Management (GTM). A tax system
GATT. General Agreement on Tariffs and
that supports precise tax calculations, complex
Trade.
tax environments, and taxes for multiple
General Allocation. The reserving of a needed countries in the same database. GTM
quantity of an item from available inventory at eliminates the need for regional tax systems.
a specific site. Does not reserve specific
GMT. See Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
inventory items.
Grade. The sub-labeling of items to identify
General Ledger (GL). The collection of all the
their particular makeup and to separate lots
asset, liability, equity, and expense accounts.
from other lots of the same item.
Amounts entered in books of original entry
(journals) are transferred (posted) to the correct Graphical User Interface (GUI). A method
account in the general ledger. of presenting computer actions and options as
pictures, buttons, and icons to users, rather than
General Ledger Calendar. A calendar used
requiring typed commands. You interact with
for accounting activities. Every database can
the computer by pointing and clicking with
have only one GL calendar and at least one
the mouse. The most common example of a
period must be defined. GL calendar periods
graphical user interface is Microsoft Windows.
are used to group GL transactions for
reporting. Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). The
international basis for relationships among
Generalized Code. A method of defining
time zones. Never affected by daylight savings
acceptable values for fields and having the
time adjustments.
system validate user entry. Codes can display
in a look-up browse for selection. Gross Margin. Sales minus cost of goods sold.

Generally Accepted Accounting Principles Gross Production Due. Projected production

(GAAP). A set of U.S. guidelines and rules and demand for a family item, not netted against
procedures issued by groups within the on-hand inventory. Family plans show gross
accounting industry to standardize accounting production due, calculated as (Sales Forecast +
practices. These groups include the Financial Target Inventory) – Previous Week’s Projected
Accounting Standards Board (FASB) and the QOH. For the first week, projected QOH is
American Institute of Certified Public zero.
Accountants (AICPA). Gross Requirement. Total independent and
Giro. A service of many European banks that dependent demand for a component prior to
permits authorized direct transfer of funds netting of on-hand inventory and scheduled
among account holders as well as conventional receipts.
transfers by check. Gross Weight. Total weight, calculated from
GL. See General Ledger (GL). item weight and tare weight.
 Glossary 209

Group. A set of users that share common Historic Exchange Rate. The exchange rate in
access requirements used to streamline security effect at the time of a transaction. This is
setup. recorded with the transaction amounts and
types of currency.
Group Technology. A system based on item
families where common processes are grouped
into manufacturing cells in a shop.
GTM. See Global Tax Management (GTM).
I
IC. See Inventory Control (IC).
GUI. See Graphical User Interface (GUI).
ID. An identification tag.
Implementation. The integration of a system
H into day-to-day operations. The system
implemented may be manual or computerized.
Half-Period Convention. Depreciation
convention in which a half-period depreciation Implementation Definition. EDI ECommerce
is calculated for the first and last period of the table definitions that define the formatting of a
asset life. particular electronic business document during
the import or export processes according to the
Half-Quarter Convention. Depreciation
trading partner document and application
convention in which a half-quarter depreciation
document requirements.
is calculated for the first and last quarter of the
asset’s life. Implementation Standard. A set of
programming guidelines that describes the
Half-Year Convention. Depreciation
correct use of general purpose programs
convention in which a half-year depreciation is
provided for an area of functionality.
calculated for the first and last year of the asset
life. See also Modified Half-Year Convention Import. To read a file created by another
(Version 1) and Modified Half-Year Convention program into a database.
(Version 2).
In-Process Inventory. See Work in Process
Hash Total. A mathematical value derived by (WIP).
an algorithm that uses cross-checks to ensure
In-Transit Inventory. Material moving
that two sets of data are identical. Often used to
between two or more locations, usually
verify the accuracy of financial data.
separated geographically; for example,
High-Water Mark. The maximum number of finished goods being shipped from a plant to a
users logged in to the QAD 2008 - Standard distribution center.
application or using an application that
In-Transit Lead Time. See Move Time.
connects to the QAD 2008 - Standard
application at a customer site during a given Inactive Inventory. Stock designated as in
period. excess of consumption within a defined period.
Also, stocks of items that have not been used
HIN. Health Industry Number.
for a defined period.
210 User Guide — Introduction

Inbound Logistics Charge. A cost incurred Indirect Labor. Work necessary to support
and payable to a third-party supplier for the production but unrelated to production of a
transportation of purchased items from an specific item or product.
external supplier to a company location.
Infinite Loading. Reporting all work awaiting
Included Tax. A tax already included in an a work center regardless of the capacity of the
item or trailer charge amount. work center to perform the work.
Inco Terms. Terms of trade defined by the Ingredients. The composition of an item. An
International Chamber of Commerce and used ingredient list is a source document for
in international contracts. See Terms of Trade. nutritional or product labeling information.
Income Statement. A financial report showing Input/Output Control. A technique for
the profit (or loss) business activities have capacity control where actual output from a
generated in a specified time period. work center is compared with output planned
by capacity requirements planning. Input must
Incrementing Segment. Part of an NRM
also correspond to plan and be adequate for a
sequence that defines a range of values, with a
work center to meet its capacity requirements.
lower and upper bound and an initial and reset
value. Each sequence must have one and only Inspection. The process of examining items or
one incrementing segment. products for conformity to specifications.
Indented Product Structure. A form of Inspection Lead Time. The normal or average
multilevel product structure where the highest number of working days needed to inspect an
level assembly is shown on the left margin, and item after it is received in an inspection area.
subassemblies are indented to the right. If a
Installed Base (ISB). The records of all items
component is used in more than one
sold to customers who may be involved in
subassembly, it is listed with each one.
future interactions with your company. Items in
Indented Where-Used. A listing of all parent the installed base may or may not be under
items. Shows respective quantities required for warranty or service contracts.
each, continuing until the ultimate end item or
Installed Base Item. Items actually existing in
level 0 item is referenced. The component item
the installed base, owned by customers and
is shown closest to the left margin of the
used by end users. An item does not have to be
listing, with each parent indented to the right,
an installed item to be entered in the installed
and each respective parent indented even
base. This is useful in situations where items
further to the right.
not sold by your company are part of an item’s
Independent Demand. Demand unrelated to configuration.
demand for other products.
Installed Base Record. A record consisting of
Indirect Exchange Rate. An exchange rate an item linked to an end user. The end user is
derived from the established rates of two always connected to the customer who
different currencies and a common third received the item currently in the user’s
currency, such as a union currency. possession.
 Glossary 211

Installed Base Reference Number. A method Interplant Demand. Items to be shipped to

to uniquely identify non-serial number another plant or division within a company.
controlled items in an installed base. Not to be Although not a customer order, usually handled
confused with an inventory reference number. as independent demand for master production
Although both serve a similar function in scheduling.
providing a unique pointer to an item, one
Intersite Request. A record sent to receiving
identifies items owned by end users, while the
and source sites. To the receiving site, a
other identifies items in inventory locations.
purchase requisition or supply record. To the
Installed Item. A status for any item or source site, a sales order or demand record.
component indicating whether it is eligible to
Intrastat Declaration. A report legally
become part of the installed base. Does not
required of most European businesses by EU
refer to any actual, physical item.
customs authorities listing shipments to and
Intangible Asset. Assets that provide future receipts from other EU countries. Used as the
economic benefit but have no physical main source document for producing an EU
substance. Examples include goodwill, patents, country’s trade statistics.
and trademarks.
Intrastat History Table. The database table on
Interface. The method of communication which an Intrastat declaration is based, which
between humans and machines. For example, contains a record for Intra-EU related
the keyboard is an interface between the user inventory movements. Used to guarantee a
and the computer. The QAD 2008 - Standard clear audit trail from an Intrastat declaration to
application has four user interfaces. See its underlying inventory transactions. Can be
Character User Interface, Graphical User created automatically or manually.
Interface (GUI), .NET User Interface, and
Inventory. All goods or materials used in
Desktop.
production processes, including raw materials,
Internal Sequence. An NRM sequence for components, subassemblies, assemblies, and
numbers generated automatically by the end items, as well as all supplies required by
system. Dispenses sequence numbers in production.
ascending order at the request of another
Inventory Account. A GL account used to
program. When a number is dispensed, each
maintain inventory balances for receipts and
segment in the sequence is examined to
issue transactions.
determine whether its value is to be updated.
Inventory Control (IC). Techniques related to
Internal Setup. A setup procedure performed
the maintenance of desired item quantities.
while a process is inactive.
Inventory Discrepancy Account. The GL
Interoperation Time. The time between
account charged for the difference between a
completion of the run time of an operation to
cycle count and a book balance.
setup of the next operation. Examples are
queue, wait, and move. Inventory Item. An item kept in inventory,
whose item number is found in the item master
table.
212 User Guide — Introduction

Inventory Movement Code. A transaction Invoice. A document containing information

classification documenting a known business about the purchase or sale of goods. States
reason for an inventory movement. Similar to credit terms and cash discounts, if any.
transaction types recorded in transaction
Invoice Schedules. In PRM, records that
histories, but may be more specific.
determine the dates and amounts used for
Inventory Plan. A plan projecting how much invoicing projects.
of a product line will be in inventory each
Invoice Sort. A high-level grouping of labor,
month at a given site. Records actual inventory
expenses, or items used during customer
levels for comparison.
service activities.
Inventory Status Code. A code assigned to
ISB. See Installed Base (ISB).
sites, locations, and items used to manage
inventory processing. Status codes determine: Issue. (1) Physical movement of items from an
• If inventory is available to be allocated to inventory location. (2) A transaction recording
sales and manufacturing orders (see this activity.
Available). Item. Any unique manufactured or purchased
• If inventory can be considered by MRP part, material, component, subassembly, or
when calculating net quantity on hand (see product used to track inventory, planning,
Nettable).
manufacturing, or financial transactions. Items
• If an inventory balance can be negative. must have a unique identifier, unit of measure,
• If inventory is not available for particular and product line. Items also identify and track
kinds of inventory transactions. non-real things such as documentation and
Inventory Transaction. A system record base processes for co-products and
associated with the movement of an inventory by-products, which have no monetary or
item and its value. A complete history of all IC inventory value, but are critical for operational
transactions is maintained and can be reviewed reasons.
as needed. Each transaction is identified by a
Item Explosion. A method of determining
transaction number and type.
what items or assemblies are used to produce a
Inventory Turnover. The number of items product. Results are usually listed on an
cycled through inventory in a year. Calculated indented material report.
by dividing annual cost of sales by average
Item Identifier. An alphanumeric code
inventory level.
uniquely identifying items, products, or raw
Inventory Valuation. Cost value or market materials. Also known as item number, stock
value of inventory. Cost value is computed code, or product code.
using FIFO, LIFO, or standard cost basis to
Item Implosion. The process of determining
establish cost of goods sold.
where an item is used in a product structure.
Inverse Rates. A rate that is calculated as the Results are usually listed on a where-used
inverse of an exchange rate. It is obtained by report.
dividing one by the exchange rate (1/Rate).
Item Number. A unique number identifying an
item.
 Glossary 213

Item Resource Bill. A list showing the amount K

of each resource required to make one unit of
an item. Kanban. A Japanese method of production and
inventory control first developed and used at
Item Tax Class. A grouping of items subject to Toyota. Designed for day-to-day on-floor
special tax rates or exemptions. control of production and inventory, it relies on
a series of control triggers, typically in the
form of cards. Kanban is the predecessor of
J Just in Time (JIT).

JIT. See Just in Time (JIT). Kanban Card. Card printed and placed on
container in a kanban-controlled production
Job. A sales order generated by a shop. May environment.
include one or more work orders. A sales/job
number is used to group costs. Kanban Dispatch List. A list used to move
groups of empty kanban containers back to a
Job Order Costing. A costing system where supplying source for replenishment.
costs are charged to specific sales/job numbers.
Can be used with either actual or standard costs Kanban Loop. Flow of kanban-controlled
in the manufacture of discrete items or product material from supplying site and location to
lots. consuming site and location. When received at
the consuming site, a new kanban card is
Job Shop. A functional organization where requested from the supplying site.
work centers and departments are organized
around particular types of equipment or Kanban Sizing. The process of determining
operations, such as drilling, forging, or the number of Kanban cards or items per
assembly. Products flow through departments container required to manage production.
in batches of stock or customer orders. Sizing is based on demand calculations
performed previously.
Join. A relation between data in two or more
tables expressed through fields that the tables Key Item. An item for which there must be
have in common. sufficient quantity on hand for a work order to
be released and a picklist printed.
Joint Order Set. A set of work orders
consisting of one work order for a base process Key Resource. Anything that can limit
and additional work orders for each of its co- production capacity and cannot be easily
products and by-products. These work orders increased, such as available funds, critical
share the same work order number, but have machines, floor space.
different work order IDs. Key Work Center. A work center that is
Just in Time (JIT). A technique designed to crucial to the manufacture of a product. If work
result in minimum inventory by delivering the does not flow through this work center, a
right items to the right place at the right time, bottleneck is created.
all the time.
214 User Guide — Introduction

Kit. A type of configured product that Lean Manufacturing. A philosophy of

represents a collection of items that are picked production that emphasizes minimizing the
and shipped together but that require no resources used, including time, in
assembly. Kit items are contrasted with manufacturing activities. It involves
assemble-to-order items. See Assemble to identifying and eliminating non-value-added
Order (ATO). activities in design, production, and supply
chain management, and results in highly
Kitting. The process of removing components
flexible, automated processes. Kanbans and
of an assembly from a stockroom and sending
flow schedules are example of lean
them to an assembly floor as a kit of items. Can
manufacturing techniques.
take place automatically whenever a full set of
items is available, and may require an Level. The relative position of a part or
authorization. assembly in a product structure. Each part is
assigned a level code.
Level of Coverage. The level of service
L provided and its limits. Determines what an
item is covered for and for how long.
Labor. (1) The direct cost associated with
labor. (2) The physical work performed. Level of Service. The amount of service
provided for various situations. Typically
Labor Burden. The overhead cost associated
defined as a percentage of labor, item, or
with labor. Usually stated as a percent of direct
expense service costs.
labor or cost per direct labor hour.
LFL. See Lot for Lot (LFL).
Labor Cost. The dollar amount of added value
due to labor performed during manufacturing. Life. Number of years used as a basis for
depreciation calculations for fixed assets.
Labor Rate Variance. The difference between
the reported work center labor rate and the LIFO. Last In, First Out. A method of inventory
payroll labor rate for an employee. valuation that assumes inventory received last
is used first. An accounting method only, and
Labor Usage Variance. The difference
not necessarily related to actual physical
between actual hours reported and time
movements of items or materials.
expected to complete a quantity received.
Limit. A ceiling on the amount of service that
Lead Time. The time in calendar days required
can be provided under the terms and conditions
to perform an activity. May include time
of a contract. Can be set up based on total
needed for purchasing, order preparation,
consumption, invoice sort, or work code/
queuing, transportation, receiving, and
service category combination. Can be defined
inspection.
in contract types, but is only used when
Lead Time Offset. Time added to a coverage is based on a specific contract. When
component’s release date to determine its a limit is exceeded, no more activity recorded
planned issue date. Planned issue dates among in Call Activity Recording is covered. The
components can differ to allow for phased system suggests an over-limit charge code.
assembly of the end item.
 Glossary 215

Line Allocation. A record defining how an Load Profile. See Resource Bill.
item’s production demands are distributed
Loading Method. A method of breaking down
between production lines at a supply site.
monthly forecasts into weekly buckets when
Linearity. In flow scheduling, the relationship loading forecasts into the summary detail table
between planned production and actual used by MRP.
production, viewed over time.
Local Variable. A variable, created with
Line Charge. Additional fees imposed on a Progress syntax, to contain the relationship or
line item. This includes any type of charge at derived value from one or more fields in one or
the line-item level, such as painting, polishing, more tables. For example, a local variable can
setup, handling fees, or special order fees such contain a total derived from the quantity and
as hazardous material handling charges. the unit price.
Line Item. An item on a sales or purchase Location. (1) Areas of a site where inventory
order. is stored, used, or shipped. Location
parameters identify what can be stored and
Line Utilization Percentage. A projected
how it can be used. Every inventory transaction
consumption of available production line
must have a site and location. The same
capacity by production due demands in an
locations can exist at more than one site. This
operations plan. Defined as Line Production
is recommended for multisite processing.
Due Qty ÷ Weekly Line Capacity, where Line
Capacity is Available Shift Hours * Line (2) For Fixed Assets, the accounting location
Production Rate. and entity for the fixed asset. There is no
connection between the fixed-asset location
Link-To. An association between an analysis and inventory location.
code and either a GL element or another
(3) For license registration, a location is a
analysis code. Link-tos create multitiered
physical site, facility, or address where
hierarchies for reporting in the GL Report
significant manufacturing, distribution or
Writer.
information processing activities occur.
List Price Limit. A ceiling on the price of
Location License. A license type that defines
individual items covered by a service type or
a predefined number of locations for specific
contract. When a list price limit is specified
applications.
and the price of an item exceeds this amount in
Call Activity Recording, the price is not Location Type. Code that identifies special
covered even if limits have not yet been storage requirements of an item, such as
consumed. An over-limit charge code is flammable, humidity controlled, outside, and
suggested by the system. so on.
Load. The amount of scheduled work for a Logistics Charge. A cost associated with the
work center or resource. Usually measured in transportation of goods in and out of company
hours or pieces. locations and payable to a third-party supplier.
Load Hours. Setup and run times for each Logistics Supplier. A third-party supplier of
operation. services associated with the transportation of
goods.
216 User Guide — Introduction

Look-Up Browse. A simple browse that lists Lower-Level Costs. The cost category
values for selection and that does not support representing a cost added at prior stages of
graphing, filtering, and printing. Contrast with manufacturing. Lower-level material costs
Drill Down. include the cost of all purchased materials used
in the final product and any subassemblies.
Loss on Disposal Account. A GL account
Lower-level labor, burden, and subcontract are
used to track losses from fixed-asset disposal.
developed from the cost of producing lower-
Lot. A batch or part of a batch having uniform level subassemblies.
character and quality within specified limits.
Or, in the case of a pharmaceutical produced by
a continuous process, a specific identified
amount produced in a unit of time or quantity,
M
and in a manner that assures uniform character Machine Burden. Overhead cost based on the
and quality within specified limits. See number of hours a machine is in use—both
Receiving Site Lot Number and Supplier Lot while it is being set up and while products are
Number. being run.
Lot for Lot (LFL). A lot sizing technique in Machine Center. See Work Center.
MRP where order quantity equals net
Maintenance Contract. A contract that
requirement.
includes a number of scheduled visits by an
Lot Number. A unique combination of letters engineer to ensure that equipment remains in
and/or numbers identifying a discrete group of good working order. See Preventive
items in an inventory location. Maintenance (PM).
Lot Reference. Identifier for a subset of items Major Setup. Equipment setup and related
within a lot. May reflect your production activities required to manufacture a group of
process. For example, when a lot includes too items in sequence, exclusive of the setup
many items for one container, lot reference can required for each item in the group.
identify items in each.
Make to Order. To manufacture a product to
Lot Sizing. Techniques for determining lot customer specification with little or no
size during MRP calculations. Most common stocking of raw material. Long lead-time
are Lot for Lot (LFL), Period Order Quantity components are sometimes planned prior to
(POQ), Fixed Order Quantity (FOQ), and receiving an order to reduce delivery time to
One-Time Only (OTO). customers.
Low-Level Code. The lowest level in a product Make to Stock. To manufacture a product
structure (BOM) at which a particular based on forecasts or other methods, prior to
component can appear. Net requirements for an receiving a customer order. Shipped off the
item are not calculated until gross requirements shelf from finished goods.
are calculated down to that level. Normally
Manual Checks. Handwritten payments
calculated and maintained automatically by the
transferred by bank or in person.
system.
 Glossary 217

Manufacturing Calendar. A calendar used in Master Schedule. See Master Production

inventory and production planning that Schedule (MPS).
consecutively numbers working days. Allows
Master Schedule Item. An item selected for
component and work-order scheduling to be
planning by the master scheduler. An item with
based on actual work days available.
critical impact on lower-level components and
Manufacturing Cycle. The time between resources, including work force, key work
release of an order to a work center and either centers, and cash flow. The master scheduler,
shipment to a customer or receipt into not the computer, maintains the plan for an
inventory. item. Can be an end item, component, or
phantom.
Manufacturing Lead Time (MLT). Total time
required to manufacture an item, exclusive of Master Scheduled Receipts. Total scheduled
lower level purchasing lead time. Includes time receipts from supply orders, which are planned,
for order preparation, queue, setup, run, move, firmed, released, etc. Can be master schedule
inspection, and put-away. order, purchase order, or distribution order
planned receipts.
Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRP II).
A comprehensive planning method integrating Master Scheduler. Manager of the master
business plans, MPS, MRP, CRP, and schedule. Must have both shop and product
execution support systems with financial knowledge.
reports and inventory projections. Material Order (MO). An internal order for
Mark for Release. To mark an approved but managing the transfer of inventory between a
not yet released PCR/PCO for release at the supply center and designated service or project
next run. locations. There are four types of MOs:
Marketing Site. A site generating sales • MOs associated with a call
forecast demand for an item, such as sales • MOs associated with a project activity order
offices and distribution centers. An item can be • MOs to replenish an engineer’s stock
sold from multiple marketing sites. The same • MOs that are expensed
site can be both a supply site and a marketing Material Rate Variance. The difference
site. See Supply Site and Source Matrix. between cost of components when and where
Mark Printed. To mark an already registered issued and the frozen work order bill of
NRM sequence number (see Register Value) as material cost.
printed. Material Requirements Planning (MRP). A
Master Production Schedule (MPS). An time-phased priority planning system that
anticipated build schedule resulting from calculates material requirements using product
master scheduling. Takes into account forecast, structures, inventory status, the master
production plan, backlog, availability of production schedule, and open order dates.
material, capacity, management policies and Determines what to order, when, and how
goals, and so on. Details what a company plans much. Supply is scheduled and rescheduled to
to produce in specific configurations,
quantities, and dates.
218 User Guide — Introduction

meet changing demand and maintain valid due Menu. A list of available submenus and
dates. MRP requires a source of demand, programs.
product structures and routings, accurate Menu Substitution. Replacing one program
inventory balances, and planning data. with another on the menu. For example, you
Material Usage Variance. The difference can set up the menu so that when users select
between quantity required of a component and a particular program, they get a customized
quantity actually issued. version of it instead of the one delivered with
the product.
Maximum Order Quantity. An order quantity
modifier applied after a lot size is calculated Merge RSS. A program merging open
that limits order quantity to a predetermined requirements in an active required ship
maximum. schedule (RSS) to a new active RSS using
Required Ship Schedule Update and Selective
Maximum Taxable Base. The maximum
Required Ship Schedule Update. See Required
transaction amount subject to tax rate.
Ship Schedule (RSS).
Maximum Weeks of Coverage. An item’s
Meter. Measures the usage of a fixed asset.
maximum allowable global inventory coverage
Used by the units-of-production depreciation
level. Affects either family plans or operations
method.
plans, depending on when target inventory
levels are calculated. When you increase an Method Variance. Unexplained variance. Any
item’s production due quantity, a plus sign (+) amount left in WIP at the end of work order or
alerts you to potential inventory surpluses. cumulative order accounting calculations.
Member Currency. Identifies a national Minimum Inventory. The planned minimum
currency that has joined a monetary union, allowable inventory for an independent
such as the EMU. Applies only during the demand item.
transition period. An example of a member Minimum Order Quantity. An order quantity
currency was the French franc. During modifier applied after a lot size is calculated
transition to the euro, member currencies are that increases order quantity to a predetermined
denominations of the union currency at a fixed minimum.
exchange rate.
Minimum Taxable Base. The minimum
Memo Entry. An entry made to the GL that is
transaction amount subject to a tax rate.
posted to memo accounts. A memo account is
used to record and report reference Minimum Weeks of Coverage. An item’s
information. Amounts posted to memo minimum allowable global inventory coverage
accounts print on financial statements, but are level. Affects either family plans or operations
not included in any totals or calculations. plans, depending on when target inventory
levels are calculated. When you decrease an
Memo Item. A non-inventory item not found in
item’s production due quantity, a minus sign
the item master table or considered by MRP. (–) alerts you to potential inventory shortages.
Shipping or receiving memo items does not
affect inventory or create GL transactions. Minor Setup. Incremental setup activities
required when changing from one item to
another within a group of items.
 Glossary 219

Miscellaneous Creditor. A generic supplier Module. A group of programs for related

used as a reference when generating payments business activities such as Purchasing or Sales
for organizations that are not set up as Orders/Invoices.
suppliers.
Monetary Assets and Liabilities. Assets and
Mission Critical Item. See Key Item. liabilities that are treated as cash, or cash
equivalents, representing a claim to receive or
MLT. See Manufacturing Lead Time (MLT).
pay a fixed sum of money. Examples are cash,
MO. See Material Order (MO). accounts receivable, and accounts payable.
Modified Half-Year Convention (Version 1). These assets and liabilities should be reported
Depreciation convention. If the asset is put into at their estimated realizable value.
service in the first half of the year, a full year of Move. Physical movement of inventory from
depreciation is calculated. If the asset is put in one location to another within a facility.
service in the second half of the year, no Usually made under the direction and control
depreciation is taken. If the asset is disposed of of an inventory system.
in the first half of the year, no depreciation is
Move Time. The time a work order spends
calculated for the year. If the asset is disposed
between work centers.
of in the second half of the year, a full-year
depreciation is taken. Moving Average. An arithmetic average
utilizing the most recent data. As new data is
Modified Half-Year Convention (Version 2).
added, the oldest data is dropped.
Depreciation convention. If the asset is put into
service in the first half of the year, a full year of MPS. See Master Production Schedule (MPS).
depreciation is calculated. If the asset is put in MRP. See Material Requirements Planning
service in the second half of the year, a (MRP).
half-year depreciation is calculated. If the asset
is disposed of in the first half of the year, no MRP II. See Manufacturing Resource Planning
depreciation is calculated for the year. If the (MRP II).
asset is disposed of in the second half of the MTZ. See Multiple Time Zones (MTZ).
year, a half-year depreciation is calculated.
Multilevel Product Structure. A product
Modular Product Structure. A type of structure showing all components used in an
planning bill arranged in product modules or assembly, and the quantity required of each. If
options. Often used where products have many a component is a subassembly, all components
options, such as automobiles. are also shown.
Modular Programming. A general approach to Multilevel Where-Used. A list of all
programming in which programs are broken assemblies where a component is used and the
down into components, called modules, each next higher level where the parents are used.
containing its own procedures and data.
Modules are coupled as loosely as possible, Multiple Co-product (Process). A process
with interactions minimized and tightly resulting in more than one co-product.
controlled. Applications are:
220 User Guide — Introduction

• Demand for one of multiple co-products Net Change MRP. Method that replans items
results in initiation of a process producing that have had changes in supply or demand
all the multiple co-products. since the last MRP run.
• Multiple co-products represented by items
Net Forecast. The amount of forecast not sold
having BOM/formula codes that reference
the same base process. in a given week.

Multiple Order Quantity. An order quantity Net Requirements. Gross requirements for an
modifier applied after a lot size is calculated. item or product less quantity-on-hand.
Forces order quantity to be predetermined or a .NET User Interface. A common UI
multiple of that quantity. For example, if framework for multiple QAD applications.
multiple order quantity is 5, an order can be Because the UI is based on Microsoft .NET
placed for 5, 10, 15, or any other multiple of 5. technology, it incorporates familiar UI
Multiple Time Zones (MTZ). A Manager metaphors, reducing the need for users to learn
Functions feature that supports the definition of how to navigate QAD applications.
various time zones and loading sample time Net Weight. The item weight per unit after
zone data. Also, an optional feature of SSM deduction of tare weight.
enabling the system to present call dates and
times from the point of view of a call’s end Nettable. An inventory status attribute that
user. When enabled, users of SSM in diverse determines whether MRP includes items in its
geographical locations can view times relative planning.
to their own time zones. Netting. Calculating net requirements by
subtracting quantity-on-hand from gross
requirements.
N Netting Logic. The way in which the system
NAFTA. North American Free Trade calculates a required shipping schedule. There
Agreement. are four options.
• If 1, only shipping schedules are used.
Named User. A person or operated device
• If 2, only planning schedules are used.
authorized to use the QAD 2008 - Standard
application and logged into a QAD 2008 - • If 3, planning and shipping schedules are
combined, with the shipping schedule taking
Standard application database at the customer
precedence where schedules overlap
site. Contrast with Concurrent Session or (replace logic).
Location License.
• If 4, planning and shipping schedules are
NDC. National Drug Code. combined, with the greater of the shipping
or planning schedule taking precedence
Need Date. The date items must be available where schedules overlap (consume logic).
for shipping or for issuing to manufacturing.
Equals due date plus inspection lead time, if Next-Period Convention. A depreciation
any. convention in which a full period depreciation
is calculated for the period following the period
Net Book Value. Fixed-asset acquisition cost that the asset was placed into service. A full
minus accumulated depreciation. period depreciation is taken in the last period of
the asset’s life.
 Glossary 221

Node. Item number or customer number linked Notification List. List of people to be advised
to an analysis code used in the best pricing when a change managed within the Product
model for sales quotes and orders and RMA Change Control module is routed and/or
issues. approved. Attached to the approval routing.
Non-Accelerated Depreciation. Depreciation NRM. See Number Range Management
methods that divide the amount of depreciation (NRM).
equally over the life of the asset. An example is
N-Tier Architecture. Computer architecture in
the straight-line method.
which applications are distributed across
Non-AR Payments. Payments such as tax multiple, or n, systems. A three-tier
refunds or rebates that do not originate as a architecture is one where user interface
result of customer sales. components are on a user’s client machine,
business components are on an application
Non-Depreciable Assets. Assets that have
server, and the database is on a separate data
characteristics of a fixed asset, but cannot be
server.
depreciated. Generally, these assets include:
• Property placed in service and disposed of in Number Range Management (NRM).
the same taxable year Function that supports regulatory controlled
• Tangible property including land, inventory, document numbering. NRM includes the
rented property, and term interest in property content and sequencing of a numeric series, as
• Intangible property including goodwill, well as preventing gaps in a series.
trademarks, and trade names
Non-Inventory Items. See Memo Item.
Non-Monetary Assets and Liabilities. Assets
O
and liabilities that are not readily convertible to Object ID (OID). A means of uniquely
cash such as items that will be used in the identifying a database record. In , OIDs are
future production and sale of goods and decimal values based on a date/time stamp and
services. An example of a non-monetary asset sequence number on the left of the decimal.
is inventory. The right side of the decimal is a registration
Non-Productive Labor. Labor costs for time value based on the OID Generator Code
spent in non-production activities such as specified in Database Control (36.24).
preventive maintenance, cleanup, or down ODETTE. Organization for Data Exchange by
time. Teletransmission in Europe. The primary
Non-Significant Item Number. An item standards organization for automotive EDI in
number that identifies but does not describe an Europe.
item. Offset. Time, in months, between start of
Normal Distribution. A statistical distribution production and date a resource is needed.
that is unimodal (observations close to one On-Call Schedule. An engineer schedule
mean) and symmetrical (deviation is as likely created to cover nights, weekends, and
to be plus as minus). Forms a bell-shaped curve holidays.
when graphed.
222 User Guide — Introduction

One-Time Only (OTO). A lot-sizing technique parent items scrapped earlier in the
that produces an order only once, based on the manufacturing process require fewer
due date of the first item required. Used for component items for subsequent
projects such as creating an engineering manufacturing operation processes.
drawing that occur only once in the
Operation/Process Yield. The ratio of usable
manufacturing of a product.
output from a process, process stage, or
Open Order. An active manufacturing order, operation to input quantity, usually expressed
purchase order, or unfilled customer order. as a percentage.
Operating System (OS). Software that allows Operations Plan. A plan showing an end
a computer, terminal, printer, and storage item’s sales forecasts, target inventory levels,
device to work together efficiently. Examples and production demands for the planning
are Windows and UNIX. horizon. Can be viewed from global, site, and
Operation. A single job or task performed as
production line levels.
part of a work order. All operations required to Operations Planning. A mechanism for
manufacture an item constitute a routing. planning global replenishment from supply
Operation Number. A number indicating the
sites based on demand and desired inventory
order in which operations are performed in a levels from marketing sites. Strives to simplify
routing. factory production planning by combining
demand from multiple sites. Enables you to
Operation Priority. A scheduled due date and/ allocate production across multiple production
or start date of a specific operation of a specific sites. Supports monitoring of actual sales,
job, usually as determined by a back- production, and inventory against targets.
scheduling process. Maximizes labor, equipment, and other assets.
Operation Reporting. The recording and Operations Sequence. Ordered steps for
reporting of every manufacturing (shop order) processing an item or assembly in a
operation occurrence on an operation-to- manufacturing system. Usually defined on a
operation basis. route sheet.
Operation Start Date. The date by which an Optimized Schedule. A production schedule
operation must be started to be finished by the that operates within the material and capacity
order due date. Calculated using scheduled constraints on an enterprise to best meet a set
quantities and lead times (queue, setup, run, of predefined business objectives. Optimized
move), or using work and time remaining to schedules are produced using advanced
complete the job. planning and scheduling (APS) systems.
Operation Time. Setup time plus run time. Option. For configured products, a choice
Operation-Based Yield. A technique for between two or more versions of a required
determining component item requirements. Op component, such as the choice of engine size
Based Yield uses the yield percentage of the for a car.
item’s routing information to determine if Order. A contract with a supplier for items to
be delivered on specified dates. States who is
involved, terms, tax data, and shipping costs.
 Glossary 223

Order Entry. Acceptance and translation of a OTO. See One-Time Only (OTO).
customer order into terms used by the
Outbound Logistics Charge. A cost incurred
manufacturer. Can range from processing
and payable to a third-party supplier for the
shipping documents for finished goods to
transportation of goods from a company
creating engineering documents for make-to-
location to a customer or to another company
order items.
location.
Order Modifiers. Item characteristics such as
Outside Shop. A vendor. Used to convey the
order quantity, order policy, order period, order
idea of a vendor as an extension of a shop,
minimum, and order multiple.
typically in subcontracting operations.
Order Point. See Reorder Point.
Overhead. Costs incurred in operation of a
Order Policy. Method of specifying the business not directly related to products or
number and size of each MRP planned order. services produced. Distributed to units of
There are five types: product using a standard method such as direct
• Period Order Quantity (POQ). Generates labor hours.
planned orders to cover demands during a Overissue. Removal from stock and
specified order period.
assignment to a schedule of a quantity higher
• Fixed Order Quantity (FOQ). Generates than scheduled quantity.
planned orders equal to order quantity.
• Lot for Lot (LFL). Generates a planned order Override Depreciation. The amount of
to satisfy each demand. depreciation previously taken in another
• One-Time Only (OTO). Prototype items that fixed-assets system.
MRP orders only once.
• Blank. Ignored by MRP.
Order Quantity Modifier. Adjustment to lot P
sizing rules due to special considerations. Packing List. See Picklist.
Examples are maximum order quantity,
minimum order quantity, and multiple order Packing Slip. A document included with a
quantity. shipment that itemizes and details the contents.
Order Status. A code indicating whether an Pallet. A portable platform used to store and
item or order is open, canceled, or closed. transport inventory. Some companies group
items by pallet for operations planning.
Orders Plan. A plan projecting how many
sales orders will be booked each month for a PAO. See Project Activity Order (PAO).
given product line at a given site. Records the PAR. See Project Activity Recording (PAR).
actual number booked for comparison.
Parent. See Parent Entity and Parent Item.
Originating Entry. Any entry that increases the
value of a sub-ledger account. For example, Parent Entity. A company that owns a
posting an invoice is an originating entry majority of the voting stock for another
because it increases the value of Accounts company, known as a subsidiary. Each
Receivable. subsidiary exists as a separate, legal entity.
However, the two companies function as a
OS. See Operating System (OS).
224 User Guide — Introduction

single economic entity because the parent Performance Measurement. Comparison of

company controls the activities and resources an item’s actual sales, inventory, and
of the subsidiary. As a result, the separate production levels with its family plan and
financial statements of the parent company and operations plan.
its subsidiaries are combined into a single set Period Order Quantity (POQ). A lot sizing
of financial statements called consolidated technique where lot size is equal to net
financial statements. requirements for a given item period; for
Parent Item. An item that is a final product in example, a month’s supply.
itself, for which an order or independent Periodic Expense Account. A GL account
requirement exists. Can be a component of a used to track the amount of depreciation
different parent item. Also called end item. expense for the accounting period.
Parent-Component Hierarchies. An indicator
Perpetual Inventory. A method of keeping
of how tax amounts are reported. Tax amounts inventory that immediately records on-hand
for a lower-level zone are reported both at that quantity for items as they are issued or
level and at a higher-level zone. received. See Physical Inventory.
Pareto’s Law. Concept that a small percentage
Persistence. A quality inherent in a procedure
of a group typically accounts for the greatest that creates its context when it executes and
percentage of value or effort generated by the maintains that context until the end of a
group. For example, 20% of items in inventory Progress session or until explicitly deleted. As
comprise 80% of inventory value. Also known long as a persistent procedure’s context is in
as the 80/20 Rule. scope, the triggers and internal procedures of
Partial Order. Any shipment less than the the procedure remain available for execution.
amount ordered. See also Backorder. Phantom. An item or subassembly directly
Past Due Demand. An order not completed by consumed into its parent items and not planned
the date scheduled. or stocked upon completion. Normally, lead
time is zero, and lot sizing is lot for lot. Permits
Payload. The data fields specified in a
MRP to drive requirements through the
synchronization profile whose values are
phantom item to its components while
included in a synchronization document.
retaining the ability to net against any
PCO. See Product Change Order (PCO). subassembly inventories. Facilitates the use of
PCR. See Product Change Request (PCR).
common product structures for engineering and
manufacturing.
Pegging. (1) In MRP and MPS, the capability
Phantom Bill of Material. A coding and
to identify for a given item the sources of its
gross requirements and/or allocations. (2) The structuring technique for bills of material, used
process of consuming a shipper line that is tied primarily for transient (non-stocked)
to a required ship schedule requirement record. subassemblies. For the transient item, lead time
is set to zero and order quantity to lot for lot.
Perform Date. A supplier's promised delivery Permits MRP to drive requirements through a
date. phantom item to its components while
 Glossary 225

retaining the ability to net against occasional Planned Work Orders. A suggested order
inventories of the item. Facilitates the use of quantity, release date, and due date created by
common bills of material for engineering and MRP processing when it encounters net
manufacturing. requirements. Only generated outside an item's
time fence. Must be approved by the master
Phantom Hierarchies. A tax reporting method
planner to become firm planned orders in the
in which one zone is an alias for another zone
master production schedule.
at the same level, and reporting is done only for
the alias. Planning Horizon. A period of time, in
calendar days, over which MRP is to plan.
Physical Inventory. (1) Actual inventory. (2)
MRP only processes material requirements
An actual count of inventory. Can be taken on a
within this horizon.
continuous, periodic, or annual basis.
Planning Product Structure. A product
Picking. Removing items from stock to fill a
structure used for planning, usually to forecast
work order or customer order.
percent of demand for options and accessories.
Picklist. A document that lists material to be
Planning Schedule. A schedule used for
picked for manufacturing or shipping orders. In
moderate or long-term planning of production,
distribution functions, known as a Pre-shipper.
materials, and resources. Shows weekly/
Pipeline Stock. Inventory to fill a monthly quantities and dates, and covers a time
transportation network and distribution system, horizon from the present out 2–6 months.
including the flow through intermediate
PM. See Preventive Maintenance (PM).
stocking points. Flow time through the pipeline
has a major effect on the amount of inventory PO. See Purchase Order (PO).
required in the pipeline. Time factors include POQ. See Period Order Quantity (POQ).
orders transmission, order processing,
shipping, transportation, receiving, stocking, Postal Code. Identifier for a postal district.
and review time. Called a ZIP code in the U.S. You can set up
tax zones by postal code whenever tax types or
Plan SDP Code. Planning Ship/Delivery
tax rates vary within a city.
Pattern Code. A code specifying the days of the
week or month when shipments or deliveries Posting. Transfer of debit and credit amounts
are accepted by a customer. to the general ledger.
Plan SDT Code. Planning Ship/Delivery Time Pre-shipper. A preliminary and temporary
Code. A code specifying the time of day when shipper created either automatically from
shipments or deliveries are accepted by a detailed allocation, or manually using Pre-
customer. Shipper/Shipper Workbench. Formerly referred
to as Picklist.
Planned Load. Standard hours of work
required by MRP planned production orders. Preventive Maintenance (PM). Actions taken
to keep an item in a specified operating
condition by performing service at regular
intervals.
226 User Guide — Introduction

Price List. A price structure defining specific Product Change Order (PCO). A change
prices, discounts, and markups at different document that details changes to a production
quantity levels. Can be stated in terms of process and is moved through a defined
company base currency or any other currency. approval sequence before updating production
tables.
Primary Business Unit (PBU). In EMT, the
organization in a supply chain that processes Product Change Request (PCR). A change
the original customer order. document similar to a product change order,
but with a shorter life cycle. Never affects
Primary Domain. A domain associated with
production. Once approved, is either closed or
the current database.
converted into a PCO for further work.
Prior Cum Date. Prior Cumulative Date. The
Product Life Cycle. (1) The stages a new
up to and through date of a prior cumulative
product idea goes through. (2) The time from
required quantity.
initial research and development to the time
Prior Cum Req. Prior Cumulative Required. sales and support of the product to customers
The total quantity required prior to the date of are withdrawn. (3) The time during which a
release. product can be produced and marketed
Priority Rules. Method used by a dispatcher profitably.
and production supervisor to rank work orders. Product Line. Similar items or products
Examples are critical ratio and operation due grouped for accounting and planning purposes.
date. Every item must belong to only one product
PRM. See Project Realization Management line. For operations planning, can identify
(PRM). items planned as a group due to similarity of
manufacturing processes, sales channels, or
Process. A systematic sequence of steps other characteristics.
producing a specified result.
Product Line Plan. A plan of sales, shipments,
Process Manufacturing. Production that adds and production for a group of items classified
value by mixing, separating, forming, and/or as a product line.
using chemical reactions. May be done in batch
or continuous mode. Product Line Resource Bill. The amount of a
resource required to produce one unit of a
Product. Any commodity produced for sale. production plan.
End items and replacement items are products.
Product Load Profile. See Bill of Resources.
Product Change Control (PCC). A module
that lets you make changes to item data, Product Number. See Item Number.
product structures, routings, formulas, Product Structure. A method of identifying
processes, and item specifications in a all raw materials, components, and
controlled environment without affecting subassemblies in a product. Recorded as a
production processes. single-level relationship between a parent item
and component, product structures determine
when and how many component items are
needed. Also called a bill of material (BOM),
parts list, or formula.
 Glossary 227

Production Control. Directing and regulating Project. In PRM, a series of installation tasks
the movement of goods through the that require items, labor, and expenses to
manufacturing cycle, from requisition of raw complete. Projects are delivered to designated
material to delivery of a finished product. customers in one or more steps over time.
Production Due. An item’s production Project Activity Order (PAO). In PRM, a
requirement. At global and site levels, group of related project activities that are
calculated as (Sales Forecast + Target managed and completed together as a unit of
Inventory) – Previous Week’s Projected QOH. work.
Production Forecast. A predicted level of Project Activity Recording (PAR). The
customer demand for an option or feature of an recording of actual time, materials, and
assemble-to-order or finished-to-order product. expenses consumed in executing a PRM
Calculated by netting customer backlog against project.
MPS for a family or product line. A product’s
Project Codes. Optional component of an
available to promise quantity is then factored
account number defined in GL setup functions.
based on the option percentage in the planning
Other components are account, sub-account,
product structure.
and cost center. Project codes are not available
Production Line. A set of production for all GL transactions. Inventory value, but
equipment dedicated to a particular item or not physical inventory, can be tracked by
family of items. Production lines are used in project codes.
operations planning and repetitive and flow
Project Location. An inventory location
scheduling environments.
where items are stored before they are
Production Plan. A projection of how much of consumed by a PRM project.
a given product line will be produced each
Project Realization Management (PRM). A
month at a given site; also records actual
module that provides features for recording and
amount produced for comparison. The key
managing complex installation tasks that
input into MPS and resource planning.
require items, labor, and expenses to complete.
Profit Margin. The difference between PRM provides features for creating projects,
production cost and sales price. tracking their activity, and generating invoices.
Program Name. The technical program name, Project Sub-ledger. In PRM, a set of fields for
as opposed to the description that appears tracking quantities and costs related to project
in the title bar. For example, Customer components.
Maintenance is the description of a program
Projected on Hand. In MRP, an inventory
called adcsmt.p.
balance projected into the future. The running
Progress. A database. Also a programming sum of on-hand inventory minus gross
language for accessing data in a database. requirements, plus scheduled receipts.
Progress Status Bar. An area at the bottom of
the screen containing information on available
options. Also called status bar.
228 User Guide — Introduction

Projected Quantity on Hand. A global Purchase Order (PO). A contract with a

projected on-hand inventory quantity, supplier to purchase a specific quantity of
calculated as (Previous Week’s Projected QOH items to be delivered at an agreed upon date for
+ Production Due) – Sales Forecast. For the a set price. Includes order quantity, description,
first week, projected QOH is the opening price, discounts, payment terms, transportation
QOH. Displayed by both family plan and terms, and all other terms pertinent to the
operations plan. purchase and its execution.
Projected Weeks of Coverage. The number Purchase Price. See Acquisition Cost.
of weeks of inventory coverage on hand after
Purchase Price Variance. The difference
producing quantities indicated by a family plan
between unit cost on a purchase order and GL
or operations plan. Initially, equals the item’s
unit cost in an item master. Calculated when a
average weeks-of-coverage factor. When you
purchase order is received.
change production due, the system recalculates
this using the item’s minimum and maximum Purchase Requisition. An authorization for a
coverage factors to project inventory shortages buyer to purchase a specific item, in a specific
(–) and surpluses (+) relative to the average quantity, at a specific due date. Can be
weeks of coverage. An asterisk (*) indicates produced by approving MRP-generated
that projected coverage satisfies the maximum planned orders or by manual entry.
coverage requirement. Purchases Account. A GL account charged
Propath. An environment variable containing when non-inventory goods are vouchered in
the list of directories Progress searches when Accounts Payable.
looking for a program to execute. Purchasing Lead Time. The number of
Proximo Terms. A special type of credit term calendar days from the date the need for a
used in France and other countries, enabling purchased item is recognized until the item is
you to manage due dates so that processing available for sale or issue. Includes time for
occurs each week, fortnight, or month. procurement, vendor lead, and receiving. Does
not include inspection lead time.
PST. Provincial Sales Tax. The system of taxes
used in Canada. Purpose Code. In a customer-scheduled order,
a code communicated as part of an EDI
Pull System. (1) In production, the production
transaction that indicates how the imported
of items only as demanded for use, or to
schedule should be processed.
replace those taken for use. (2) In material
control, the withdrawal of inventory as Push System. Replenishment or production of
demanded by using operations. Material is not items or materials in response to a given
issued until a signal comes from the user. (3) In schedule or order from a centralized authority
distribution, a system for replenishing field or warehouse.
warehouse inventories where replenishment
decisions are made at a field warehouse or at a
central warehouse or plant.
 Glossary 229

Q Queue. (1) A waiting area. (2) The time work

normally waits at a work center before
QDoc. A data document in XML format operations begin. (3) A holding area for a call,
inbound to that conforms to generated call quote, or service request before the next
schemas and events files from the QGen event takes place in its life cycle.
utility.
Queue Time. The time a work order spends at
QOH. See Quantity on Hand (QOH). a work center before being worked on. Higher
Quality Order. A document authorizing a test queue times result in higher manufacturing
or inspection. Specifies how much to test, lead times.
where, when, and how. Quotation. A statement of price, terms of sale,
Quality Procedure. A set of inspection or and description of goods or services offered by
testing operations linked to a work center. Used a vendor to a prospective purchaser. When
by quality orders in the same way work orders given in response to an inquiry, usually
use routings. considered an offer to sell.

Quantity Allocated. The quantity reserved for

use on specific sales orders or manufacturing
orders. R
Quantity Available. The quantity available to Rate Amount. A numerical field that functions
allocate to sales orders or manufacturing as one part of the ratio that defines an exchange
orders. relationship between two currencies. An
exchange rate can be presented in the following
Quantity on Hand (QOH). The amount in way: rate amount 1 units of currency 1 equal to
inventory of an item for a site or location. rate amount 2 units of currency 2.
Quantity on Order. Total quantity for an item Rate Variance. The difference between the
on all replenishment, purchase, or actual output rate of production and planned or
manufacturing orders. standard.
Quantity Per. Quantity of an item used in the Raw Auth Days. Raw Authorization Days.
production of its parent. The number of days a customer commits to
Quantity Qualifier. A character value paying a supplier for raw materials purchased
indicating whether a requirement quantity is for a scheduled item.
firm or in planning stages. Raw Authorization. A customer’s agreement
Quantity Required. Total requirements for an to pay a supplier for materials the supplier
item at a site, either for shipment on sales purchases for a scheduled item within a
orders or use on manufacturing orders. specified time period.
Query Specification. A set of data retrieval Raw Qty. Raw Quantity. The maximum
codes. quantity of a product for which a supplier is
authorized to acquire raw materials in
anticipation of a customer's scheduled demand.
230 User Guide — Introduction

Realized Exchange Rate Gain/Loss. The distribution of a batch or lot of drug product or
amount that the base currency value of an asset other material can be determined. Defined,
or liability, denominated in a foreign currency, maintained, and recorded by the receiving site.
has increased or decreased due to a fluctuation See Supplier Lot Number.
of exchange rates over time. Realized gains or
Recipe. See Formula.
losses occur at the time of settlement or when
the risk of exchange rate fluctuation is Reciprocal Exchange Rates. A separate
eliminated. exchange rate calculated as the inverse of an
existing exchange rate relationship. For
Reason Code. A code used to categorize
example, if the exchange rate of the euro
activities based on their cause. Reason codes
(EUR) to the Mexican Peso (PES) is defined as
are associated with a type. Predefined types—
2.23456 EUR: 1 PES, the reciprocal exchange
including Quote, Down, Downtime, Reject,
rate (PES to EUR) is calculated as: 1 divided
Rework, Scrap, and Ord_Chg—are used by
by 2.23456, or .447515 PES: 1 EUR.
functions in modules such as Sales Quotes,
Repetitive, Advanced Repetitive, Shop Floor Record. Related data items treated as a unit.
Control, and Sales Orders/Invoices. Other Usually accessed by a unique code.
types can be created as needed. In the Product Recoverable Tax. A tax paid on purchases that
Change Control module, reason codes are user is offset against tax collected on sales.
defined and specify severity levels related to Common in VAT countries.
the approval process.
Recyclable By-product. A product that can be
Receipt. (1) Physical acceptance of an item
reintroduced into the process that created it or
into a stocking location. (2) A transaction into higher- or lower-level processes within
recording this activity. any product structure/formula hierarchy.
Receivable. A financial claim against another Technically, by-products should be defined as
business or individual. components with negative quantities or
percentages, not as part of a co-product/by-
Receiver. A record that goods have been
product relationship.
received into inventory. Updates inventory
balances, and allows Accounts Payable to Reference. See Lot Reference and Installed
verify quantities and prices against the Base Reference Number.
purchase order before paying. Reference Date. An attribute of an Intrastat
Receiving. Physical receipt of material. history record stating when the record is to be
Includes checking a purchase order against a reported. The main criterion in selecting
receipt document, delivery to the proper history records for inclusion in an Intrastat
destination, and completion of receiving declaration.
reports. Refurbish. To clean and replace worn parts in
Receiving Site Lot Number. Any distinctive an assembly.
combination of letters, numbers, or symbols
from which a complete history of the
manufacture, processing, packing, holding, and
 Glossary 231

Regenerative MRP. An MRP process that re- Repair Parts. Individual parts or assemblies
explodes MRP planned items down through all required for maintenance or repair of
bills of material, creating a completely new equipment. Can be repairable or non-repairable
material plan. Maintains all valid priorities and assemblies or one-piece items. Does not
synchronizes all plans. include consumable supplies such as solvents
or lubricants.
Register Value. To make a permanent record
indicating that a given NRM sequence number, Repetitive. The production of discrete units,
within the set defined by a sequence, has been planned and executed to a schedule, usually at
used. Once registered, a sequence number relatively high speeds and volumes. Material
cannot be used again. tends to move in a continuous flow during
production, but different items can be produced
Regressive Tax. A tax that includes the tax
sequentially within the flow.
amount as part of a transaction taxable base.
Repetitive Schedule. A response to a
Rejected Item. An item not meeting quality
manually entered demand or an MRP-
requirements and, therefore, not able to be
generated demand for materials. Indicates how
moved to the next operation. Can be treated as
much production of a certain item is planned
scrap, a rework item, or if purchased, a return.
for each day at a particular production line and
Release. A schedule based on a scheduled site. Used to control and monitor the progress
order. and cost of manufacturing.
Release Date. The date an order is scheduled Replacement Value. Amount to replace a
to be released to the shop floor. fixed asset. Used for management purposes,
Release ID Number. A sequential number primarily in estimating budget or insurance
identifying a released schedule. requirements. Not used for calculating
depreciation.
Release Management. A combination of
processes for managing the regular exchange Replenishment Time. Total time between
of information among customers and suppliers. recognizing that a product should be reordered
This information is used to coordinate a and having the product supply available for
customer’s manufacturing activities and use. Represents the maximum turnaround time
demand for material with a supplier’s between supplying and consuming sites.
manufacturing activities and shipments of Report. A number input by an engineer or
material. assigned by the system during CAR
Released Order. An active work order. representing a service report document from
the engineer listing all labor, parts, and
Reorder Point. A level of inventory that expenses consumed on a call.
signals the need to reorder. Usually calculated
by adding safety stock quantity to expected Report Record. In GL Report Writer, the
usage during lead time. report title, format, row groups, and column
groups used in a report.
Reporting Currency. The currency that
financial data is translated in, for the purpose
of producing financial reports.
232 User Guide — Introduction

Reporting Zone. A tax zone for which Resource Load. Demand placed on a resource
separate tax reports are required. by a production plan. Calculated by
multiplying product forecast from a production
Repository. A database that stores persistent
line plan by resource requirements.
data. The place where component
specifications reside. Resource Requirements Planning. The
calculation of resource load. Uses demand
Repository Document. An electronic business
from production plan and master schedule. Can
document as represented in the EDI
then be compared to capacity of each resource.
ECommerce data tables in one of a number of
well-defined states of transformation between Response Time. The average delay between
trading partner and application document initiation of a call and its resolution.
requirements.
Retained Tax. A purchase tax remitted directly
Required Ship Schedule (RSS). A schedule to the government instead of to a supplier.
containing customer requirements as derived
Retirement Date. Date of permanent removal
from a customer’s planning and ship schedule
of a depreciable asset from income producing
transmissions.
activities. Disposition can be made by sale,
Requirement Detail. Information received in a exchange, abandonment, or destruction of the
schedule that is specific to a requirement. property. Often referred to as Disposition Date.
Examples include authorization numbers,
Retrobilling. The process of determining a net
packaging information, and administrative
amount due by applying a price change to a
contacts.
range of historical invoices.
Requisition. A statement indicating need for a
Return. (1) An item sent back to its supplier.
specific quantity of an item at a specific time
(2) A transaction recording this activity.
and place.
Return Material Authorization (RMA). A
Reserved Location. A location with inventory
transaction used to manage simple returns. An
that is dedicated to a specific customer or
alternative to calls for tracking customer
customers to ensure an adequate supply for
contact. Generally used when engineer
sales orders.
involvement is not required. Has three aspects:
Resource. Anything required for production • Receipt of returned items for repair or
of a product. Considered critical if difficult to replacement
obtain, or has a long lead time or other • Issue of replacement items
significant constraint. • Documentation and billing of return activity
Resource Bill. A statement of the amount of a Return Status. A status code specifying the
resource required to produce one unit. Two condition of items being returned during
types: product line resource bill and item customer service activities. Determines which
resource bill. Resources can be defined for default sites are recommended by the system
both end items and families. for the return.
 Glossary 233

Return to Supplier (RTS). In a customer Rework Item. An item requiring additional

service environment, a method for processing.
documenting and managing items returned to a
Rework Order. An order to rework a defective
supplier for repair or replacement. Enables you
part or item.
to link a return from your customer to a return
to your supplier. RMA. See Return Material Authorization
(RMA).
Return to Vendor. Material rejected by a
buyer’s inspection department and awaiting Rolling Forecast. A 12-month forecast
replacement, repair, or credit. beginning with the current month. Not aligned
with the calendar or fiscal year.
Revaluation. The restatement of an amount
denominated in one currency, into another Rounding Method. A record specifying how
currency, using the current exchange rate for currency amounts are rounded on printed
the functional currency. Other base currencies documents and reports. Determines rounding
can use a non-current exchange rate for level (for example, to the nearest dollar) and
revaluation if necessary. The restatement threshold.
determines the gain or loss that results from an Rounding Threshold. The point at which
exchange rate fluctuation. amounts are rounded up or down. If 0.5,
Revenue Product Line. A product line used to amounts from 0.00 to 0.49 are rounded to 0.00,
provide GL account codes for Call Invoice and amounts from 0.5 to 0.99 are rounded to
Recording. 1.00.
Reversing Transaction. There are two types Rounding Unit. Determines rounding level.
of reversing transactions. Must be a positive number that is a power of 10
• The reversal of an original transaction that multiplied by 1 or 5, such as 10, 500, 0.01, and
has not had any subsequent activity. For 0.005.
example, the return of a purchased item to Routing. A set of operations required to
the vendor is a reversing transaction, as long
manufacture a product. Shows work centers,
as the item was not paid for, or had an
machines used, sequence of operations, and
unrealized gain or loss recognized, during
sub-ledger revaluation. tools and standard hours required. Setup and
run time can also be entered. In some
• To support accrual accounting when revenue
is recognized after it is earned, rather than companies, includes information on tooling,
when it is received. This type of transaction operator skill levels, inspection operations,
is also used when expenses are recognized testing requirements, and so on.
after the benefits associated with them have Routing Code. A code identifying a set of
been received, rather than when payment is
routing or process operations required to
due.
manufacture a product. Usually the item
Revision Level. An engineering change level number, but can be different for alternate
for an item. Typically used in place of a routings or for similar routings or processes at
number change to control modifications that do different sites.
not change the form, fit, or function of an item.
234 User Guide — Introduction

Routing Roll-Up. Use of a routing to calculate replenishment quantity is received. (3) In MPS,
manufacturing lead time, labor, burden, and extra capacity or inventory added as protection
subcontract costs for a product. against forecast errors and short-term changes
Routing Slip. A slip attached to a document in
in backlog.
an approval cycle showing who is to receive Safety Time. See Safety Lead Time.
the document, and who has already approved
Sales Account. A GL account used for
it.
invoiced sales and returns.
Row Group. A set of user-defined rows.
Sales Booking History. A history of sales
Identify the structure of a report, line item by
orders received for an item or product line.
line item.
Sales Forecast. An estimate of future
Row Type. A required attribute of a row in a
demand.
group. Values are:
• Data. Holds a query specification used to Sales Order (SO). An agreement to provide a
extract data from GL database tables. customer with a quantity of a certain item or
• Calculation. The result of an algebraic items at a set price by a set date.
formula utilizing values from other rows. Sales Order Number. A unique control
• Text. Displays text information only. number assigned to each customer order,
RSS. See Required Ship Schedule (RSS). usually during order entry. In a make-to-order
environment, can be used as the product
RTS. See Return to Supplier (RTS).
number.
Rule. A programming expression, such as IF/
Sales Quote (SQ). A commitment to sell a
THEN, linking a condition and an action.
certain customer certain items at a certain
Run Sequence. A code used to schedule items price. Customers who use bids for choosing
on production lines when approving MRP suppliers often request quotes. Exact delivery
planned orders for line manufacture. dates and order quantities are usually specified
when a quote becomes a sales order.
Run Time. The time it takes to process one unit
of the product of a given operation. Salvage. The estimated value of a fixed asset
at the end of its useful life. This amount is
RVC. Regional Value Code.
reasonably expected in an open market for the
asset after it is no longer productive. If a
salvage value is defined at the beginning of the
S depreciation calculation, it is used to reduce the
depreciable base.
Safety Lead Time. Time added to normal lead
time for the purpose of completing an order in SBU. See Secondary Business Unit (SBU).
advance of its need date.
Scale. A percentage multiplier applied to
Safety Stock. (1) The quantity of an item to be forecast quantities.
maintained in inventory as protection against
fluctuation in demand and/or supply. (2) The
average amount of stock on hand when a
 Glossary 235

Schedule. A listing of work orders to be Scheduled Order Allocation. A method

processed through a work center, department, permitting a customer to allocate purchasing
or plant. Gives a start date for each work order, percentages among multiple purchase orders.
and can include other information. In creating a supplier schedule, required even
where there is only one supplier for an item.
Schedule Date Type. Indicates if
communicated schedule dates are shipment or Scheduled Receipts. Open production and
delivery based. purchase orders that have been approved and
released. Considered part of available
Schedule Days. The number of days of
inventory when netting for a time period. Not
discrete dates and quantities to appear on
exploded into requirements by MRP. MRP
printed or transmitted releases, and on reports
assumes that all components are allocated or
and inquiries.
issued.
Schedule Months. The number of monthly
Schema. A physical data model. A blueprint
bucketed quantities to appear on printed or
defining characteristics and relationships of
transmitted releases, and on reports and
entities.
inquiries, following weekly buckets and
discrete dates and quantities. Each quantity Schema Trigger. Progress .p procedures
represents a month's requirements from the added through the Data Dictionary to the
first Monday to the first Monday of the database schema. Schema triggers always
following month. execute when a specified event occurs.
Schedule Weeks. The number of weekly Scrap. (1) Material that does not meet product
bucketed quantities to appear on printed or specifications and is impractical to rework. (2)
transmitted releases, and on reports and Discarded property or items with no value
inquiries. Each quantity represents total apart from the recovery value their material
requirements for a Monday through Sunday content.
week.
Scrap Account. A GL account charged when
Scheduled Downtime. The planned shutdown items or products are scrapped.
of equipment or plant to perform maintenance,
Screen. An interface to a program that allows
or to adjust to softening demand.
a user to add, delete, view, or modify data.
Scheduled Line Hours. Number of production
SDP. See Ship SDP Code.
hours scheduled for a production line for a
week. Calculated as Line Production Due Secondary Business Unit (SBU). In EMT, the
Quantity ÷ Hourly Line Production Rate. organization in the supply chain that receives a
purchase order from a primary business unit.
Scheduled Load. Standard hours of work
See Primary Business Unit (PBU).
required by scheduled receipts (open
production orders) or to adjust to softening Security. A method of ensuring that users can
demand. See Planned Load. access only appropriate data and functions. The
system has several levels of security:
Scheduled Order. A specialized sales or
purchase order with schedules attached to it • Menu-level security prevents access to a
particular program or menu option.
and an indefinite life. Serves as the basis for
customer and supplier schedules.
236 User Guide — Introduction

• Entity security prevents updating of Sequence Number Auditing. An NRM

transactions by entity. function that maintains a history of changes to
• Field security prevents changing data in a a sequence number definition.
particular field.
Sequencing. Determining the order in which a
• GL account security prevents unauthorized manufacturing facility processes jobs in order
users from updating GL accounts.
to achieve objectives.
• Site security prevents unauthorized users
from updating data by site. Serial Number. A unique combination of
• Web security is used in conjunction with the letters and/or numbers used to identify a single
Desktop interface and controls access to item.
Web-enabled programs.
Serialized Components. Components that are
Security Group. See Group. serial-number controlled.
Segment. Part of the compound data structure Server Time Zone. The time of day at a server
of a sequence number defined in NRM running a QAD database. Determines the
functions. Each has its own set of system date/time displayed on many screens.
characteristics and behavior. When the optional Multiple Time Zone feature
Selection Criteria. Data used to include or is active in SSM, most dates and times are
exclude records and other data from being stored in the server time zone and can be
acted on by a program. For example, you can converted for display to an end user’s time
specify that a report should include only items zone or other selected time zone.
in product line 1500. Service. Repair, maintenance, and support of
Selection List. An element of the user equipment and operations.
interface that lets users select data. Service Categories. Records that represent
Selective MRP. An MRP process that plans detailed ways of categorizing customer service
only selected items and sites, passing down activity. For labor and expenses, service
gross requirements to the next unselected level, categories play a role similar to item numbers
but not replanning orders. in the item master.

Semifinished Goods. Uncompleted products Service Contract. A unique document

stored for future modification or specifying a customer, one or more end user
customization. records, and one or more items to be supported.
Defines terms and conditions of coverage.
Sequence. (1) A set of numbers defined by
NRM. (2) A number that determines the order Service Coverage Schedule. Defines days
in which records are processed. For example, a and hours during which service is provided.
sequence number determines how tax types are Service Date. Date a fixed asset goes into
calculated on a transaction. service. A book service date is the date the
Sequence Number. An element in an NRM asset went into service and depreciation starts
sequence. A unique identifier used to catalog for book purposes.
important documents. Can be alpha, numeric, Service Engineer. An individual who provides
or alphanumeric. labor and skills in a service environment. Must
first be defined as an employee.
 Glossary 237

Service Product Structure. A list of Settlement. The application of a voucher,

replacement parts for repairing or maintaining payment, or draft to open invoices.
an item. A set of items needed to perform an
Settlement Entry. An entry that offsets, either
installation. Also known as a service bill of
completely or partially, an open item amount.
material. Three standard BOMs can be
associated with each item: repair, PM, and Setup. Changing or refitting a work center or
installation. See Bill of Material (BOM). piece of equipment to produce a new item.
Service Request (SR). Request for an Setup Cost. Costs such as scrap, calibration,
engineering response to a call. Used to record downtime, and lost sales associated with
engineering changes and other suggestions preparing a resource for the next item.
from a customer base and from within a service Setup Lead Time. Preparation time needed
organization. Suggestions can be used for before a manufacturing process can begin. Can
product and process improvement. include run and inspection time for the first
Service Routing. A set of steps detailing the piece.
procedure to be followed in repairing, Setup Time. (1) Time required to set up a work
installing, or maintaining an item. Three center to process an item. Used in work center
standard service routings can be associated capacity calculations. (2) Time required for a
with each item: repair, PM, and installation. specific machine, resource, work center, or line
Service Type. A template defining rules to convert from production of the last good
governing a provider’s relationship with the piece of a lot to the first good piece of the next
end user of a product. Two categories are lot.
contact types and warranty types. Used to Severity Level. A designation of the
determine levels of coverage, response times, significance of an error found in a PCR or PCO
price lists, and durations. document. Contains a reason code describing
Service-Encapsulation Procedure. A the error.
Progress internal procedure that encapsulates a SFC. See Shop Floor Control (SFC).
set of services to perform additional document
formatting processes. A set of Progress internal Shelf Life. The amount of time an item can
procedures. Each provides a specific, required remain in inventory before becoming unusable.
service when executed. Services required for a Ship Complete. Percentage of a requirement
given document format may include gathering that must be shipped for the requirement to be
additional data to display on a document, considered complete.
determining a document’s readiness to print,
and using a specific print layout. Ship SDP Code. Shipping Ship/Delivery
Pattern Code. A code specifying the days of a
Service/Support Management (SSM). The week or month when shipments or deliveries
module that supports activities related to after- are accepted by a customer.
market service including call management and
escalation, call activity recording and Ship SDT Code. Shipping Ship/Delivery Time
invoicing, engineer scheduling, return material Code. A code specifying the time of day when
authorizations, contract, warranties, and the shipments or deliveries are accepted by a
installed base. customer.
238 User Guide — Introduction

Ship/Delivery Pattern (SDP). An industry- Shop Calendar. Calendars define the standard
standard code set (the QAD 2008 - Standard work week for a site and its work centers. They
application supports AIAG and ODETTE) also define exceptions, such as scheduled
used to schedule ship and delivery dates. Used overtime or shutdown periods. Calendars
by update functions in both customer and provide the basis for all manufacturing
supplier schedules. scheduling functions and are defined by site,
work center, and machine. Each database must
Shipment. A business transaction involving
have at least one shop calendar.
transportation of goods from one location to
another. Shop Floor Control (SFC). The process of
recording actual labor time expended during
Shipments Plan. A plan projecting how much
manufacturing.
of a given product line will ship per month
from a given site. Includes cost of shipments. Shop Order. See Work Order.
Shipper. A supplier document used to issue Shop Packet. A package of documents used to
and structure shipments. Sent to the customer plan and control movement of an order on a
as an ASN. Identifies items and (optionally) all shop floor. Typically includes picking lists,
containers by individual shipment. The shipper drawings, tool lists, routings, and a shop order.
constitutes the master container.
Shrinkage Factor. A percentage factor in an
Shipper Verification. Verification that the item master record that compensates for
structure and content of a shipment are valid. expected loss during a manufacturing order
cycle either by increasing gross requirements
Shipping Group. A set of source and/or
or reducing expected completion quantity of
destination addresses with shared shipping
planned and open orders. Differs from scrap
requirements, as dictated by legal jurisdiction,
factor in that shrinkage affects all uses of an
geographical considerations, or common
item and its components.
business practice. An address may belong to
multiple shipping groups, each identifying SIC Code. See Standard Industrial
specific requirements for shipping to/from Classification (SIC) Code.
other addresses in a group.
Significant Item Number. An item number
Shipping Labels. Container and item labels. whose format is intended to convey
Usually bar-coded. information about the item such as its source,
material, or shape.
Shipping Lead Time. Number of working
days normally required for goods to move Simple Interest. Interest paid on original
between a shipping and receiving point. principle only and not on interest accrued.
Includes acceptance time in days at the
Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP). A
receiving point.
protocol for exchanging information in a
Shipping Schedule. Used for short-term decentralized, distributed environment in XML
planning of products, materials, and resources. format.
Lists exact quantities with exact dates, usually
covering a few days or weeks.
 Glossary 239

Simulation. The technique of utilizing Source Matrix. A record defining the nature of
representative or artificial data to reproduce in supply-and-demand relationships for end
a model conditions likely to occur in the actual items. Identifies marketing sites that generate
performance of a system. sales forecasts for an item, and defines how an
operations plan calculation distributes an
Simulation Planning. The process of
item’s global production demands to supply
experimenting with alternate family plans and
sites. For an item, resembles a single-level
operations plans. An active plan can be copied
DRP source network.
into a simulation plan to model effects of
changes to production due quantities, without Source Network. For an item, a group of
endangering the active plan. supply (or source) and receiving sites used in
DRP. See Supply Site.
Single-Level Backflush. A form of backflush
that reduces inventory only on next-level-down Spares. Components, assemblies, and
items of an assembly or subassembly. See Back equipment that are interchangeable with like
Scheduling. items and can be used to replace items removed
during maintenance.
Site. An inventory and planning concept. All
inventory is stored by site and all planning is Specification. A requirement or description.
done by site. Each site belongs to one and only May include generic standards, requirements
one entity, but an entity can have multiple sites. for quality, and other information that yields an
Most functions work within one site— accurate statement of the technical
manufacturing orders expect to find all their requirements of a material, item, or service and
components at the same site; MRP and DRP of the procedure to be followed to determine if
calculate requirements one site at a time. A few requirements are met.
functions deal with multiple sites, such as
Split Delivery. A purchase order for a large
multisite purchase or sales orders, distribution
quantity of goods to be delivered in stages.
orders, distributed inventory inquiries, and
Allows a buyer to secure a lower price and
EMT.
control inventory investment.
Site Security. Restriction of data entry at
Split Lot. A work order divided into two
specific sites based on user security groups
smaller work orders after the order is in
specified in User Maintenance (36.3.18) and
process. Typically used to rush one part of an
Site Security Maintenance (36.3.16).
order through a manufacturing process.
SKU. See Stockkeeping Unit (SKU).
Splitting. Dividing a fixed asset containing a
SMP. See Symmetric Multiple Processor group of individual items into separate assets.
(SMP). Splitting is also used for partial retirements and
transfers.
SNF. See Standards-Neutral Format (SNF).
SQ. See Sales Quote (SQ).
SO. See Sales Order (SO).
SR. See Service Request (SR).
Sold-For Amount. Amount of cash received
from the disposition of a fixed asset. SSM. See Service/Support Management
(SSM).
240 User Guide — Introduction

Staging. Reviewing material requirements for Standards-Neutral Format (SNF). An abstract

an order before material is required. Usually data definition for electronic business
done to avoid problems associated with documents as contained in the EDI
inaccurate inventory records. ECommerce exchange files or document
repository, not biased toward any particular
Standard Bill of Material. See Bill of Material
EDI standard.
(BOM).
Start Date. The date an order or schedule is to
Standard Cost. The usual cost of an operation,
be released to a plant, based on scheduling
process, item, or product. Includes labor,
rules. Must be early enough to allow time for
material, and burden. Based on past costs,
completion of work, but not so early as to
estimates, and work measurements.
overload the plant.
Standard Cost System. A costing system
Statistical Value. The value of a shipment at
where unit costs are determined prior to
an EU border. Calculated differently by each
production. Actual costs are then compared to
EU country. Some countries include freight
standard costs for control purposes and the
and insurance. Others calculate invoice value
variances computed.
of goods. The system uses invoice value as the
Standard Deviation. A measure of the default, but the formula for calculating
dispersion of data or a variable, calculated by statistical value can be customized.
taking the difference between averages and
Statutory Requirement. A requirement
actuals, squaring each difference, averaging the
stipulated by law.
squared differences, then calculating the square
root of the average. Std Pack Qty. Standard Pack Quantity. A
multiple in which orders for an item are
Standard Industrial Classification (SIC)
shipped. Used to calculate a shipment so it
Code. A set of codes used to categorize
conforms to packaging configurations. Used by
companies into industry groupings.
MRP to determine quantity of planned orders.
Standard Operation. Operations common to For example, if an order’s multiple is 25, and
building several products or applicable to order quantity is 122, MRP creates a planned
different manufacturing routings. Can be order for 125.
predefined and reused in different routings.
Stock. (1) Items in inventory. Includes
Can also be used with SSM to define
components and raw materials. (2) Finished
operations common to the service of several
products or service parts ready for sale.
products.
Stockkeeping Unit (SKU). An item at a
Standard Version. A published set of rules
specific geographic location.
governing EDI, released by a standards
controlling agency. Each version contains Stockless Production. See Just in Time (JIT).
specifications for every EDI component.
Stores. Any stored material used in making a
product. Typically, raw and material
components not intended for sale.
 Glossary 241

Straight-Line Method. Depreciation method Subfamily. An item that is a component of a

that allocates asset cost evenly over its service family hierarchy. Can be either an end item or a
life. lower-level family item. See Family Hierarchy.
Sub-Account Codes. Optional component of Submenu. A menu, selected from a higher-
an account number defined in GL setup level menu, containing programs or other
functions. Other components of an account submenus.
number are account, cost center, and project
Subproject. An intermediate level of a PRM
code. Account codes uniquely identify
project used to group item, labor, and expense
transactions and budgets for financial
components into related engineering units.
reporting. Sub-accounts provide additional
detail on GL reports. Sum-of-the-Years’-Digits Method. An
accelerated depreciation method that provides
Subassembly. (1) An assembly or item used at
a decreasing fraction to the asset depreciable
a higher level to make up another assembly or
basis. Each fraction uses the sum of the years’
item. A component, not an end item. (2) In
digits as the denominator and the remaining
PRM, a parent item that is assembled from its
years in the asset’s service life as the
base components and delivered as part of
numerator. The numerator decreases each year
project activity.
while the denominator remains constant.
Subcontract. Using outside vendors to
Sums-Into Tax Zone. A GTM reporting
perform operations on a work order.
designation for a zone in which another zone is
Subcontract costs are recorded on the routing
included.
for a product.
Supplier. (1) A provider of goods or services.
Subcontract Cost. The standard cost per unit
(2) An individual seller with whom a buyer
charged by subcontractors to perform an
does business, as opposed to a vendor, which is
operation.
a generic term referring to all sellers in a
Subcontract Item. An item sent to an outside marketplace.
manufacturer for production. Received directly
Supplier Lot Number. Any distinctive
to a work order rather than inventory.
combination of letters, numbers, symbols from
Subcontract Lead Time. The amount of time which a complete history of the manufacture,
an operation spends at an outside supplier. processing, packing, holding, and/or
distribution of a batch or lot of drug product or
Subcontract Rate Variance. The difference
other material can be determined, which is
between purchase order price per unit and
defined and maintained by the supplier from
subcontract cost per unit as captured in a
which it was purchased. See Receiving Site Lot
cumulative order.
Number.
Subcontract Time. The number of days
Supplier Schedules. Cumulative, schedule-
required for an outside supplier to process a lot.
driven purchase orders with multiple line items
Subcontract Usage Variance. The difference from which releases of requirements and due
between subcontracted quantities received and dates are issued. Sent to suppliers.
work order quantities completed.
Supply Chain. See Supply Chain
Management.
242 User Guide — Introduction

Supply Chain Management. The movement T

of goods and information from suppliers and
multiple company sites through a Takt Time. In a flow environment, the rate at
manufacturing process. Includes focused which parts must be manufactured to satisfy
factories (sites dedicated to specific demand. Also known as operational cycle time.
manufacturing activities), consolidated Tare Weight. In a shipment, the weight of
purchasing, and establishment of global target containers only, exclusive of contents.
inventory levels.
Target Dataset. An identifier associated with
Supply Site. A site providing inventory to a an NRM sequence. Can indicate who owns the
marketing site. For manufactured items, sequence, or where its sequence numbers will
usually a factory. For purchased items, usually be used. A sequence owner can be a process, a
the purchasing site. A marketing site can have document, or other entity that a client can
multiple supply sites. The same site can be recognize. For example, the target dataset may
both a supply site and a marketing site. See be the name of the principal database field
Source Matrix. where numbers from a sequence are used.
Supplying Source. The point of Target Inventory Level. An anticipated
replenishment for a kanban-controlled item. required global inventory quantity. Except
Symmetric Multiple Processor (SMP). A where manually specified for an item, this is
computer system that includes more than one calculated by the system to match global sales
processing unit. In MRP and DRP runs, SMP forecast for the number of upcoming weeks
computers can increase efficiency by defined by the item’s average weeks-of-
distributing processing tasks over multiple coverage factor.
processors. Tax Base. An amount subject to a tax rate.
Synchronization Document. A document Multiplied by a tax rate to determine tax
representing a single add, change, or delete amount. Usually 100% of an item or trailer
action for a specific master table record. charge amount. Can be set up for a portion of
an item amount, for an item amount plus other
Synchronization Profile. Specifies which data taxes, and so on. Specified when setting up tax
to synchronize (tables, fields) and which data rate records.
changes to synchronize (add, change, delete).
Tax Class. A code linking customers,
System Daybook. The default daybook for all suppliers, product lines, and items for tax
transactions not assigned to another daybook. reporting. For customers and suppliers, used to
System Domain. A special domain containing select a transaction tax environment (set of tax
default data that is created during database types). For items, used to select a tax rate for
initialization and used as a template when each tax type. The product line tax class
creating new domains. System domains are simplifies item setup and can be used for
identified with a type of SYSTEM. reporting.

System-Level Items. Typically an item that is Tax Code. A code uniquely identifying
the parent or top-level item in a configured individual tax rate records. Can be system- or
product structure. user-assigned.
 Glossary 243

Tax Discounting. A practice in which tax Tax Zone Hierarchies. Used in GTM to set up
amounts are calculated based on sales amounts reporting relationships. Often, transaction tax
minus credit terms discounts. Taxes can be amounts for one zone are included in the tax
discounted at invoice (based on anticipated reporting for another zone.
discounts) or at payment (based on discounts
Tax-Basis Amount. Amount of a fixed asset
actually taken).
investment that can be depreciated for tax
Tax Environment. A set of tax types applying purposes. This is normally the book acquisition
to a transaction involving specific ship-from basis.
and ship-to tax zones (and, optionally,
Taxable Base. Denotes a specific transaction
customer and supplier tax classes). Determines
amount subject to tax. Similar to tax base.
which taxes apply.
Taxing Authority. The government branch, or
Tax Exemption. An amount not subject to tax.
representative, that is responsible for the
Can be calculated by tax usage, customer or
collection of tax revenues from companies
supplier tax class, or item tax class. If detailed
doing business within their jurisdiction.
reporting is not required, can be reported using
tax type NON-TAX. Temporal Rate Method. A method used to
produce translated financial statements. The
Tax Point. The moment in time in which a tax
Temporal Rate Method uses the closing
liability is incurred. In some countries, the
exchange rate effective at the time of reporting
moment goods are received. In others, the
to translate all monetary assets and liabilities.
moment the supplier receives an invoice.
Non-monetary assets and liabilities are
Critical in countries with recoverable taxes on
translated at the historical or average period
purchases. Generally, a company is not allowed
rate. Income and expenses are also translated at
to deduct recoverable taxes on purchases
the historical or average period rate.
against tax collected on sales until a supplier
invoice is formally processed. Term. The data element that links labels to
specific fields, letting the system determine
Tax Rate. (1) The percentage used to calculate
which labels display on screens and reports.
tax. (2) A record containing this percentage, as
The term is the same for all languages, and
well as other data used to describe the
displays in all uppercase with underscores.
conditions under which the tax rate applies.
Terms of Trade. The terms that define who is
Tax Type. A code designating a class of
responsible for paying a third-party supplier for
separately calculated and reported tax. Usually
transportation costs associated with the
identifies the geographic region associated
purchase of items.
with a tax type.
This Level Costs. A category of costs
Tax Usage. A code identifying tax rates that
representing a cost added at the current stage of
vary based on an item’s intended use or a
manufacturing. For a purchased item,
company’s nature of operation.
represents the purchase price at standard or
Tax Zone. A geographic region constituting a current. For an assembled item, usually
separate tax reporting district. Can be set up for includes labor, burden, subcontract, and any
countries, states/provinces, counties, cities, and overhead costs assigned.
postal codes, or for combinations of these.
244 User Guide — Introduction

Thread. Information associated with a single Trading Partner ID. In EDI ECommerce, a
use of a program that runs multiple concurrent unique reference for a trading partner as used
sessions on multiple computer processors. For by the EC subsystem.
example, when you run MRP or DRP using a
Trading Partner Library. A set of EDI
Progress Application Server, you can specify
ECommerce definitions for the electronic
multiple threads to control the number of
business documents required by a particular
processes available to the system for this
trading partner or for a particular area of
purpose.
business functionality.
Time Bucket. A time increment used in
Trailer Charge. A sales order amount such as
planning, scheduling, and reporting. For
freight, service, handling, installation, or other
example, weekly time buckets break
special charges associated with a shipment.
information down into weekly periods. Weekly
Can be taxed differently from line items.
buckets are considered the maximum for MRP.
Transaction. An individual event reported to a
Time Fence. The number of calendar days
computer system.
inside of which MRP does not automatically
make changes to a plan. For example, if an Transaction Currency. The currency that a
item has a time fence of 10 days, the system transaction is denominated in. Foreign
does not change existing firm planned orders or currency transactions are only executed
create new orders whose due dates lie within between two parties. Transaction currency is
the next 10 days. the same as document currency.
Token. In EDI ECommerce, a critical value Transaction Set. An individual EDI business
communicated between an EC subsystem and document for an EDI standard.
the QAD 2008 - Standard application that Transaction Translation. The calculation of
conveys such data as trading partner identifier the base-currency equivalent of a foreign
or document type. transaction-currency amount.
Tolerance. The permissible variation of an Transaction Type. Broad classifications of
item in quantity. business transactions, recorded in the system’s
TRADACOMS. Trade Data Communications. transaction history. Examples include sales
An EDI standard used in the exchange of order issues, purchase receipts, and unplanned
electronic business documents for domestic issues.
trade in the UK. This standard is administered Transformation Mapping. An EDI
by the Article Number Association (ANA). ECommerce process that maps imported
Trading Partner. A company with which business documents into formats usable by the
another company engages in buying or selling. system and exported documents into formats
usable by an external EC subsystem.
Trading Partner Document ID. In EDI
ECommerce, a unique reference for a trading Transient Product Structure. See Phantom.
partner document as used by the EC
subsystem.
 Glossary 245

Translation. The transformation of financial Triangulation. According to EMU regulations,

reports, or summary financial reporting data, the method of calculation that is required for
expressed in one currency to another currency. currency conversions involving the euro during
Translation is subject to rules dictated by the period when national currencies are
accounting practice, and in some instances, considered a denomination of the euro. When
legislation. converting between two national currencies,
the original national currency must first be
Translation Adjustment. A gain or loss
converted into the euro, and the resulting
created during the currency translation process
amount must then be converted into the second
that balances the financial statement in a
national currency. No alternative method of
reporting currency. The adjustment is
calculation can be used unless it produces
necessary because different exchange rates are
identical results.
applied to different types of GL accounts,
based on the translation method definition. Turnaround. See Changeover.
Transport Days. The lead-time, in days, Turnaround Data. In EDI ECommerce,
required to transport goods from a shipping site imported data received from a trading partner
to a receiving site. and expected to be sent back on an associated
exported electronic business document. This
Transportation Network. Description of a
data is stored in an ECommerce table and
transportation process, including mode (truck,
added to the exported document during
ship, train, and so on), shipping lead time, and
processing.
days available for scheduling shipping and
receiving.
Transshipment. The delivery of goods from a
supplier to a primary business unit (PBU). The
U
PBU then ships goods directly to an end UM. See Unit of Measure (UM).
customer. One of two EMT delivery methods.
Unapplied Payments. Payments such as
The other is direct delivery.
deposits and prepayments that do not apply to
Trend. A multiplier applied to forecast specific customer invoices, memos, or finance
quantities increasing or decreasing the charges.
quantities by an increasing or decreasing
Uniform Resource Locator (URL). A text
incremental amount each month.
string that indicates the location of an intranet
Trial Central Daybook Report. Lists account or Internet resource.
data for a specified daybook or range of
Union Currency. A currency that is comprised
daybooks in summary form.
of several other currencies. An example of a
Trial Daybook Report. Lists individual entries union currency is the euro. The euro is
for a specified daybook or range of daybooks, comprised of the local currencies of the EMU
displays all data specified in the selection member states.
criteria, but does not update page and entry
Unique ID. An optional user-assigned
numbers.
identifier.
Unique Key. Fields unique to a record.
246 User Guide — Introduction

Unit Cost. The total labor, material, and Utilization. A measure of how intensively a
overhead cost for one unit of production. resource is used. Equals direct time charged
divided by clock time scheduled.
Unit of Measure (UM). The terms in which a
specification is stated.
Units-of-Production Method (UOP).
V
Depreciation method that calculates
depreciation based on items produced or units Value Added Tax (VAT). A tax legislative
consumed from the asset. system used in Europe and Asia.
Unplanned Issue. An issue transaction that Variable Yield. A process output that is not
updates quantity on hand when an order does consistently repeatable in quantity or quality.
not exist.
Variance. (1) The difference between what is
Unplanned Receipt. A receipt transaction that expected, budgeted, or planned and what
updates quantity on hand when an order does actually occurs. (2) In statistics, a measure of
not exist. dispersion of data.
Unrealized Exchange Rate Gain/Loss. The VAT. See Value Added Tax (VAT).
amount that the base currency value of an asset
VAT Registration Number. A company-
or liability, denominated in a foreign currency,
specific ID code that appears on sales and
has increased or decreased due to a fluctuation
purchasing transactions in European Union
of exchange rates over time. Unrealized gains
(EU) countries. Consists of a 2-digit alphabetic
or losses occur before the settlement of an open
country code and a numeric or alphanumeric
asset or liability item when the potential for
code.
further exchange rate fluctuation exists.
VDA. Verband der Automobilindustrie e.V.
UOP. See Units-of-Production Method (UOP).
(VDA). A set of fixed-format EDI standards
URL. See Uniform Resource Locator (URL). developed to enable EDI between automotive
manufacturers in Germany.
US Exp. United States Export Administration.
Vendor. A company or individual that supplies
Usage. Number of units or dollars of an
goods or services. See Supplier.
inventory item consumed over a period of time.
View. A mechanism that joins data from two or
Usage Variance. The difference between
more tables. A browse uses a view for
actual consumption of a material compared to
searching. See also Join.
expected consumption.
Voucher. A document conveying authority to
User ID. User identification. Each user must
pay an invoice and record all relevant details
supply a valid user ID before log-in is allowed.
on the nature of the liability and the payment.
Use-Up Logic. The logic that allows MRP Verifies invoiced items and quantities against a
calculations to use existing quantity for an purchase order and receiving records prior to
item, then switch to a new item. Typically used processing payment.
to implement engineering changes or allow for
obsolescence or short supply of a current item.
 Glossary 247

W Work in Process (WIP). A product in

production that is not yet completed. Stages
Wait Time. The time after a work order is include raw material released for
worked on before it is moved to the next manufacturing, through completely processed
operation. material awaiting final inspection and
Warehouse System. A computer application acceptance as a finished product.
used in an external warehouse system that Work Order. A document, group of
exchanges data with the QAD 2008 - Standard documents, or schedules authorizing
application through the Warehousing Interface. manufacture of specified parts in specified
Warranty. An agreement to provide a customer quantities by a specified date. Can also be used
a specified level of service for a specified time. to designate orders to a machine shop for tool
Indicates exact terms and conditions. manufacture or maintenance.
Waste Product. A by-product with no Workbench. A tool for developing
economic value that can be considered a combinations of records. Workbenches can be
financial liability. May require an expense for used for repetitive schedules, intersite demand,
disposal or removal. containers, and pre-shippers/shippers.
Weeks of Coverage. A mechanism for Working Days. Actual manufacturing days.
calculating target inventory levels based on Does not include planned shutdowns, holidays,
upcoming sales forecasts. or non-workdays.
Where Clause. Record-selection criteria. Worksheet. A type of internal work order
maintained in PRM and used to record details
Where-Used. Logic determining where an
related to resource consumption for projects.
item or assembly is used in a product’s product
structure. Workstation. The location where a worker
performs a job, such as a machine or
Wildcards. Characters or symbols used in
workbench.
search or command functions in place of one or
more letters or numbers.
WIP. See Work in Process (WIP).
X
Work Center. A production area consisting of
XML. See Extensible Markup Language
one or more people and/or machines.
(XML).
Considered as one unit for capacity
requirements planning and detailed scheduling.
Work Center Calendar. The number of days
and hours a work center is open for production.
Y
Shows exceptions such as scheduled overtime Yield. The ratio of usable output from a process
or shutdown periods. to its input.
Work Codes. Codes used to classify project or Yield %. Yield Percentage. Percentage of
service activities according to the type of work acceptable quality of a manufacturing order.
associated with each.
248 User Guide — Introduction

Z • Have only needed inventory on-hand

• Improve quality to zero defects
Zero Inventories. A philosophy of
• Reduce lead times by reducing setup times,
manufacturing based on planned elimination of
queue lengths, and lot sizes
all waste and consistent improvement of
• Streamline operations to achieve these goals
productivity. See also Just in Time (JIT).
at minimum cost
Strives to:
 Index

A container and line charges overview 23

About... screen control programs 28
in character interface 89 Copy command
in Windows interface 56 in character interface 87
accelerator keys 45, 88 in Windows interface 49
accounts payable (AP) overview 12 multiple fields 59
accounts receivable (AR) overview 12 copy/paste buttons 58
addresses overview 18 cost management overview 12
customer sequence schedules overview 24
B customizable buttons 58
batch processing 74 Cut command
browse graphing 67–70 in character interface 87
Browse Graphing option 53 in Windows interface 49
Browse Options option 88
browses 63–67 D
drill-down browses 65 data types 28
drop-down icons 52 control data 28
filtering 66 display output 71
graphing 67 distribution overview 2
look-up browses 64 distribution plan overview 21
overview 27 documentation 34
buttons drill-down browses
copy/paste 58 accessing
customizable 58 in character interface 89
toolbar 56 in Windows interface 55, 65
filtering 66
C graphing 67
calculator icons 52 drop downs 52
calendar icons 52
capacity requirements planning (CRP) overview 10 E
cash management overview 13 EDI ECommerce overview 22
character client in Windows 78 Edit Image command 49
character user interface 77–92 Edit menu
character-based Windows menu 42 in character interface 87
codes 31 Windows interface 49
compliance overview 18 e-mail 72
configured products overview 5 exiting programs
consigned inventory overview 5 in character interface 86
250 User Guide — Introduction

in Windows interface 48, 62 L

external interfaces overview 20 logistics accounting overview 19
look-up browses
F description 64
field help in character interface 89
in character interface 88 in Windows interface 55
in Windows interface 54, 59
fields 31 M
file, output to 73 maintenance programs 26
filtering browses manager functions overview 19
drill-down browses 66 manufacturing overview 6
look-up browses 64 Master Comment Maintenance 49, 58
financials overview 10 master data overview 17
fixed assets overview 13 master schedule planning overview 9
flow scheduling overview 8 material requirements planning (MRP) overview 10
fonts 72 menu bar
forecasting overview 9 in character interface 83
formulas overview 7 in Windows interface 45
frames 32 menu organization 2
menu styles in Windows
G character-based 42
general ledger (GL) overview 11 icon 40
global tax management (GTM) overview 18 selecting 39
glossary 185–248 tear-off 41
gpcmmt.w (Master Comment Maintenance) 49, 58 menu substitutions
graphing browses 67 in character interface 80
in Windows interface 51
H menus
Help menu list of 93–183
in character interface 88 overview 29
in Windows interface 53 message bar 62
help, online multiple currencies overview 11
in character interface 88
in Windows interface 53 O
Hide Menu Items 52 operations plan overview 22
Options menu
I in character interface 87
icon menu style 40 in Windows interface 51
images, displaying 49 output devices
inquiries 27 in character interface 90
Intrastat overview 19 in Windows interface 71
inventory control overview 19
items/sites overview 17 P
Paste command
K in character interface 87
kanban overview 8 in Windows interface 49
keyboard commands limitations in Master Comment Maintenance 58
in character interface 90 physical inventory overview 19
in Windows interface 74 printing
in character interface 90
in Windows interface 48, 71
 Index 251

PRO/PLUS overview 23 quality management 9

procedure help release management 4
in character interface 88 repetitive manufacturing 8
in Windows interface 55, 60 resource plan 22
processes overview 7 routings 7
product change control (PCC) overview 18 sales analysis 5
product line plan overview 22 sales orders/invoices 4
product overview sales quotations 4
accounts payable (AP) 12 service/support management (SSM) 15
accounts receivable (AR) 12 shop floor control 8
addresses 18 supply chain management 21
advanced repetitive 8 taxes 18
capacity requirements planning (CRP) 10 user guides 34
cash management 13 work centers 7
compliance 18 work orders 7
configured products 5 product structures overview 7
consigned inventory 5 program stack
cost management 12 in character interface 89
customer sequence schedules 24 in Windows Interface 56
distribution 2 program types
distribution plan 21 browses 27
documentation 34 inquiries and reports 27
EDI ECommerce 22 maintenance 26
external interfaces 20 transaction programs 27
financials 10 utilities 28
fixed assets 13 Progress editor
flow scheduling 8 in character interface 84, 86
forecasting 9 in Windows interface 48
formulas 7 Progress messages 62
general ledger (GL) 11 Progress status bar 62, 74
global tax management (GTM) 18 project realization management (PRM) overview 14
Intrastat 19 purchasing overview 3
inventory control 19
items/sites 17 Q
kanban 8 Q/LinQ overview 20
logistics accounting 19 quality management overview 9
manager functions 19
manufacturing 6 R
master data 17 release management overview 4
master schedule planning 9 repetitive manufacturing overview 8
material requirements planning (MRP) 10 reports 27
multiple currencies 11 resource plan overview 22
operations plan 22 return button 62
physical inventory 19 routings overview 7
PRO/PLUS 23 running programs
processes 7 from character interface 80
product change control (PCC) 18 from User Menu
product line plan 22 in character interface 85
product structures 7 in Windows interface 46
project realization management (PRM) 14 from Windows character-based menu 43
purchasing 3 from Windows icon menu 40
Q/LinQ 20 from Windows tear-off menu 41
252 User Guide — Introduction

S Toggle Filter option

sales analysis overview 5 in character interface 88
sales orders/invoices overview 4 in Windows interface 53
sales quotations overview 4 toolbar 56
Save Settings on Exit 53 customizable buttons 58
screen elements displaying 52
in character interface 81 transaction data 28
in Windows interface 44 transaction programs 27
self-billing overview 23 types of data 28
service/support management (SSM) overview 15
shipment performance overview 24 U
shop floor control overview 8 user guides 34
Show Drop Downs option 52 User Menu
sign-on screen in character interface 84
in character interface 79 in Windows interface 45
in Windows interface 38 User Menu items
sorting browses 64 in character interface 83
static data 29 in Windows interface 45
status bar 62, 74 user toolbar
substitute program 47 customizable buttons 58
supplier performance overview 23 menu items 46
supplier shipping schedules overview 24 utility programs 28
supply chain management overview 21
W
T wildcards in browses 64, 66
taxes overview 18 Windows character client 78
tear-off menu style 41 Windows user interface 37–75
title bar WIP lot trace overview 23
in character interface 81 work centers overview 7
in Windows interface 45 work orders overview 7